Safety Manual

Document Title : OPERATIONS SAFETY MANUAL
Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

Revision Code : 00 (For implementation)
Revision Date :
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This document summarizes how ICOM shall manage its operations & maintenance
work scope based on the Health, Safety & Environmental (HSE) program as set forth
herein and correlated with applicable standards, policies and regulations of the
relative Client.
As an essential document of ICOM’s HSE Program structure, this OPERATIONS
SAFETY MANUAL, hereinafter referred as ‘SAFETY MANUAL’, describes the
implementing procedures of the Company’s general policies and regulations covering
the HSE management functions of organizing, planning and controlling the required
resource inputs and specific actions to meet the objectives of the Service Contract.
This SAFETY MANUAL includes HSE procedures as referred to industry standards
and procedures for each work category and corresponding areas concerning HSE
listed under its index, together with the necessary guidelines, forms, and discussions.
ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 1 of 231


Revision Date :
Health Safety and Environment Policy


Revision Date :
1.2 HSE Management, Leadership and Accountability

Health, Safety and Environment Management Commitment


Revision Date :
1.3 OBJECTIVES
The prime objective of this OPERATIONS SAFETY MANUAL is to ensure effective
prevention, planning and facilitate understanding of the specific safety practices,
resources and sequence of activities relevant to all phases of the Service Contract
Job. The main challenge is to smoothly implement the plan in a timely manner and
meet the overall HSE goals of the contract.
Through proper training, planning and compliance with all safety standards,
procedures, and work practices, all accidents / incidents causing injuries and
damages can be prevented. It is therefore further the objective of this SAFETY
MANUAL to:
 Establish high standards of safety. All project personnel from Management staff
and below shall comply with safety rules and regulations by the following code
conduct for safety laid down by the company.
 Ensure that each and every one has a duty and responsibility for safety of one’s
self and others.
 Meet all respects of the applicable statutory requirements.
 Comply with safety rules and regulations and eliminate all unsafe activities.
 Find out all possibilities of accidents and take appropriate safety precautions, to
avoid any risk of health and untoward incidents.
 Encourage effective implication of safe working procedures and practices.
 Maintain a hazard free, clean and safe work environment at project site.
 Enhance the safety procedures and knowledge through frequent education,
training and through advanced quality related to technology for all employees.
1.4 DECLARATION OF ADHERENCE TO CLIENT SAFETY REGULATIONS SUBJECT

TO STOPPAGE OF WORK
ICOM recognizes its responsibility to safely carry out its operations with all precautions
and considerations of the Client’s Safety rules, regulations and procedures; as well as the
well-being of its personnel, people in the community and properties affected by ICOM’s
operations. ICOM likewise declares to undertake all its job tasks in compliance to Client
Safety rules, regulations and procedures. ICOM’s failure to follow Client Safety rules,
regulations and procedures shall give the Client the right to stop the work.
1.5 LOSS PREVENTION PROGRAM

This OPERATIONS SAFETY MANUAL shall take effect as the company’s LOSS
PREVENTION PROGRAM. It has been prepared by ICOM’s HSE Department with the
necessary technical assistance by the key members of the Project Team.
The SAFETY MANUAL has been reviewed by the HSE Manager and approved by the
General Manager, and is subject for final review/approval by the Client and subsequent
implementation by all concerned. This SAFETY MANUAL may be updated for comments,
improvements, amendments or revisions which may be initiated by the Client. These
revisions shall be documented and duly approved by the Client. All new SAFETY


Revision Date :
MANUAL revisions, as part of document control, shall be provided to all concerned

holders of “Controlled Copy”.
1.6 SAFETY ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES
1.6.1 Organization
The Project Organization is wholly responsible for safely executing and completing the
contract scope of work. Each personnel shall be tasked to contribute for the safety
and wellbeing of himself and his fellow workers. This means the responsibility for safe
work execution begins from the project manager, and down to the labourers.
The Project Organization to be adopted in this contract job is illustrated in the other
schedules. This Project Task Force is linked to ICOM’s Head Office to provide
technical and functional supportive roles to the project needs. The Project HSE
Organization shall be structured as per below:
ORGANIZATIONAL CHART
PROJECT HSE ORGANIZATION
ICOM PROJECT MANAGER
CLIENT SAFETY
ADVISER SITE SAFETY MANAGER
WORK PERMIT SITE NURSE SAFETY SUPERVISOR SECURITY SUPERVISOR

ISSUER
WORK PERMIT SAFETY OFFICER SECURITY STAFF

RECEIVER
SAFETY ASSISTANT


Revision Date :
ICOM’s Project Manager, in coordination with Client Project Manager, has the overall
authority to administer the Service Management. They shall be fully supported by the
project key personnel, i.e.:
General Manager : - Overall Company representative

- Approving Officer for HSE policies & regulation
- Originator of General Directives and Programs of
HSE Department implementation
Work Site and : Overall-in-charge of all Work Areas and under the
Maintenance direction of Site Superintendent/s
Supervisors
Site Safety : In-charge of this SAFETY MANUAL’s implementation at
Managers, the work site.
Supervisors,
Officers
Administrative : In-charge of administrative functions for Personnel and
Assistant/ Secretarial works.
Secretary
Logistics & : Shall ensure all necessary liaison, support for supplies
Supply personnel and equipment and other logistics concern are
addressed.
1.6.2 Site Management Responsibility

Site Management thru
the Project Manager is responsible for the identification of Health, Safety and
Environmental (HSE) issues. The Project Manager shall also be responsible for
compliance of HSE requirements inherent in the project scope. Management shall
create an HSE atmosphere that provides proper communication and trainings
essential in the execution of HSE programs and procedures. The goal is to lead to
hazard recognition resulting to Zero accidents, incidents and injuries. The following
key personnel have their particular responsibilities as follows:
Project Manager
The Project Manager shall be responsible for the administration of the OPERATIONS
SAFETY MANUAL on his projects. He is likewise tasked to implement ICOM’s Safety
Policy and shall be ready to discharge the allocated responsibility in order to fulfil
ICOM’s commitment to follow all the relevant safety rules and standards. He shall
support and assists the Safety Officer and all Work Supervisors in their areas of
responsibilities.


Revision Date :
The Project Manager is also responsible for the provision of resources and the
development of the organization to implement the company policy on health
and safety at work and for ensuring that the policy is implemented and
monitored.
His other responsibilities include:
 Providing all the necessary support to the HSE Department and its personnel
onsite. This is to ensure that the company's OPERATIONS SAFETY MANUAL will
be implemented effectively.
 Ensure that all accidents and near misses are investigated thoroughly.
 Know the requirements of Client rules & regulations and relevant Saudi Arab
Government Workmen’s Regulations
 Ensure that Client rules and regulations are observed and followed.
 Maintain effective and prompt Communications on safety matters through all lines
of supervision.
 Review and evaluate project safety performances
 Provide necessary assistance needed to improve supervision performance at all
levels.
HSE Managers / Supervisors / Inspectors (Safety Officers)

All Safety Officers are responsible in advising the management on how the SAFETY
MANUAL can be fully implemented in the work site. They shall report to the Project
Manager and coordinate with Client’s Safety Adviser. Their responsibilities are to:
 Ensure full compliance to ICOM’s and Client’s OPERATIONS SAFETY MANUAL
at the project site.
 Advise and oblige the Project Management Team (PMT) in corrective actions and
measures to fully implement this SAFETY MANUAL to its fullest extent.
 Ensure that habitual safety violators or site personnel are reported and given the
appropriate disciplinary action in accordance with approved disciplinary
procedures.
 Provide guidance, advice and assistance to the site supervisor in the
implementation of this SAFETY MANUAL.
 Maintain current files of published safety literatures and disseminates information
for use and implementation to this SAFETY MANUAL.
 Carry out regular and random site inspections for all project areas under ICOM’s
scope of work.
 Bring to Management attention all deficiencies for subsequent safety compliance.
 Conduct and participate in job safety meetings.
 Coordinate site first aid and rescue procedures.


Revision Date :
 Coordinate and conduct safety training’s in accordance with the OPERATIONS

SAFETY MANUAL of the project and Client’s requirements.
 Investigate all accidents, injuries, fires, property damage, and other safety related
incidents, issues or disseminates required reports and ensures that recommended
preventive measures are carried out.
 Evaluate the necessity of acquiring safety equipment.
 Ensure that HSE-related equipment, tools and PPE meets applicable standards
during procurement.
 Conduct independent daily safety audits to check conformance with this SAFETY
MANUAL.
 Draw management attention to any defect or deficiency requiring resolution.
 Check proper usage and maintenance of protective equipment and evaluate its
effectiveness on the project.
 Conduct investigation of any injury to personnel, loss or damage to property
including high potential near misses.
 Encourage all trades to safety consciousness during safety toolbox meetings.
 Suggest ways of improving safety conditions within the workplace
 Suggest ways to prevent loss and damage to equipment and materials.
 Ensure that any equipment on site is suitable and provided with necessary valid
certificate.
 Keep abreast with new development in the field of accident prevention, accident
protective equipment, and first aid procedures and equipment.
 Prepare and maintain comprehensive records of all recordable/reportable incidents
and injuries.
 Prepare monthly statistics to show leading and lagging HSE indicators.
 Set himself as an example in the performance of utmost HSE compliance.
Superintendent/Supervisor/Foreman (Work Supervisors)

The Work Supervisors shall be responsible for the safety performance in their area of
responsibility. They shall be accountable to the Project Manager in compliance of this
SAFETY MANUAL and the responsibilities allocated to them. Before assigning any
task, together with the Safety Officer, they shall conduct a job safety analysis (JSA) for
the concerned task. They shall aim to maximize safety awareness and together
provide an environment of total participation and cooperation.
The JSA shall include analysing each task for hazards, occupational health, identifying
safe work practices and environmental issues. They will communicate the information
as a team to reach a consensus on how the work will be performed to ensure a safe,
efficient and high quality execution of the task. The work supervisors shall be tasked
to:


Revision Date :
 Implement and observe the requirements of this SAFETY MANUAL.

 Maintain an effective line of communication on safety matters to his subordinates.
 Present and explain the JSA of a task to the crew prior to performing the task.
 Ensure that all his subordinates have received Emergency Response orientation
prior to the start of their work on site.
 Explain the Work Permit procedure to his work group and the role of each one in
its implementation.
 Understand and enforce compliance of all safety rules and regulations.
 Conduct investigation of all incidents in his area of responsibility.
 Indoctrinate newly hired and transferred workers concerning the hazards of the
work or the task to be performed.
 Create safety awareness by promoting safety meetings, presentations, open-forum
discussions
 Initiate all necessary safety trainings to improve safety performance of his
subordinates on site.
 Set leadership example on site by wearing appropriate PPE at all times.
 Ensure that all incidents are reported to the Client in accordance with the rules &
regulations of the contract.
 Conduct regular (weekly) and work pre-start Toolbox Meetings
 Set an example to their subordinates in observing safety rules on the job.
 Maintain good housekeeping and sanitation in all working places.
 Facilitate restriction of work for subordinates who are physically or mentally
incapable to discharge their duties properly.
 Prohibit their subordinates to work without wearing appropriate PPE.
 Account for their subordinates before and after the shift.
 Monitor the safety compliance of the work place as often as required.
 Implementing applicable safe work practices.
 Report hazards, incidents or accidents immediately to the Safety Officer and the
Project Manager.
 Attend departmental safety meetings and participate in the formulation of safety
procedures.
 Take immediate corrective actions of all reported and identified unsafe practices
on the job site.


Revision Date :
All Project Personnel Responsibility

All personnel are responsible for understanding and strictly observing all Safety,
Health and Environmental standards, requirements and precautions applicable to their
work or duty. Personnel will not start any work or individual task that they do not fully
understand.
In additions, personnel will:
 Report to their Supervisor any unsafe condition, defective equipment and
hazardous environmental conditions.
 Warn others whom they believe to be endangered by known hazards or of their
own failure to observe Safety, Health and Environmental precautions.
 Wear or use approved protective clothing/equipment when required to do so.
 Report to their Supervisor and the Safety Department any injury or evidence of
impaired health occurring during the course of work.
 Be prepared in the event of any unforeseen hazardous occurrence and exercise
the necessary precautions and corrective actions.
 All project personnel shall proceed to the nearest assembly area in the event of an
emergency evacuation or drill.
Male Nurse
The Nurse is a key function of an HSE organization. The immediate and effective
response of a nurse can save the life of any person who has experienced a major
injury or illness. His first aid care to people who have experienced minor injuries and
sicknesses can prevent further complications. This prevention and medical assistance
benefits both the employee and the company. The nurse:
 Must be certified by Saudi Arabia Ministry of Health as per regulations to practice
the health in the Kingdom.
 Shall be responsible for administering first aid and facilitate injured or sick
personnel to obtain medical care.
 Shall monitor adverse health conditions of workers.
 Shall report to management any danger of contamination or contagious condition.
 Shall guide workers on proper health care and management of their sicknesses.
 Shall keep records of all injuries and sicknesses and submit a report of these
records to project management.


Revision Date :
ICOM Time Allocation of HSE Activities


Revision Date :
ICOM’s Subcontractors
In the event that ICOM obtains the services of a subcontractor, the subcontractor
employees shall be governed by the same provisions and regulations set forth in this
SAFETY MANUAL. Subcontractor workers and supervisors shall be guided by the
same standard and regulations agreed between the Client and ICOM. This shall not
discount the subcontractor to perform their duties and responsibilities as prescribed in
their subcontract scope of work.
1.7 TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINITIONS

Terms used in this SAFETY MANUAL are based on industry accepted definitions. Any
dispute over these definitions shall be resolved jointly by ICOM and the Client.
 ICOM = the ‘Company’ or Service Contractor
 HSE = Health, Safety & Environment, interchangeably termed as ‘Safety’
 OPERATIONS SAFETY MANUAL = ICOM’s Loss Prevention Program or termed
as ‘SAFETY MANUAL’
 JSA = Job Safety Analysis
 PPE = Personal Protective Equipment
 EMERGENCY = an abnormal incident posing a threat to the safety of workers,
environment or property at a facility or site which can be brought under control
using resources and procedures for emergency response
 ACCIDENT = events and incidences leading to injury, fatality or property damage
 HAZARD = Conditions and activities which may give danger or pose threat
causing damage to personnel and property
 INSPECTION = activities to detect unsafe practices and conditions, conducted
periodically by the designated competent person or Safety Officer
 FIRST AID = administration of initial and immediate medical relief to an injured or
ill person. Any administered first aid may still need further medical attention,
depending on the nature and severity of the injury or sickness
 MSDS = Material Safety Data Sheet, containing all pertinent information regarding
a particular substance, its inherent hazards due to exposure. The MSDS also
contains precautions which must be taken to prevent injuries from its misuse and
the first aid response in the event of contamination, spillage, fire or toxicity.
 DISABILITY = The inability to function or perform a certain task due to an accident
1.8 SAFETY ADMINISTRATION

It is an essential part of every activity to have rules governing its working principles.
Safety Rules, as a vital component of ICOM’s operations activities, are indoctrinated
to all of its personnel before any task is given to task performers. The following safety
rules are hereby adopted:


Revision Date :
 Safety is the responsibility of every employee

 ICOM and its subcontractors shall comply with all the safety requirements set forth
in this Safety Manual. It shall be the duty of Supervisors to make known to all his
task performers the safety rules and instructions given by safety department from
time to time.
 Non-compliance and violations of the safety provisions and instructions will render
the violator liable for disciplinary action as stipulated in this Safety Manual.
 The Site HSE Officer shall always be informed of any unsafe practices.
 Employees shall be given appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for
the job they are doing.
1.8.1 Elimination of Hazards

Elimination of hazards in the workplace shall be a major concern in order to achieve
the highest level of HSE conditions in the worksite. The following guidelines are
adopted:
 If an employee is observed to be careless and has been performing his work in an
unsafe manner, he shall immediately be advised about it.
 The observer shall report the matter to the Supervisor concerned.
 Good housekeeping shall be performed regularly during wrap-up of duty hours.
 It shall be the duty of every employee to make sure and maintain good
housekeeping.
 If any condition in the area appears unsafe, it shall be reported to the Supervisor.
 If an employee encounters unusual hazards which he is not familiar with, he shall
inform the Supervisor for advice.
 If the employee has the capacity to correct the hazard himself, he shall proceed to
rectify the hazards before proceeding further on any task.
 It is a mandatory duty of the work supervisor to facilitate in correcting all hazards
noticed by the employees.
 All incidents including near misses shall be reported and investigated for its root
cause.
 Corrective measures shall be instituted immediately to proactively prevent injuries.
1.8.2 Sickness
Any employee who suddenly becomes sick shall immediately report his condition to
his immediate supervisor. If the person is incapable to seek medical assistance, a co-
employee shall immediately report the matter to their Supervisor.
The work supervisor will facilitate first-aid. The work supervisor will coordinate with the
nurse to send the sick employee to the designated first-aid station or accredited
hospital.


Revision Date :
1.8.3 Injuries on Duty

All injuries sustained while on duty shall be immediately reported to the Supervisor.
The supervisor shall facilitate for the nurse’s attention to the employee. The supervisor
shall also inform the Safety Department for proper investigation, and in major injury
cases, the accomplishment of the Labour Injury Report.
1.8.4 Safety Equipment / Personal Protective Equipment

Everyone shall wear safety equipment as required and essential to the task they are
handling. Basically, all employees shall be provided by personal protective equipment,
as detailed in Section 6.6 of this manual.
1.8.5 Tools and Appliances

 All tools and appliances shall be kept in good condition.
 All employees shall carefully examine the tools, appliances or equipment with
which they are required to work with.
 Employees shall report at once to the Supervisor concerned, regarding any defect
in their respective tools, appliances or equipment.
 After the use of tools, appliances or equipment, they shall be kept in a Safe place
without endangering any employee.
 Sharp edged of tools, appliances or equipment shall be kept from contact of other
employees.
1.8.6 Safe Road Route Passage

Employees shall only use designated roads and regular passages when going to
another work area. Shortcut passages shall be avoided. Travel routes and precautions
shall be indicated by signage and appropriate warning devices.
1.8.7 Equipment Check and Safety Task Instruction

Equipment shall have their respective inspection checklist. As the case may be, the
Client may require a ‘Machinery Acceptance Certificate’.
a. Before each task is performed, a competent person shall inspect the equipment.
The competent person shall make an inspection report duly signed by him. This
report shall be in the possession of the operator/site in-charge, copy furnished to
the Safety Department. Equipment inspection is a mandatory pre-use requirement
and the inspection reports are subject to audit.
b. Before any critical task is performed, it is essential to have a work procedure.
Safety precautions shall be highlighted in the work procedure. The task shall then
be fully explained to all task performers based on the work procedure.
c. Competent persons shall lead the discussion on how to perform their particular
tasks safely, locate hazard and follow the work procedure.


Revision Date :
d. A regular reminder to be given during these work procedure discussions is to

“THINK TWICE BEFORE DOING A TASK, MAKE SURE YOUR PROCEDURE IS
CORRECT & SAFE”.
1.8.8 Disciplinary Actions

As a deterrent to Health and Safety violators, and to ensure safety discipline among
its personnel, ICOM shall adopt and abide by CLIENT Regulation on Disciplinary
Actions, or otherwise the following ICOM Disciplinary Actions shall apply accordingly:
Item Penalties
Type of Violations
No 1st Offense 2nd Offense 3rd Offense 4th Offense
1.0 Failure to use the Verbal warning Written warning Written warning Written warning + 3
required personnel + 1 day salary + 2 days salary days salary
attire and safety deduction deduction deduction +
gears as Personnel Demobilization from
Protective site
Equipment (PPE)
during work duty.
2.0 Using inappropriate Written warning Written warning Written warning 5 days salary
and unsafe + 1 day salary + 2 days salary + 3 days salary deduction +
equipment and deduction deduction deduction + Termination notice if
without prior Demobilization repeated
knowledge by from site
immediate Superior
/ Supervisor
3.0 Neglecting to report Written warning Written warning Written warning Written warning +
an Accident / Injury + 2 days salary + 3 days salary + 5 days salary Downgrading
Incident by the deduction deduction deduction + position
concerned Demobilization
Foreman / from site
Supervisor
4.0 Unauthorized Written warning Written warning Written warning Termination
operations of any + 3 days salary + 5 days salary + 5 days salary
delicate Plant deduction deduction + deduction +
Equipment, Demobilization Termination
Process Control, from site notice if
etc. repeated
Neglecting to report Written warning Written warning Written warning Written warning + 5
a Vehicular + 2 days salary + 3 days salary + 4 days salary days salary
5.0
Accidents involving deduction deduction deduction deduction +
Company-owned Termination notice if
equipment by the repeated
concerned Driver/


Revision Date :
Operator or its
immediate
supervisor whoever
is at disposal to
report.
6.0 Involving in playful Written warning Written warning Written warning Written warning+3
misbehaviours, + 1 day salary + 2 days salary days salary
horseplay and deduction deduction deduction +
abnormal acts, Demobilization from
during working site + Termination
period. notice if repeated
7.0 Smoking in Immediate removal from CLIENT Plant & Facility premises; ID withdrawn and
unauthorized recall to ICOM’s home office for employment termination
location
8.0 Over speeding to Written warning Withdrawal of ID ID will be
required authorized + 1 day salary and suspension withdrawn
speed limits and deduction for one (1) week
other traffic offense. CLIENT property
-
9.0 Urinating on Verbal warning Written warning Written warning Written warning + 3
exposed areas + 1 day salary + 2 days salary days salary
other than the deduction deduction deduction +
authorized Toilets. Demobilization from
site
10.0 Defacing Safety Immediate Termination
signs/ Barriers. withdrawal of
CLIENT ID &
written warning
11.0 Tinkering and / or Immediate withdrawal of CLIENT ID & written warning
unnecessary
operation of fire
protection and
alarm system
equipment.
12.0 Deliberate unsafe Immediate withdrawal of CLIENT ID & written warning
practice of fire-
causing acts like
throwing lighted
Cigarettes in
flammable materials
/ gasses, etc.


Revision Date :
13.0 Disregard to follow Written warning Written warning Written warning

on Warning Signs + 1 day salary + 2 days salary + 3 days salary Termination
or Violating its deduction deduction + deduction +
intent. Demobilization Termination
from site notice if
repeated
14.0 Failure to provide Written warning Written warning Written warning Written warning +
proper Warning + 2 days salary + 3 days salary + 5 days salary Downgrading
Signs or Protection deduction deduction deduction + position
from Falling Hazard Demobilization
work situation. from site
15.0 Using disallowed Verbal warning Written warning Written warning Written warning + 3
scaffolds, ladders in + 1 day salary + 2 days salary days salary
work places. deduction deduction + deduction +
Demobilization Termination notice if
from site repeated
16.0 Failure to observe Written warning Written warning Written warning Written warning + 3
lockout & tag out + 1 day salary + 2 days salary days salary
safe Procedure deduction deduction + deduction +
during power Demobilization Termination notice if
isolation works. from site repeated
17.0 Any other Violations of the Governing Authorities in the Work Place covered by its jurisdiction.
(As there is nothing specific, penalty may be decided in comparison to the above penalties,
depending on the similarity or type of violation.)
2.0 PROGRAMS & PLANS

2.1 WORK PERMIT
2.1.1 Work Permit Classifications

ICOM shall enforce a ‘SAFE WORK PERMIT’ system. Work Permits shall be
requested at least 24 hours before the commencement of any activity requiring such
permit. Work permits shall be instituted according to guidelines given by the Client or
applicable to the work task.
All work in restricted areas must have either a hot or cold work permit. Work must be
performed according to the instructions. Precautions shall be specified in the work
permit. If the work contemplated involves any change, addition or deletion in the
facility, the work will be coordinated with the Client.
Site works shall constitute of the following categories:
 Category A = Non-Operational work undertaken by personnel not belonging to the
Operations Department but working in that area.


Revision Date :
 Category B = Non-Hazardous work that may not cause any harm to personal
safety, equipment and environment.
 Category C = Hazardous work where there is a reasonable possibility of personal
injury, damage to equipment and environment.
Work Activities shall be classified as per the following:
 Cold Work - work that will not produce sufficient energy to ignite flammable
atmospheres/materials.
 Hot Work - work done when using spark or flame producing equipment, for vehicle
entry into any restricted area, or such that the activity creates enough energy to
produce fire.
 Release of Hazardous Materials - work done when opening lines or vessels that
may release hazardous or toxic substances.
 Confined Space Entry - work done when people enter places that are not
normally intended for human occupancy. Examples of these works are tank
cleaning, tank inspection, work in sewers or excavation of 4 feet or deeper.
The following types of permits shall be enforced:

1) Safety Clearance Certificate: A permit to work document which describes the
nature and location of the task, as well as the precautions and conditions that must
be complied, before any hazardous work can be carried out safely. This permit
shall include fire safety precautions as major requirement for work clearance.
Precautions stated in the work permit must first be complied before the permit is
signed and approved. The Safety Clearance Certificate form shall be established
incorporating Client work permit specifications.
2) Electrical Isolation / De-Isolation: A permit required for isolation/ de-isolation of
electrical equipment for non-electrical work only.
3) Excavation Permit: A document used to specify conditions needed to be complied
in order to prevent damage to underground wires, cables or piping while digging,
trenching or pile driving to a depth greater than 15 cm. It is not valid without a
safety certificate/fire permit and clearance certificate.
4) Ionizing Radiation Work Permit: A document used whenever ‘Radiography’ is
required to be carried out. It contains a list of rules and precautions, which must be
observed during the period of work. This document is not valid unless it is
accompanied by a safety clearance certificate and a clearance certificate.
5) Electrical Permit: A document given to a competent person to allow work on
electrical equipment (low voltage bus bars, high voltage equipment). It is not valid
without clearance certificate.
During shutdowns, the validity of a safety certificate / Fire Permit may be extended
to the length of the shutdown. Otherwise it is valid for a period up to seven days.
2.1.2 Work Permit Procedure


Revision Date :
ICOM shall adopt the ‘12-Rules on Work Permit Procedure’ which are described as
follows:
1. Issuer and Receiver must inspect job site together before signing the work
permit.
2. Issue the correct permits for the job - hot, cold, vessel or confined space entry,
and/or gas release. Two or more permits may be required for the job.
3. Issuer and receiver must both have in their possession a valid work permit
certification card (issuer and receiver respectively).
4. Gas test and oxygen analysis test must be made before issuing work permit.
The gas testing should be witnessed by receiver.
5. Job description and equipment used must be clearly stated on the work permit.
Be specific, issue permits for a single pump, drum, etc.
6. All tick boxes must be correctly filled in and gas readings indicated.
7. Proper lockouts, hold tags, and blinds must be used where applicable (multiple
clips with lock, and/or chains with padlocks).
8. Work permits should be issued for the specific period of time required to
complete the job.
9. To extend time work permit beyond one shift, the oncoming shift issuer must
inspect job site, write in extended time and sign permit.
10. Special precautions such as requirements for fire watch, Scott air packs, life
lines, barricades, etc. must be written on the permit.
11. The work permit must remain on the job site in a conspicuously visible place
while work is going on. If an emergency develops, the permit must be
withdrawn immediately and all work stopped without questions.
12. The work permit must be closed out after a job is completed. Issuer and
receiver must inspect the job site and signs off the work permit.
2.1.3 Responsibilities for Work Permit System

ICOM shall task its Project Manager to be responsible in instructing his work
supervisors on the proper implementation of the Work Permit System. The Project
Manager shall verify whether all the instructions and precautions are followed.
The Site Safety Officer shall not have the authority to sign the work permit. The safety
officer is not tasked supervise the work and therefore should not sign for work permit.
The Safety Officer shall only function in safety supervision within the work permit
procedure. It shall be the duty of every project employee to strictly adhering to the
instructions given in the work permit.
2.1.4 Work Permit - Receiver (WPR) and Issuer (WPI)

If the Client does not specify any certification system for the WPR, ICOM shall
designate a competent WPR. The Client shall identify their respective WPI to whom
the WPR shall coordinate all necessary permits. ICOM’s authorized WPR shall


Revision Date :
request a work permit from the WPI before doing any work which requires a Work
Permit.
ICOM shall coordinate with the Client’s Safety Adviser to establish the WPR for the
project site. This WPR shall tie-up with the WPI and shall form part of the Work Permit
procedure specified under Section 2.1.2. The responsibilities of the WPI and WPR
shall be in accordance with the ’12-Rules on Work Permit Procedure’. Issuance and
approval of Work Permits shall be in accordance with regulations specified by Client
on the project site. Guidelines for the validity of work permits shall be coordinated with
the Client.
The WPR must keep the work permit posted on the immediate work area at all times.
If the display of the work permit is impractical, the WPR shall keep a copy of the work
permit in his possession or within view of the job site for the duration of the job. The
work permit shall be presented to upon request of related officers. If the WPR leaves
the job site, an equally competent WPR shall be required to replace him during his
absence until he returns.
2.1.5 Precautions ensuring an effective Work Permit System

Precautions shall be taken to ensure the Work Permit System to be effective. A ‘Work
Permit Review Sheet’ shall be used as minimum guide for inspecting the hazards
associated with the task.
Since the Work Permit Review Sheet may not include precautions against all hazards,
it shall be the duty of both the WPI and the WPR to review and anticipate what other
hazards might arise during the execution of the task.
 Work stoppage may be done if conditions change or become unsafe during the
course of work.
 The WPI or any authorized representative may stop the work and cancel the work
permit. This is done when there is imminent danger or gross violation of the
instructions stated in the work permits.
 The WPR has the equal responsibility to stop the work and advise the Issuer if he
feels safety conditions has been deviated. The WPR must stay at the work area at
all times.
 People who are not directly involved with the work shall be cleared off the area to
avoid their being exposed to unnecessary hazards.
2.1.6 Work in Manholes

ICOM shall implement the confined space entry procedure for work in manholes. The
confined spaced entry permit must first be secured before any work is done. When
work is to be performed in a manhole or unvented vault, work permits shall be
enforced. A qualified watchman shall be available in the immediate vicinity to render
emergency assistance. This rule includes personnel occasionally entering a manhole
to provide assistance, other than emergency. This rule is also applicable for skilled
personnel entering the manhole for a brief period of time for purposes of inspection,
housekeeping, taking readings and environment sampling.


Revision Date :
Before using open flames in a manhole or excavation in an area, the atmosphere shall
be tested. Entrance shall be permitted only when found safe or cleared of the
combustible gases or liquids.
Before any personnel enter manholes or unvented vaults, it shall be promptly
protected with a barrier, temporary cover, or other suitable guard. The following
guidelines are also given:
 No entry to confined space shall be permitted unless forced ventilation is provided.
 The confined space atmosphere shall be determined if safe for entry by testing for
oxygen deficiency and the presence of explosive gases of fumes.
 Appropriate warning signs shall be promptly placed when covers of manholes or
vaults are removed.
 Where unsafe conditions are detected during the stay in the manhole, the
personnel shall be evacuated and the unsafe condition shall be corrected before
entry is again allowed.
 Provisions shall be made to ensure adequate continuous supply of clean
breathable air.
2.2 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

It is ICOM’s policy to provide its employees with the necessary Personal Protective
Equipment (PPE), i.e., personnel safety clothing, devices and gears, suitable for the
type of work they are tasked to perform. It is the work supervisor’s responsibility to
ensure that all project personnel adhere to wearing appropriate PPE.
The work supervisor shall also ensure that project personnel shall protect and properly
use their PPEs. Compliance monitoring is also entrusted through the site Safety
Officer, who shall see to it that there is strict adherence of wearing PPE at all times.
The Safety Officer shall report to management habitual and gross violations.
2.2.1 Head Protection

Dielectric (non-metal) hard hats shall be worn when overhead or flying debris hazards
exists. Hard hats, likewise termed as ‘Safety Hats’, shall be worn with the bill facing
forward. Hard hats shall be worn when utilizing face shields, welding hoods, burning
goggles, etc. Hard hats shall be worn when an employee is below any type of work
being done at elevated levels, or as directed by the following guidelines:
 It is mandatory that all personnel, including visitors, wear non-metallic hard hats
whenever they are within the ‘Hard Hat Area’ zone. This includes areas outside the
living quarters, and offices where work performed presents hazards for head injury.
 Exceptions to this rule are personnel participating in recreational activities, and
personnel directly engaged in welding or cutting operations. If necessary,
personnel performing welding and cutting activities shall be fitted with PPE, which
incorporates head protection together with their welding gear.
 Use of safety hats is mandatory inside closed structure when working, walking,
and standing in exposed positions. Examples of these conditions are movement


Revision Date :
along scaffolds, ladders and higher structures where the fall of solid bodies could
injure the worker.
 All hard hats should be regularly inspected by the wearer for signs of deterioration,
damage or wear.
 Exemptions on the wearing of safety hats may be authorized by the Client‘s Safety
Advisor, after careful evaluation. This is done whenever the use of hard hat could
present a reduction of safety in the performance of specific tasks, in particular
positions or in special circumstances.
2.2.2 Eye and Face Protection

ICOM shall employ all necessary protection in order to protect the eyes of all its
personnel. Whether or not there are immediately perceived eye hazards, ICOM shall
implement this eye and face protection program in the work area. The following list of
works requiring the use of eye protection equipment:
 welding, oxy-arc cutting and assisting to, working nearby
 buffing, grinding, bevelling
 drilling, boring
 chipping, caulking, chiselling
 dressing grinding wheels
 riveting, sledging, scaling
 sandblasting, scraping
 majority of woodworking operations
 pouring of lead joints, white metal splicing
 working on hyperbaric piping equipment
 breaking concrete or rock
 using hammer on striking tool
 working in close environment where the eyes are exposed to excessive foreign
particles
 handling of chemical substances
 working on machines or power tools producing flying parts.
 cutting wire ropes
 painting in close environment
The following guidelines are given for use of Face and Eye Protection:
 Safety glasses (both prescription and non-prescription), with attached rigid side
shields, and shall be worn while on the worksite. Safety glasses shall conform to
ANSI Standard Z87.1 or Client equivalent standard as a minimum for all
components (frames, lenses, and side shields). Flexible slip on side shields is not
acceptable for use.


Revision Date :
 Clear lenses shall be worn in areas below prescribed illumination levels.

 Face shields and mono-goggles shall be worn by personnel while performing tasks
task which create flying particles. Examples of these tasks are, but not limited to,
grinding, chipping, sawing, scraping or buffing.
 Face shield and welding visors shall be attached to the hardhat.
 Welding or grinding without a hardhat is not permitted in a ‘Hard Hat’ zone.
 Goggles shall be worn whenever there is a splash or vapour hazard to the eyes.
Splash sources come from chemicals or vapours, while working with tools or
equipment.
 Goggles shall be worn for activities which produce dust, flying particles, and dusty
conditions.
 All personnel shall wear appropriate protective eyewear outside of the living
quarters or offices where surrounding conditions present eye hazards.
 The minimum protective eye wear shall be spectacles with firmly secured side
shields.
 The use of welding goggles or face shield’s mandatory for all welding and oxy-arc
cutting & grinding works, to give protection against glare, flashing and flying
particles.
 Moreover, protective screening should be employed during the performance of
such activities in order to safeguard nearby personnel from the effects of welding
glares and flashes.
 Anyone in vicinity of operations requiring special eye/face protection shall wear
equipment appropriate for the operations being performed. Safety glasses are not
suitable for all operations specially while driving.
 Specific activities require the use of other eye/face protection equipment such as
the full face mask to protect the worker for face injuries due to contact with flying
particles, hot metallic particles, acid/caustic products, chemicals paints and
solvents, sandblasting products.
 It is the duty of the Safety Officer to evaluate the need to render compulsory the
use of such equipment during the performance of specific tasks.
 The Site Safety Supervisor shall always be informed with regard to the execution
of unusual tasks and of precautionary measures adopted.
2.2.3 Hands & Feet Protection

It is mandatory that all personnel shall wear steel-toed safety shoes outside of their
living quarters. Safety shoes shall also be worn for work performed inside the living
quarters or offices that present hazards to their feet. Exemption shall only be if
environmental conditions present a greater hazard than that against which the
footwear was designated to protect.


Revision Date :
The use of safety shoes may be considered for recreational activities, or when
personnel are transferring to and from safe areas (offices, living quarters, change
rooms, kitchen, mess rooms, etc.). The following guidelines are gives for use of Hands
& Feet Protection:
 Gloves of the appropriate type shall be worn when handling rough materials.
Examples of these materials are steel cables, piping, timber scaffoldings and
chemicals or other skin irritant materials.
 Isolating gloves shall be worn by electricians, having technical characteristics to
the scope. Appropriate gloves shall be worn by welders engaged in welding and
oxy-arc cutting works, together with the approved body arms legs protection
clothing.
 Work performed in areas where potential foot hazards exist, are required to wear
ANSI Z41 or similar approved footwear. Footwear shall be suitable for the task to
be performed. Steel Toe Footwear is normally required on the jobsites. Athletic
style footwear is not allowed.
 Some job tasks will require the use of foot wear with metatarsal guards, for
activities such as the use of jackhammers, vibratory compactors, tampers and
large impact equipment.
 The use of rubber or other chemical-resistant boots may be required for working in
and around chemicals or wet areas.
 Shin guards or chaps shall be worn whenever using a chain saw, brush hook,
scythe or cut off saw.
 All employees are required to wear proper hand protection for performance of
manual task. Leather gloves shall be worn any time employees are handling
materials or performing tasks.
 ICOM shall provide special gloves, i.e. chemical-resistant, thermal-resistant, cut-
resistant, high-voltage, etc., to their specialized craft personnel.
NOTE: Employees working on or near energized electrical parts shall wear either a
dielectric toed safety shoe with a defined heel, or an adequate leather shoe with
a defined heel.
2.2.4 Respiratory Protection

ICOM shall implement a respirator program with work-site specific procedures.
Approved respirator elements shall be used. Personnel performing this activity shall
undergo qualified training from a competent training program administrator or a third
party training certification program.
ICOM shall furnish emergency rescue respirators required for work inside a vessel or
confined space if required. Respirators shall be self-contained breathing apparatus
(SCBA) or, if the vessel opening is too small for easy entry and exit, a full face air line
respirator with escape cylinder.
The use of dust respirators is mandatory on activities where there is excessive
amount of dust in the atmosphere. Typical examples are the handling of cement, sand


Revision Date :
soda lime, molecular filters and the performance of some works, which result in the
production of dust, such as chipping or grinding in confined spaces, wood working,
concrete or rock breaking, etc.
Before the start of work, the Client shall be furnished with proof of compliance as per
ANSI or equivalent Client standard. The following provisions and supporting
documentation are also required:
 A cartridge or canister change schedule shall be implemented for air purifying
respirators when used for gases or vapours.
 Medical examination shall be done for personnel prior to the use of respirators.
Medical records shall be available for reference.
 Respirator Training records shall kept available for reference. Records shall
indicate the type of respirator the employee is trained to use.
 Annual fit testing is required for all tight fitting face pieces (positive pressure as
well as negative pressure)
 All supplied air shall be certifiable Grade “D” breathing air, from a dedicated
source.
 All personnel shall be informed that dust filters are for dust only and in no
circumstances should it be used as a protection against gases, fumes or smoke.
 If ventilation is not possible, the use of the ‘Self Contained Breathing Apparatus’
(SCBA respirators) is mandatory for all work covered by a confined space entry
permit. Confined work spaces, where smoke and fumes are produced, must be
installed with forced ventilation system.
 Respirators are also required when working in areas which have the potential for
chemical release, i.e., hydrogen sulphide, chlorine and fumes from galvanized
removal process.
 Respirators may also be necessary for emergency evacuation and control of
accidental gas releases.
 The emergency incident leader, in agreement with the Safety Officer, shall
evaluate and advise the need for SCBA equipment in emergency rescue
operations.
2.2.5 Fall Protection System

ICOM shall provide fall protection devices for all its project personnel working at
heights above 1.82 meters, and provided further that the work area is not secured by
complete scaffolding. ICOM shall ensure that all affected personnel shall be
safeguarded with a fall protection system.
The first line work supervisor will analyse the fall risk of the specific task. If a primary
fall protection system does not exist (i.e. scaffolds with guardrails), he will instruct the
working personnel involved to observe the following:
 Full body harness shall be worn in a snug fit for workers working in areas with no
guard rails at heights above 1.82 meters (6 feet).


Revision Date :
 Safety belts should not be used as part of the fall arrest system but only to restrain
the wearer to his place of work.
 A lanyard system serving as lifeline shall be installed and anchored at both ends
firmly and safety on stable existing structure. This lanyard should have a minimum
breaking point strength of 2,450 Kg. (5,400 Lbs.).
 The fall protection lanyard shall be attached to the D ring located in the middle
back of the full body safety harness.
 Clothing must have adequate protection to the body. Shirts must have at least a t-
sleeve. Shirt-tails must be worn inside the trousers except in the case of welders
and burners. No polyester or nylon clothing will be allowed for burners or welders.
 FRC (Fire Retardant Clothing) shall be worn as prescribed by Client standards or
work area regulations.
 All personal protective equipment shall meet ANSI/OSHA requirements prescribed
herein or their equivalent Client requirements.
2.2.6 Prescription for Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE)

The table below is a list of basic PPE for some of the identified site personnel. Other
craft personnel’s PPE shall be based on the nature and extent of their job task, both
regular and specific.
Many job classifications may require additional personal protective equipment
depending on the work location, type of job, local hazards, conditions etc.
Typical job Basic Personal Protective Equipment to be worn

classifications (See key below)
Carpenter 1, 8, 9, 10C, 15A
Electrician 1,2, 8, 9, 10B, 15A or B
Iron Worker-Structural 1, 8, 9, 10D, 12/13 & 14A/B, 15A
Lineman 1, 8, 9, 10C, 12/13 & 14 A/B, 15A
Mason 1, 8, 9, 10C/A, 15A
Material Control man 1, 8, 9, 10C, 15A
Mechanic 1, 8, 9, 10C/A, 15A
Pipe Fitter 1, 8, 9, 10C/D, 15A
Plumber 1, 8, 9, 10C, 15A
Rigger 1, 8, 9, 10C, 15A
Roof Worker 1, 8, 9, 10C, 12/13 & 14A/B, 15A
Scaffold Erector 1, 8, 9, 10C, 13 & 14A/B, 15A
Sheet Metal Worker 1, 8, 9, 10C/D, 15A


Revision Date :
Welder 1 A&B, 4 8, 9, 10D/E, 15B

Abrasive blast cleaner 8, 9, 16
Painter 2, 8, 9, 10, 16
1. Safety glasses with side shields (1A=clear, 1B=shaded)
2. Face shield
3. Goggles, safety impact (3A=Clear, 3B=shaded)
4. Welding hood and skull guard (Lens shaded to suit work)
5. Respire able air feed hood with filter, Note: This item is deleted and replaced by
Item 16
6. Respirator, chemical cartridge
7. Respirator dust
8. Safety hat/helmet
9. Safety foot wear (9A= shoes, 9B = boots)
10. Gloves (10A= Rubber coated, 10B= Rubber moulded, 10C = General purpose,
10D = Leather 10E = Heat resistant)
11. Ear protection (6A= Ear plugs 6B = Ear muffs)
12. Standard safety belt
13. Full body harness
14. Lanyard 1.82m (14A = standard, 14B = shock absorbing)
15. One piece coverall (15A= standard, 15B = fire resistant)
16. OSHA - approved, respiratory air fed hood & filter.
Reference Instructions and Standards

OSHA - Code of Federal Regulations 1910, 1915 and 1926
ASTM D 120, E1-87 = Standard Specifications for Rubber Insulating Gloves
ANSI Z 41-83 = Personnel Protection – Protective Footwear
ANSI Z 87.1-89 = Practice for Occupational & Educational Eye and Face Protection
ANSI Z 89.1-86 = Personnel Protective Headgear for Industrial Workers
2.3 IONIZING RADIATION
2.3.1 Radiation Plan

This Radiation response information is a guide for the initial action to be taken to
protect yourself and the general public from exposure to ionizing radiation in the event
of an accident. This information applies to sealed radioisotopes of iridium (lr-192) and
selenium (Se-75), which are housed within their approved containers or exposure
devices, and which are in a shielded condition.


Revision Date :
2.3.2 Potential Hazard

Potential hazards are through external radiation from unshielded radioactive sources
or material. This will vary greatly, depending on the type and quantity of the
radioactive material. The radioactive materials is double encapsulated in “Special
Form” certification or in type B (U) packaging, and is not expected to cause
contamination in accidents. To help mitigate the hazards, the following guidelines are
given:
 Keep all unnecessary persons at more than 200 meters greater distance may be
necessary if advised by the competent authority
 Isolate hazard area and deny entry to all unauthorized persons or persons not
classified to deal with radioactive materials. Help of the CLIENT or Loss prevention
Department may be taken restrict entry to hazard area
 Response actions may be performed prior to any measurement of radiation.
 Enter area only to save life, limit entry to shortest possible time.
 Detain uninjured persons and equipment exposed to radioactive material until
instructed by radiation authority.
 Delay clean up until instructed by radiation authority.
2.3.3 Response to Radiation Exposure Incident

1. Call for emergency medical care if any person is injured
2. Advise medical care personnel that the accident involves radioactive material.
3. Use first aid treatment according to the nature of the injury.
2.3.4 Transportation incidents involving isotope exposure devices

A written report must be made by the concerned/ involve person of the incident
within the shortest possible.
1. Classified personnel, if in a conscious state and not critically injured, must
remain at the scene of the accident to perform the following
2. A survey for radiation must be made to ensure whether the sealed source is in
the shielded or unshielded position. If survey meter is damaged or if the sealed
source is found to be in an unshielded position after survey, then in both
situations a restricted area must be established.
3. If survey reading show that the sealed source is in unshielded position, then
established a restricted areas and controlled area, where at the periphery the
pre-calculated radiation dose shall not exceed.
4. No persons other than those authorized or classified shall be allowed within the
restricted areas until a survey meter is available. If sealed source is exposed,
the same has been secured and is in its shielded position.
5. If however, due to the accident, classified persons are injured and unable to
physically perform the required surveys and post the area as required, one


Revision Date :
should direct others as much as possible, and provide them a copy of this
manual.
2.3.5 Work Assignment Incidents
During work assignments, where restricted areas have been established, and should
all available survey meters fail to function, then the following steps must be taken:
1. Radiation survey meters shall have a range to accurately measure radiation

intensities of 0.2mR per hour to 1000 mR (1R) per hour
2. Radiation survey meters shall be calibrated every 6 (six) months or earlier as the
need may arise or when its accuracy is questionable.
3. Records of calibration shall be maintained. Each calibrated survey meter shall
bear tag displaying the dates on which it was calibrated, and when it becomes
due for requirement calibration.
4. A functional test of calibrated radiation survey meters shall be checked for
operation by a classified person prior to each workday.
5. This functional test shall include a “Battery check” on in the case of electronic
survey meters assurance that the low battery working is not visible.
6. Technicians shall evaluate reasonable hazards, then notify the R.S.O and follow
his instructions.
7. Classified personnel may not leave the area unattended.
8. At least one classified person shall monitor the area till the situation is mitigated,
or upon the arrival instruction from the R.S.O or his appointee.
9. In the event of an accident to the device containing a sealed source, immediately
follow the following procedures:
 Attempt to retract the source into the shielded position following the standard
operating procedures.
 Re-survey for radiation and check established restricted areas. Check to
ensure whether source has retracted into shielded position and if so, lock in
place.
 If the source does not return to its shielded position, after responsible
attempts, then do not attempt to recover source.
 Post the area and consistently monitor. Restrict access and immediately
notify the (R.S.O) Radiation Safety Officer and ask for his instructions.
2.4 FIRST AID RESPONSE & FACILITIES
2.4.1 First Aid & Medical Care

In accordance with the contract agreement of ICOM with CLIENT, it will be the
responsibility of ICOM to ensure that first aid is available to ICOM’s employees on
site. First Aid shall be properly administered at the job site by a certified male nurse or


Revision Date :
first aid attendant. The First Aid Attendant shall possess the required minimum
qualification of having a formal training and approved by the Client.
The advice given in this section is only intended for first aid. It should not be
interpreted as a substitute for medical attention by a medical physician or any health
professional. If medical aid is going to be needed urgently, the victim should be sent
immediately to a physician or to a medical facility thru an ambulance or emergency
service vehicle.
2.4.2 First Aid Facilities and Ambulance

ICOM shall maintain at jobsite a First Aid room and provided at least the following:
a. One (1) dedicated standby ambulance properly marked for use as emergency
vehicle to transport injured personnel to the nearest health care facility.
b. First Aid Supplies containing the following:
• A sufficient number of not less than 12 sterile, small-size finger dressings & not
less than 6 sterile medium-size hand dressings.
• A sufficient supply of absorbent cotton wool for packing and firming up splits. Such
supply shall not be less than 200 grams of cotton wool in small 25-gram packages
and two 500-grams packages.
• A sufficient number of not less than 12 gauze bandages 7 cm. in width and not
less than 12 gauze bandages 11 cm. in width.
• Adequate supply of adhesive tape in rolls, 1 cm in width, Mercurochrome in
aqueous solution, Two 10-gram shakers of sulfa powder for sterilization of wounds
• Aromatic ammonia solution in a glass bottle with a glass stopper.
• A medium-sized Thomas ‘thigh splint, a wooden posterior leg splint, a wooden
elbow splint, a wooden Carr splint for the forearm, a wooden palm split, and other
types of splints.
• A minimum of 6 triangle bandages.
• Sufficient of safety pins.
• Ointment for burns containing a disinfectant and an analgesic.
• 70 x 70 bandages for burns.
• A pair of scissors with blunt ends.
• A sufficient number of stretchers for moving injured persons.
2.4.3 First Aid Attendant

ICOM shall assign one certified male nurse to administer the first aid treatment at site
first aid room. This is in accordance with the provisions of Client regulations for First
Aid/CPR Training/First Aid Kits. The CV of the certified male nurse shall be forwarded
to the Client for approval.
Work site first aid and medical care shall provide consideration for the following:
 At least (1 one) trained first aid attendant for each crew


Revision Date :
 First aid for bites from snake, scorpion

 ICOM will comply with medical regulations set by government and the Client and
with Saudi Labour and Workmen Law.
 ICOM shall determine to provide every 15 Km work area span, a certified first aider
and first aid room facilities
2.4.4 Emergency Transfer

If the condition of the casualty requires emergency attention, the first-aid attendant
shall make arrangements for the patient to be transferred to the nearest ICOM’s
accredited hospital (Contract of Agreement shall be submitted accordingly as
required). Severe injuries will be treated at the nearest accredited hospital specialized
for the type of injury, i.e. fracture, amputation, spinal injury, etc. Such situations shall
be relayed to ICOM’s designated Project Manager or Main Office thru the General
Manager during office hours (contact telephones shall be coordinated progressively
during the project execution).
2.4.5 Definitions
The following are some important definitions in accident management.
• Medical Treatment - Any treatment, other than first aid treatment, administered to
injured employees.
• First-Aid Treatment - Any one time treatment, and any follow up visit for the
purpose of observation, of minor scratches, cuts burns, splinters and so forth
which do not ordinarily require medical care. Such one time treatment and follow
up visit for the purpose or observation is considered first aid, even though
provided by a physician, or registered professional personnel.
• Minor Injuries - All injuries regardless how minor, shall be recorded in the site-
first aid room 'treatment register/record'. Minor on-site injuries treated by
application of first aid, and then person immediately 'returns to work' do not
require reporting. However, if the person injured on site, and then does not
resume work, a report must then be submitted.
• Serious Injuries - Injuries that require medical facility attention in view of severe
physical damage from an incident
 Medical Treatment Case (MTC) – cases which require further attention beyond
first aid. MTCs are reportable and must be investigated.
• Lost Time Incident (LTI) - A lost time incident is determined by an injured person
being off from work one (1) work day, in addition to day of the injury. The day off
from work must be a direct result of the incident. The loss of three or more days is
also reportable to the Saudi Arabian Government by the employer.


Revision Date :
2.4.6 Basic Procedures for First Aid

All personnel shall have basic orientations on how to respond to first aid cases.
Supervising personnel shall receive sufficient instructions to cope with first aid
treatments of injured person.
The Safety Officer, with the assistance of site male Nurse, or first aid trained
employees, shall organize to give general first aid response instructions to the majority
of workers, in particular, according to the guidelines following different cases:
• bleeding & haemorrhage
• Spinal cord suspected damage, bone rupture
• Wounds
• Cranial traumas
• Anoxia, asphyxia, toxic gases
• Burns
The following basic procedures are herewith given:
Ambulance
In the occurrence of a serious accident, the immediate use of the ambulance shall be
required while assisting the injured person with the applicable first aid treatment.
Examining and Evaluating the Victim

The first aider must not assume that the injuries of the victim are only the obvious and
visible ones present. Less noticeable injuries may also be present, especially internal
body injuries. The following guidelines are given to evaluate the victim:
 After the discovery of a victim of injury, a primary survey should be done, where
the breathing and blood circulation state of the victim is evaluated.
 Upon making an initial survey, the person administering first aid should consider
statements of witnesses regarding the accident, observations on the victim, and
the statements of the victim himself regarding the accident.
 If the victim has stopped breathing, for whatever reason, artificial respiration must
be started at once, before any other treatment is given. Artificial respiration should
be continued until breathing is restored or until the first aider in no longer capable
to continue.
 The secondary survey is then made by doing a head to toe examination where
body injuries are more identified
 Start by examining victim’s head, then neck, trunk, and extremities. Look for any
type of abnormalities such as swelling, discoloration, lumps, and tenderness that
might indicate an unseen injury.
 The first aider should examine carefully the accident and analyze other possible
injuries; this may provide a clue as to the extent of injury and physical damage.


Revision Date :
 While there are several conditions that can be considered life threatening, priority
should be given to respiratory arrest and severe bleeding. These conditions
require immediate life saving techniques.
 In all actions taken during the initial survey, the first aider should be especially
careful not to move the victim any more than necessary to support life.
In-charge of First Aid Response

 When a person is injured or taken ill, a senior officer, usually the supervisor, must
take charge, send for a doctor, and facilitate the application of first aid.
 The person taking charge of first aid response must make a rapid but effective
examination to determine the nature and severity of the injuries.
Moving the Injured

 The injured person should not be moved until there is a clear idea of the injury and
first aid has been applied. The victim should only be moved if he is exposed to
further danger at the accident scene.
 If the injury is serious, do not to attempt to move the person unless the responder
is fully trained and qualified.
 If there is danger to move the victim, yet he has been administered with first aid
and can be kept in the area of the accident safely, further medical aid should be
coordinated immediately.
 Especially for victims of trips and falls, any unnecessary movement or rough
handling should be avoided because it might aggravate undetected fractures or
spinal injuries.
Attending to Injuries
 Hands should be washed before treating wounds, burns or eye injuries.
 Always take extra care and precaution in handling the victim.
 Once respiratory arrest and severe bleeding have alleviated, attention should be
focused on other obvious injuries.
 Open chest or abdominal wounds should be sealed, open fractures immobilized,
burns covered and less serious bleeding wounds dressed.
 Once the obvious injuries have been treated, the secondary survey can be made
to detect less easily noticed injuries that can be aggravated by mishandling.
 A spinal injury should not be mishandled or taken lightly, he could suffer spinal
damage, leading to paralysis or even death.
 A closed fracture can become an open fracture, if not immobilized.


Revision Date :
 Where there is shock, casualties should be kept lying down and comfortable. The
victim should be covered with a light blanket or clothing, however, hot water bottles
should not be applied.
 Drinks should not be given or anything by mouth if there is seems to be an internal
injury.
2.4.7 Serious Injuries
Bleeding
 Stop the bleeding at once and send promptly for a doctor or an ambulance.
 To control bleeding: Direct pressure on the bleeding point for as long as may be
necessary.
 Apply a pad of sterilized dressing and cotton wool and bandage firmly. These
measures should control the bleeding.
Fractures
 Do not attempt to move a casualty with broken bones or injured joints, until the
injured parts have been secured with triangular bandages, or other suitable pieces
of materials, so that they cannot move.
 An injured leg may be tied to the uninjured one, and an injured arm tied to the
body, padding between with cotton wool.
Burns and Scalds

Heavy burns should be approached with caution, as it is both very painful and
infectious to the victim.
 For serious burns (2nd or 3rd degree), immediately seek the attention of a doctor or
transfer by ambulance to the nearest medical facility.
 Where practicable, immediately cool the affected area by placing under gently
running cold water, or immediately immersing in cold water preferably cooled with
ice. However, do not wait to obtain ice before cooling, speed is essential.
 Continue the cooling for at least 10 minutes or until the pain is relieved which may
require longer.
 Alternatively put a sterilized dressing on the burn or scald. Never use an adhesive
wound dressing.
 If the burn is extensive, cover with clean towels and secured loosely.
 Do not burst blisters or remove clothing sticking to the burn or scald.
 In case of a chemical burns, remove all contaminated clothing, and flush the burn
with plenty of cold water. Apply a sterilized dressing.


Revision Date :
Minor Wounds and Scratches

 All wounds and scratches, even minor ones, should receive immediate attention.
Delay increases the risk of infection.
 Cover the wound as soon as possible with a sterilized dressing, or adhesive
wound dressing.
 If it is necessary to clean the skin around the wound. If you are not sure if the
water is sterilized, avoid washing the actual wound, because this can introduce
germs into the wound.
 Inform the victim that you are applying only a first dressing and that further
attention may be needed. If an injury becomes inflamed, infected or pain persists,
the victim get medical attention.
Eye Injuries (External bodies)

 If the object has penetrated the eye, do not attempt to remove the object. Protect
around the object with sterilized cotton wool moistened with water.
 If the object has come out after injuring the eye, such as a stabbing injury from a
piece of metal, cover the eye with a sterile pad. Bandage firmly in an effect to keep
the eyelid closed and minimize further damage.
 Send immediately the victim to a doctor or hospital.
Chemical in the Eye or Chemical Burn

 Flush the open eye at once with clean cold water and continue washing the eye for
at least 15 minutes. Another option is to put his face under water and hold his
eyelids open.
 Do not apply eye ointment. Cover with an eye pad
 Send the victim to a doctor or hospital quickly.
Bandaging for Eye Injuries

The eye pad is kept in place by the covering bandage running under the ear next to
the injured eye and above the other ear.
Injury from a Blow

 Cover the eye with an eye pad and send the casualty at once for medical attention.
 Do not apply eye ointment.
Electric shock
 Switch off the current.
 If this is not possible, the objective will then be to disconnect the victim to the point
of contact. This may be done by either using something made of rubber, cloth or


Revision Date :
wood or a folded newspaper. The victim’s own clothing may also be jerked away
from the point of contact, provided both the victim’s clothes and the rescuers
hands are insulated or dry.
 Do not touch the skin of the victim before the current is switched off.
 If breathing is failing or has stopped, artificial respiration should be given, which
should be continued until further medical attention is obtained.
 Get help and send for a doctor.
Gassing
 Carry the casualty into fresh air; do not let him walk.
 If breathing has stopped, give artificial respiration, get help and send for a doctor
or an ambulance.
 Mild cases should be kept resting and, after recovery, send home by car.
Wound care
 Keep the wound clean and dry.
 Do not remove dried wound tissue, allow wound to coagulate and dry.
 If you must work in surroundings that will dirty the dressing, wear a protective
covering such as a glove or plastic film wrapped around the dressing.
 If wound is dressed, a clean dressing should be applied whenever it becomes
soiled, unless otherwise advised by nurse or a doctor.
 If the wound accidentally becomes soiled, clean it is soon as possible with mild
soap and water, using a patting action (DO NOT RUB).
 Dry the wound completely by gentle patting motions before putting a new dressing.
 Avoid use of the wounded parts as much as possible, especially if it is a finger,
hand or foot. If the wound is around a joint, do not attempt to bend joint.
 For stitches which will not dissolve, have stitches removed according to doctor’s
instructions to avoid infection. Stitches can be removed at your local first aid room.
 If a wound becomes red, warm, swollen, shows pus, or feels more sore instead of
less sore as days go by. If the victim begins to run a fever or have chills, contact a
doctor immediately to check for infection.
2.4.8 Accident Reporting Procedure

 All Near-Miss incidents, which do not cause injuries to persons, but which could
have caused if it happened in slightly different circumstances, shall be reported to
the Safety Supervisor within the workday of the incident.
 All incidents which cause injury or property damage shall follow the reporting
diagram given below:


Revision Date :
INCIDENT ACCIDENT
OCCURE
EMPLOYEE REPORTS
TO SUPERVISOR
EMPLOYEE TREATED
SUPERVISOR/SAFETY OFFICER
INVESTIGATE AND REPORTS
Client HSE TO CLIENT HSE DEPARTMENT
ADVISOR AND ICOM PROJECT MANAGER
AND HSE MANAGER
ICOM PROJECT ICOM HSE

MANAGER MANAGER
The Project Manager shall be promptly informed of any accident of relevant nature.
This responsibility of information should be done by the immediate work supervisor
and the safety officer.
2.4.9 Incident Investigation

All incidents causing injury and damaged, as well as high risk near-miss incidents,
shall be thoroughly investigated under the coordination of the Safety Supervisor.
The Safety Supervisor shall prepare a detailed report as a final investigation. This
report shall include description of events, causes, eventual responsibilities or
misbehaviour of persons. He shall give proposals for preventing the reoccurrence of
the same. Such report shall be presented to the Safety Manager and Project Manager
for conformance.
For every incident, the work foreman or supervisor has to fill the “Incident Report
Form”. The form shall be completed with the concurrence of the Safety Supervisor.


Revision Date :
The Final incident report shall contain the observations and evaluations that came out
during the investigation of the accident.
A Monthly Safety Report and Injury Summary Report will be maintained and reported
by the Safety Supervisor to the Project Manager.
2.5 FIRE PREVENTION & CONTROL
2.5.1 Fire Prevention

Fire Prevention shall be a basic part of ICOM’s safety program. The discussion given
in this section has been taken from industry references, to enhance awareness on the
measures to prevent fires. The objective is to protect personnel and property against
the harmful effects of unwanted and uncontrolled fire. Implementation of this fire
protection program is necessary in order to avoid injury to personnel and loss
property.
Instruction and Standards:
NFPA:
National Fire Codes
NFPA 231 -Appendix C, Protection of Outdoor Storage.
“Fire Safety Checklist for Evaluating Operations Materials Store Yard”
2.5.2 Pre-job Considerations

Operations within a petroleum industry complex requires careful planning, since plants
and support facilities being constructed are frequently next to those already in
operation. A serious incident at an operations site can have devastating effects on an
adjacent plant facility and vice-versa. This is mainly due to the large amount of
flammables and fuels present at both locations. The factors which must be considered
before the job starts include:
 Site preparation
 Work permit schedules
 Types of work permits required
 Type/quantity of equipment required on-site.
As part of this process, the contractor must take into account the potential hazards
that can be encountered on site. Protection of machinery and equipment, control of
ignition sources, storage of flammable and combustible materials, housekeeping, staff
training, and end-of-shift checks, must all be considered at the same time.
A qualified Fire Watch shall be assigned and maintained at the work site during and
for 30 minutes afterwards of the hot works activities.
2.5.3 Layout
Good layout helps ensure the project can be carried out efficiently. The following
principles of project layout and organization can help minimize fire risks:


Revision Date :
 Avoid congestion around machinery and equipment where there is a high level of
activity and traffic.
 Operations having a high fire risk, such as welding and spray painting, should be
isolated from flammable and explosive materials or specially protected.
 Be sure to provide adequate emergency access and egress.
 Storage of flammable and explosive materials shall have an established program
which shall be strictly implemented.
 Amount of storage in the plant site should be restricted to minimum quantities
necessary for an uninterrupted cycle of operations.
 Use a larger, secondary storage site outside the plant area where possible.
2.5.4 Equipment Protection

Some items of plant equipment need special handling and care after they arrived on
site, up to the time these equipment are commissioned. Examples are computers
sets, electronic instrumentation devices, control gears, large pumps and compressors.
These kind of equipment should be covered and protected against possible damage,
resulting from its exposure to normal operations activity, dust, moisture, paint spray,
etc. Special consideration should be given to protecting equipment against fire.
Damaged can also be caused by storing it near heavy stack piles and near water
storages. Non-corrosive fire fighting agents should be available near these equipment.
2.5.5 Control of Ignition Sources

Compliance with work permit procedures and its prescribed precautions are important.
Safe conditions are primarily meant to protect against possible ignition of high
flammable substances from process operations.
ICOM shall take steps to prevent ignition of operations materials, lubricants, and fuels
used in the job itself. Tu supplement control of ignition sources, the following are
given:
 Electrical equipment should be checked regularly for defects.
 Smoking is permitted only in designated areas.
 Welding equipment, asphalt kettles, heating appliances, open flames and hot
surfaces should be isolated from combustible materials.
 Indirect sources of ignitions should be closely monitored. Examples of these are
hot welding slag dropped from a height and sparks from a fire under an asphalt
kettle.
 Open fires and open burning of materials shall be strictly prohibited. Authorization
must be obtained from the Client Fire Protection Department.
 Proper bonding and grounding techniques shall be used, for any operation where
static electricity could become an ignition source.


Revision Date :
2.5.6 Flammable Liquids

Flammable liquids are those that can be produce a flammable mixture in air at
ambient temperature. This is defined as a fluid (liquid or gas) having a flash point of
55 °C (130 °F) or lower. Care in handling flammable fluids is of prime importance. The
following guidelines shall be adopted for flammable liquids:
Storage
 All flammable liquids must be kept in securely capped metal containers or steel
drums on which the contents are clearly marked.
 Gasoline, acetone, spirits and other volatile liquids with flash points below 32 °C
(90 °F) should be kept in strong metal lockers located in well-ventilated, non-
combustible huts or sheds.
 Dry chemical fire extinguishers shall be placed nearby storages of flammable
liquids and readily accessible in case of fire.
 Drums containing flammable fluids shall be provided with bung vents.
 Flammable storage areas must be securely locked or fenced, posted with a
warning sign “Danger: Flammable Area” and must be located at least 15 meters
(50 feet) away from the nearest building or storage area for combustibles.
 No, other materials should be stored with flammable liquids.
 Flammable gases in cylinders (acetylene, propane, etc.) shall be segregated from
other materials, preferably under an open, well-ventilated sun shade.
 Oxidizing gases (oxygen, chlorine, nitrous oxide, etc.) shall be stored separately.
Handling of Flammable Liquids (Reference NFPA 30)

 In handling, the following precautions should be observed:
 Transportation must always be in sealed metal containers. Plastic containers shall
be prohibited.
 Transfer operations should be carried out with funnels.
 No open flames shall be allowed within 15 meters (50 feet) of the transferring
operation, unless conditions warrant greater clearance.
 Containers are to be grounded and bonded during transfer operations.
 Screw tops and stoppers should be replaced immediately.
 Any metal container holding flammable liquid must be a FM (or UL) approved type
of safety container.
Ventilation
 Gasoline and diesel powered equipment should only be used in well-ventilated
areas.
 Exhaust pipes should be kept away from combustible materials. Engines must be
stopped before refuelling takes place.


Revision Date :
2.5.7 Combustible Materials

A project site may contain many materials that are potential fuel for a fire. Examples of
these are:
 packing material
 wooden scaffold planks
 form lumber
 electrical insulation
 tires
 rubber materials
 lubricating oil
 grease
 engine fuels, i.e., diesel and gasoline fuel
 Flammable liquids, i.e. paints, solvents, etc.
Daily site clean-up of combustible materials is required to reduce fire hazards.
2.5.8 Housekeeping
Good housekeeping is often the most neglected concern in the work site, yet is it one
of the most important factors where incidents happen, especially in fire incident cases.
ICOM shall implement a good housekeeping program which shall be personally
monitored by the project manager and the site safety manager. Practically, good
housekeeping on the work site can eliminate situations where a fire can start. Here
are some guidelines:
 Rubbish, accumulated at a job site, provides a good starting point for a fire.
 Waste should be removed at regular intervals and always at the end of a working
day.
 Metal bins with close-fitting lids should be provided for oily rags wood shavings,
and other highly combustible wastes.
 Use non-combustible absorbents to remove spills or leaks of oil. Contents of ash
trays should not be mixed with other waste.
2.5.9 Fire Emergency Response Equipment – Fire Extinguisher

ICOM acknowledges its obligation to provide and maintain adequate, easily
accessible fire protection devices. Suppression systems may also be installed where
the occupancy of a certain area is of very high value. Fire protection devices shall be
provided within the project site, as well as for camp facilities.
Fire protection equipment shall be inspected regularly and periodically in accordance
with requirements of the Client regulations. ICOM shall consult with the Client Safety
Department in conjunction with the Client’s Fire Protection Division for advice on
selection of such equipment.


Revision Date :
Contractor personnel shall be made aware of the fire fighting equipment available on
site and be familiar with its use. These are the three types of fire extinguishers
normally found on operations sites: water, carbon dioxide and dry chemical types:
1) Water-Type Fire Extinguisher

 Water extinguisher should be available around sites where there will be Class “A”
material, such as wood, paper, waste material, or packing crates.
 The typical portable water extinguisher comes in a 9.5 litres (2-1/2 gallon) size.
 On operations sites within CLIENT facilities a pressurized system of fire water
hydrants and hoses will normally be available, so this type of extinguisher will have
limited use.
2) Carbon Dioxide Type Extinguisher

The carbon dioxide (CO2) type extinguisher is normally used for controlling electrical
fires. These fires take place in motors, switch-gear, and so forth and are usually very
easily controlled by de-energizing the circuits that supply the power.
The advantage of using CO2 in this particular instance is that it leaves no residue in
the mechanisms of the electrical equipment and, therefore, does not further contribute
to the damage.
Caution:
A CO2 extinguisher should never be used in enclosed areas where people are
present, because the gas displaces oxygen from the immediate environment.
When the oxygen level in the environment is reduced sufficiently to put out a fire,
the oxygen level is also incapable of supporting human life. Also, they may not be
effective outdoor due to dissipation of wind.
3) Dry Chemical Type Extinguisher

A dry chemical type extinguisher is normally used in controlling Class “B” fires in
flammable liquids. A dry chemical extinguisher normally comes in portable 9 kilograms
(20 pounds) and 11.36 kilograms (30 pounds) sizes. A larger wheeled extinguisher of
68 kilograms (150 pounds) and above is available, but is usually found only within
petroleum operating areas.
Some dry chemical extinguishers today have a powder which is good in controlling
Class “A”, “B”, “C” fires. This multipurpose ABC powder gives this particular fire
extinguisher a good change of controlling any type of fire involving a wood, petroleum
liquid or electrical equipment.
Pressurized Water
Where a pressurized water system is available on site, the contractor is responsible
for supplying hoses and nozzles.
 Since most fires at operations sites involves Class “A” materials, they can be
fought with water.


Revision Date :
 Charged water hoses, ready for use, are a necessity. If there is no permanent
system installed at a particular location, a water tanker and portable water
extinguishers will have to be supplied in order to take care of any Class “A” fires.
2.5.10 Reporting a Fire

 Every fire, including those extinguished by contractor personnel, shall be reported
to the CLIENT representative.
 The Fire Protection Unit will inspect the area, to offer suggestions for preventing a
recurrence, and to ensure the contractor has re-established his fire fighting
capability by recharging extinguishers or replacing equipment.
 The emergency telephone number used for reporting a fire or any emergency that
requires CLIENT assistance is 110. The contractor must ensure that this number
is posted at all telephones and that instructions are placed indicating how to report
the emergency correctly.
2.5.11 End-of-Shift Checks

 A routine inspection shall be made at the end of the working day to see that
everything is left in a safe condition.
 The following itemized checklist shall be followed:
• Clean-up and removal of rubbish and waste materials.
• Switch off electrical equipment at the mains. Separate circuit should be
provided for security lights and other equipment that has to be turned on.
• Cover valuable equipment to protect it against dirt and against the effects of
water that might be used in an emergency.
• Make a special check of smoking areas, hot equipment, welding areas, etc. to
be sure there is no possibility of delayed ignition resulting in afire.
• Return flammable liquids and gas cylinders to designated storage areas.
2.6 CONTRACTOR CAMP SANITATION AND SAFETY
2.6.1 Site Utilities & Site Access

ICOM shall provide, install, distribute and maintain all necessary HVAC, electrical,
telephone, communications, gas, compressed air, potable water, raw water, fire water,
fuels, sewage and any other utilities for the temporary facilities as required to perform
the work. Utilities as follows shall be fit for this purpose and meet the appropriate
specifications and standards as for the system requirements:
 Water
 Electrical Power
 Drainage
 Telecommunications
 Telephone Expenses


Revision Date :
 Temporary Fence (Around Temporary Office & Installations)

 Security Services (Inside Operations Area & Temporary Facilities)
 First Aid & Medical Services
 Temporary Facilities Operations
 Dumping Area for Soil
 Soil & Domestic Waste Management
 Demobilization
ICOM Operations group shall strictly control access into its WORK areas.
2.6.2 Site Operations Facilities Requirements

The site operations facilities shall be referred to the Master Site Layout Drawing, but
with prior review and approval by the Client. Camp Facilities shall be inspected by
CLIENT Company Representative prior to occupancy. The rest of the operations site
facilities requirements stipulated shall be in accordance with Client specifications as
per contract agreement.
Operations temporary site facilities shall include but be not limited to the following:
 Site Offices & Facilities, Site lunch shelters, guard house
 Yards, hard standings, parking and lay-up provisions , transport, all vehicle repairs,
service and maintenance capability
 Warehouse, Materials management, storage and lay down
 First Aid, Ambulance and Medical Services as per Client safety regulations
 Temporary site facilities fencing/ area lighting
 Fire prevention and fire fighting services
 Site sanitary and hygiene arrangements
ICOM will also provide temporary smoking facilities located within the site facilities
duly designated by Contractor and approved by Client which is not restricted for
contractor use for fire prevention and safety reasons.
ICOM shall be responsible for designing, constructing, operating and maintaining its
own temporary facilities, i.e., accommodation camps, ensuring and maintaining
adequate standards of living, dining, medical, fire fighting facilities, recreational
facilities, cleaning and laundry services for its staff, work force, specialists and
subcontractors in accordance with the Client’s Sanitary Code ensuring the highest
standard of hygiene.
ICOM shall be responsible for the dust and pollution control in the operations and
facilities areas within its contract scope of work. First Aid & medical facilities will be
provided as per Client standards, and as may be discussed in section for First Aid &
Medical Care.


Revision Date :
At the completion of the work and Employer has agreed so in writing, Contractor will
remove all temporary facilities and utilities including underground installations and all
areas used including the restoration to the their original condition.
ICOM scope of work does not include civil works, however, assistance will be
provided to other contractors who will execute the civil jobs. ICOM will cooperate in
this regard and give all the pertinent information regarding the execution of work such
as provision of holes, equipment basement and foundations, etc.
2.6.3 Personnel Housing, Sanitation & Welfare Facilities

ICOM shall camp its project personnel at a designated temporary facility in
consideration of the site vicinity area. ICOM shall construct the camp facilities layout
in accordance with plans submitted and approved by Client. The operations of camp
facilities shall be in accordance with the Client’s Sanitary Code requirements.
All temporary facilities for site and camp, i.e., electrical and mechanical installations,
shall be inspected and checked regularly to ensure compliance with standards and to
monitors for fire protection measures.
ICOM HSE Manager shall coordinate with the Client’s Safety Advisor for scheduled
inspections and walkthroughs of camp facilities to ensure conformance with all
requirements prior to occupancy.
2.6.4 Facilities
The following are to be provided and equipped in the camp facilities, in consideration
of applicable regulations:
 Guard House, in which shall be stationed deputized security personnel round the
clock
 Rooms furnished with beds and lockers
 Adequate toilets, shower and washing facilities with running water, as provided for
by the Sanitation Code
 Adequate supply of drinking water
 Kitchen and Dining Mess Halls to include food storage
 Medical First aid room (under CLIENT facilities available for ICOM)
 Trash, debris, rubbish and refuse containers/bins for collection
 Recreational outdoor and indoor facilities
 Fire Protection Equipment
 Mosque for praying
 Vehicles Parking Area.
2.7 JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS (JSA)

The Job Safety Analysis is a foundation tool for developing a new operating procedure or
evaluating an existing procedure. It is a tool for analyzing the potential or existing steps of a


Revision Date :
procedure, the existing or potential hazards (both behaviors and conditions), and the
contingencies or countermeasures to eliminate or control the identified hazards. Once this
analysis is completed, a complete operating procedure is developed that includes the safety
steps. The goal is to have only one document (operating procedure) to direct how a particular
task is completed. The JSA feeds into this single operating procedure and does not replace
this operating procedure.
The JSA process includes the identification of all the procedural steps, then the identification
of the hazards, and finally the identification of the contingencies. The process is done with a
team that includes, at a minimum, a person who knows and understands the work being
analyzed; a person who doesn’t know the work being analyzed; and someone who knows and
understands the JSA technique.
Job Safety Analysis is a procedure used to review job methods and uncover hazards:
– That may have been overlooked in the layout of the plant or building and in the
design of the machinery, equipment, tools, work stations, and processes, or
– That may have developed after production started, or
– That resulted from changes in work procedures or personnel.
ICOM shall develop the necessary detailed JSA for work execution activity which have
been identified as ‘High Risk’, and as may be referred to the planned schedule of
activities within the project scope of work. The JSA Hazard Checklist is given on
Section 4.22 of this manual.
2.7.1 Factors for JSA

The following factors are considered for selecting jobs to be analyzed and established
with a JSA:
 Frequency of incidents
 Frequency of disabling injuries
 Severity Potential or High Risk
 New jobs created by changes in equipment or in processes
Although obviously the new job or product lines have no history of accidents, their
accident potential may not be fully appreciated and evaluated, hence a JSA may be
due.
2.7.2 Making the JSA

The following steps are given as a guide to making the JSA:
 Select the job to be analyzed. Selection of the job is based on the criteria
mentioned in this JSA section. Observing him perform the job, and trying to break
it not basic steps.


Revision Date :
 Select the right person from this to be observed. Briefing the person on the
purpose of the JSA and explain the benefits.
 Break the job down into successive steps or activities and observe how these
actions are performed. Record each step in the breakdown. Check the breakdown
with the person observed.
 Identify the hazards and potential accidents. (This is the critical step because only
an identified problem can be eliminated.)
 Develop safe job procedures to eliminate or control the hazards and prevent the
potential accidents.
Operating procedures may be revised based on the job steps identified in the JSA as
hazards are more likely to be addressed, hence the new operating procedure shall
incorporate steps to avoid identified these hazards.
2.7.3 JSA Form

The following format is suggested for structuring the JSA:
Page # Industrial cadre for operations and maintenance
JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS FORM
(This is the Front Sheet of the JSA)
JSA Number:
Title of Job being analysed:

JSA by Minimum PPE Required
Department/Section:


Revision Date :
Name Staff Signature Date - Coverall.

# - Safety Helmet.
JSA Written by: - Safety Shoes (Sole must not
Details of other persons be smooth).
who provided assistance - Safety Glasses (Dark &
in developing the JSA Clear).
- Hearing Protection.
JSA Approved by: - Barricade/Sign the area.
Details of the Person - Pre-start Safety Toolbox Talk.
Supervising the job - PTW must be used for every
Crew performing the job: job
(to be entered by Job - Always follow the 6 rules of
Supvr) Manual Handling - see below
- Supervisors must be at the
job site for all Medium and high
risk activities
Manual Handling Hierarchy of

Controls
1. Plan the lift. 2. Correct feet 3. Bend your  Eliminate the
Look at bulk of load as positioning: The knees hazard
feet should be Bend at the  Substitute with a
well as the weight and apart with one knees and keep less hazard
get help if you need it. leg slightly the back  Use engineering
Plan where you are forward to straight. controls to reduce
maintain balance hazard
going to take the load
 Administrative
before you start & use Controls e.g.
mechanical equipment procedures
to lift the load where  Personal
Protective
possible
Equipment
4. Get a firm grip 5. Lift with your 6. Placing the
Keep the load close legs. load down.
Do not jerk or The previous
against your body. strain, use a rules apply
smooth action. when placing
the object down
as they do when
lifting.
Emergency Situation / Evacuation

Fire In case of Emergency situation all works must be stopped, equipment to be
switched off and all personnel’s must report to the safest muster point.
Industrial cadre for operations and maintenance

Page # JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS FORM
(This is the Front Sheet of the JSA)
Job or Task Steps Hazards Identified Controls


Revision Date :
2.7.4 The JSA Worksheet

To use the JSA worksheet, complete the following steps:
1. Observe the task or work being done.
2. Break down the task or work into steps. The procedure steps should be clear and
understandable with enough detail so that the team can identify the hazards and
contingencies/control measures.
3. For each step, list the hazards in that step. The hazards should include both behaviours
and conditions; and both existing and potential hazards. Use the following list as a
memory aid. These are example of hazards and types of accidents that can happen.
acceleration (going ergonomic hazards (high frequency, high pressure (hydraulic or


Revision Date :
too slow or too fast) duration, high force, posture, point of pneumatic)
operation, mechanical pressure, vibration,
environmental exposure)
toxic mechanical flammability/fire Radiation
biological workplace violence explosives electrical
chemical reactions struck-by struck-against contact-by
contact-with caught-in caught-by caught-between
fall-to-surface fall-below over exertion bodily reaction
over-exposure
List the contingencies and control measures for each identified hazard. The contingencies or
recommendations should be developed in sequence, be specific, and should be reviewed by
a person knowledgeable about Company and Governmental requirements.
Contingencies are alternate ways of doing the task step that avoid the hazard. Control
measures are additional things done to compensate for the hazard.
2.7.5 Hazard Control Hierarchy

Control measure solutions should follow the Hierarchy of Control by implementing, in order:
1. Engineering Controls
These include substitution of chemicals or equipment, isolation of the hazard,

ventilation, and equipment modification. Engineering Controls focus on eliminating the
hazard all together and focus on the source of the hazard.
2. Administrative Controls
These include reducing a person's exposure to a hazard by limiting time exposed,

changing work procedures, or improving cleanliness practices. Administrative Controls
are heavily dependent upon the employee's compliance.
3. Personal Protective Equipment
These include requiring protective equipment when Engineering and Administrative
Controls cannot sufficiently reduce the exposure to a hazard. Personal Protective
Equipment is almost always used in combination with one, or both, of the other types
of controls.
2.8 Environmental, Sanitary & Waste Management
This Waste Management Program and Pollution Contingency Plan covers the plan of
action to be observed by ICOM during the job execution of the project scope of work
to avoid pollution or environmental contamination of the land, air or water arising out
of operational activities.
The program follows and in conjunction with the requirements set forth in the:
 Environmental requirements of the Client.
 ICOM Operations Safety Manual


Revision Date :
 Sanitary Code
 Client Safety Manual
 All other applicable regulations set forth by the Kingdom
2.8.1 Environmental Compliance Statement
ICOM recognizes its responsibility to execute its operations and project activities in
compliance to existing and applicable environmental legislation, as well as Client
environmental regulations and standards. ICOM aims to protect all its personnel and
work areas regarding all environmental factors against pollution, degradation and
damage through the application of environmental protection programs, processes
and work procedures that help ensure effective environmental management.
2.8.2 Responsibility
The Project Manager is vested the authority and responsibilities to implement the
Environmental, Sanitary & Waste Management Program. The assistance of each
respective Key Personnel of the Project Team is vital to successful implementation of
this program.
The surveillance and monitoring of the implementation of this program is vested on
the designated Environmental Coordinator.
Safety Officer, Supervisors and Superintendents will actively help provide training,
information and supervision required to promote public health and hygienic practices
by employees.
The Environmental Coordinator with the Client’s Environmental Officer will conduct
periodic inspection of field facilities, equipment and work areas to detect and correct
environmental violations and unsanitary activities.
2.8.3 Waste Management Procedures

In general, ICOM’s waste management program shall adhere strictly with the
provisions of the Client’s Waste Management Program. The following waste
management procedures shall apply under this contract project:
Water supply Protection

 All chemicals and lubricants will be stored properly to avoid free leakage in the
soil that may contaminate water bearing ground subsurface.
 Hydrostatic test water shall be disposed in accordance to Client regulations on
“Disposal of Wastewater from cleaning, flushing and Hydrostatic Test”.
Waste Water Management

 All the sewage water influents within the site office area shall be collected in the
Sewage Holding Tank.


Revision Date :
 Portable toilets will be placed at jobsite work area where it is accessible to the
workers. The number of portable toilets will depend on the number of workers as
defined in the Client’s Sanitary Code.
 Sewage Holding Tanks and Portable toilets shall be cleaned and maintained
every two (2) days.
 Sewage water holding tank for the accommodation area shall be on daily basis, a
permanent pump truck shall be assigned for this purpose.
 Disposal area of waste water shall be provided by CLIENT at their designated
location.
 Regular inspections shall be done to check the sewer system connection in good
operation. If necessary, removal of the accumulated material shall be done on a
regular basis as stated above.
 The site Operations and Construction Department shall be responsible and shall
maintain a written record of the pumping and cleaning intervals to ensure that the
requirement is met. A copy of such records shall be made available for review
and inspection to the Client’s Environmental Officer.
 Any holding tank which have overflowed, or otherwise created an odor or public
health nuisance, must be reported immediately to the Client’s Environmental
Officer.
Solid Waste Management

Client’s Solid Waste Landfill standard shall be referred as guidelines for the
management of trash and construction debris.
 All biodegradable site and camp waste shall be collected in dedicated closed
containers regularly cleaned. This temporary site storage shall be located in an
isolated area in order not to create health problems.
 Clinic waste shall be stored separately in dedicated bags/containers
 All the industrial scrap, both biodegradable and non-biodegradable waste will be
regularly (on a daily basis) collected and dumped in the waste handling facility
designated by the Client.
 The activity shall be performed in coordination with the CLIENT Authority to
ensure that ICOM shall comply with the operating procedures for the landfill
established by CLIENT.
Provisions for Landfill Disposal Site

All the industrial scrap and non-biodegradable waste will be regularly (on a daily
basis) collected and dumped in the waste handling facility provided by CLIENT at
their designated location.
Vehicles
All the vehicles for the transportation of the waste shall be suitable and dedicated to
the specific class of waste in order to avoid mixing of different type of waste. In


Revision Date :
particular, the vehicles must guarantee that no dispersion of product shall occur
during the transport. Vehicles carrying loads that are likely to blow-off from the
containment compartment shall have cover that is either integral part of the vehicle
or a separate cover of suitable material with fasteners to secure all sides of the
cover. This cover shall be in use while in transit.
All vehicles shall be provided with the fire prevention equipment (if needed) and
phone number to contact in the event of an emergency.
Construction Refuse and Waste

Solid waste shall be handled, transported and disposed off separately from liquid
waste. Construction site handling and disposal of solid and liquid waste shall be in
full compliance of existing Saudi Arabian Government Regulations.
 When transporting solid waste passing public roads, it shall be protected or
covered securely to prevent the waste spilling off to the roadways.
 Disposal site shall be designated by the Client or the area district municipality
approved landfill location.
Toilet Facility
 One (1) toilet facility must be maintained in work areas for the first one (1) to
fifteen (15) men and then at a rate of one (1) additional toilet per fifteen (15) men.
 Toilet Facilities must be serviced and cleaned on a regular basis.
 Toilet facilities maintenance and inspection shall have reference with
requirements outlined in the applicable Sanitary Code and relevant standards.
Food Refuse Storage and Handling

 Foods for the workers shall be according to arrangement made with ICOM
Catering Service Contractor, prepared and packed for distribution.
 Food shall either be delivered to the designated mess hall within the site
office/lay-down area premises during meal schedules, or workers may be taken
to nearby ICOM camp mess halls.
 Food refuses shall be deposited to waste receptacles in such a way that it is
inaccessible to insects, rodents and other pests.
 Storage must be in properly closed, heavy duty plastic bags that will not emit bad
odor prior to disposal to a designated location.
 Proper refuse containers shall be Standard 115 litres (30 gal.) steel garbage bins
with the heavy duty plastic bag lining or its equivalent.
 Container shall be made of durable, non-absorbent and easily cleanable material
that is impervious to attack by insects, rodents and pests.
 The cover, lid of the refuse container shall be kept closed while not in use.
 All refuse shall be disposed off in a municipal sanitary landfill.
 Burn pits are prohibited.


Revision Date :
Employee Training on Waste Management

 All employees shall be instructed, during tool box meetings, to avoid mixing of the
various type of waste.
 They will be informed of the applicable public health rules and regulations.
 Perform their duties and work in a manner which will not endanger their selves
and to be alert to unhealthy and unsanitary conditions.
 Drivers shall be instructed on how to store the waste on the vehicles, on the risks
connected with the hazardous waste, on what to do in case of emergency.
2.8.4 Pollution Contingency Plan

Any incident, which may cause a negative impact to the environment, shall be
reported without delay to the Client. Thus, training and orientation by the Client for all
contractors’ employees shall be conducted especially in identifying gas leaks and/or
spills. A more detailed Pollution Contingency Plan may be prepared and issued in
case the Client and project management determines relevant need to intensify this
program. Several types of pollution may arise at the worksite, i.e. Air, Noise, Water
and Land. ICOM shall endeavour to control if not to eliminate these forms of pollution
which may endanger personnel and the surrounding environment.
Noise Pollution
The following procedures are to be implemented to prevent/minimize noise pollution
within the project area:
 Trainings shall be provided to all concerned personnel on the effects of noise on
hearing.
 Ensure that the noise contribution of new equipment entering the project site is in
accordance with applicable standards.
 All other practical method shall be used to reduce noise level of all
materials/equipment under control of ICOM. At some instances when and where
noise cannot be avoided, and source of noise is coming from the daily operations
of the plant, remedial measures shall be introduced to the workers to avoid
adverse effects to human such as the following:
o Proper use of hearing protection device.
o Participate in the audiometric program, if required.
o Report any employee/worker who had found to have a significant change in
hearing threshold.
o Provide training to all concerned on the effects of noise on hearing.
The intensity of sound is measured in logarithmic units known as decibels (dB).
Above 80 decibels is considered over the threshold of human hearing, prolonged
exposure exceeding 80 decibels can cause permanent lose of hearing. In addition to
causing loss of hearing, there is some evidence that noise can produce other
deleterious effects on human health and on work performance. The following are
recognized sources of Noise Pollution:


Revision Date :
 Jackhammers
 rotating machines
 blowers
 engines and other machinery continuously running
Land Pollution
Handling and use of fuels for vehicles, generator sets and other engines shall be
conducted in a manner that will protect the surrounding environment. Spillage control
measures shall be in place and appropriately implemented. The hydrotest water
disposal is a possible source of pollution if not carried out according to the standards.
All spills and leaks eventually generated during construction phase shall be managed
according to specific instructions and regulations of the Client. Spill control shall be
coordinated and in consonance with the Client’s Spill Control program.
Air Pollution
Air pollution involves release into the atmosphere of gases, finely divided solids, or
finely dispersed liquid aerosols at rates that exceed the capacity of the atmosphere
to dissipate them or to dispose them thru the incorporation into solid or liquid layers
of the biosphere. Air pollution results from a variety of causes, not all of which are
within human control.
Dust storms in desert areas are natural phenomena to which aerial transport can
carry pollutants from one place to another. Dust-Air pollution may affect humans
directly, causing a smarting of the eyes or coughing. An effective ‘Dust-Control’
system should be in place for areas identified with heavy dust activity. The following
procedures are to be implemented to prevent air minimize excessive exhaust
emission:
 Dust control shall be accomplished by properly wetting the earthen work area
prior to commencing the work activities.
 Standards for ‘Ambient air quality and source emission’ shall be referred to for
more specifics and technical information for air pollution mitigation.
 All other practical method shall be used to eliminate or reduce air pollution such
as airborne dust due to excavation and vehicular movement under control of
ICOM.
 At some instances when and where they can not be avoided, and source of
pollution is coming from the daily operations of the plant, remedial measures shall
be introduced to the workers to avoid human effect. These remedial measures
shall include proper use of eye protection and breathing device. Personnel who
have been found to have affected significantly with air contaminants shall be
reported immediately.
2.9 EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLAN


Revision Date :
ICOM is committed reducing the losses caused by emergencies. We will do so by

identifying, planning for and training to respond to emergencies that could occur
during operations and by allocating resources needed to prevent, mitigate, and to
safely recover from emergencies with minimum or no losses of life company assets
and/or damage to the environment or local community. We will do everything possible
to prevent emergencies, but if they do occur, we will be prepared. Each person in the
emergency response and support organization, as described herein, will be held fully
accountable for the complete execution of his emergency related duties.
The scope of Emergency Response is there perceived to be a mixture of several
responses, from medical emergency, to communication failures and other necessary
responses relative to the nature of work as well as those presented by the
geographical terrain.
The aim therefore is to provide a general plan guide to facilitate an effective response
system, bringing possible emergencies under control, using resources and procedures
for emergency response in place for the facility or site.
As a general requirement, ICOM shall abide by the rules and procedures set forth by
the Client’s Safety Manual and all other applicable standards. Emergency Response
Procedures may be with the Client’s Safety Adviser. This ERP may be revised or
updated based on perceived and analyzed work conditions, thereby making this
document an inter-active procedure.
This procedure details the site emergency and evacuation plans for all employees of
ICOM and those affected by its operations during the execution of this contract. The
plans shall be used as a training guide to ensure employees are aware of their
responsibilities for effective preparedness during an emergency situation.
2.9.1 Emergency Reporting

The procedure below shall be followed for reporting emergencies:
 Dialling Number________ if he uses a normal telephone.
 Dialling the following number to activate the hotline, if he uses Mobile Phone:
 _____ (declare this hotline number during the project execution)
 If contact cannot be established on hotline, the nearest site supervisor can be
contacted directly.
 The proper method for reporting an emergency is to speak slowly, calmly and
distinctly in a clear voice and give information in the following sequence:
 State: “This is a Disaster. There is an emergency at _________ (area/location)
near _____________ (exact area description).”
 Identify yourself by name, badge number, location and contact phone.
 Describe the emergency briefly, i.e., fire, leak from near-by ____________
(immediate area location), etc. State if there are any injured persons and how
many.


Revision Date :
 Report all relevant critical information.

 Repeat the above information or ask the receiver of the call to repeat your
information to verify accuracy.
 After the message has been given successfully, the reporting individual, if an
operator, should return
 Immediately to the emergency site to do whatever he can safely do to improve the
emergency situation.
2.9.2 Emergency Classification
 Minor Emergency
A situation where there is no danger to life and where risk of damage to
property/environment is minimal. For example, minor fires or emergencies that
may be dealt by personnel on site.
 Medium Emergency
A situation where there is danger to life a risk of damage to property/environment
and which is within the capability of ICOM control team and equipments to control
and handle
 Major Emergency
Where a situation exists or may develop which is beyond the capability of ICOM
emergency control team and equipment to control and requires assistance from
the government agencies and or other external resources.
2.9.3 Definitions
Emergency Control & Communication Center (ECCC)

The central command of emergency response, regulates flow of information & issue
instruction to ERT / ERG
Emergency Response Group (ERG)
The ERG shall be the site area response group to address local emergencies of minor
nature, any major incidents shall be referred further to the ERT
Site Emergency Incident Leader (SEIL)
The SEIL shall be the site work superintendent or supervisor who shall act as the
leader of the ERG and direct all necessary actions and responses of the ERG for
emergency incidents
Site Emergency Incident Coordinator (SEIC)
The site area safety officer who shall act as the coordinator for information and ERG
responses in assistance to the SEIL


Revision Date :
Emergency Response Team (ERT)
The ERT is a group of designated employees who are trained and qualified to handle
emergencies, take control measure to minimize consequential loss & handle all
rescue operations at the emergency scene
Emergency Response Coordinator (ERC)
The ERC is the overall in-charge at the emergency scene. He is responsible for all
decisions relating to management of the emergency. The Project Safety Manager will
act as the ERC.
2.9.4 Emergency Response Organization


Revision Date :
2.9.5 Organization & Responsibilities
Emergency Response Manager (ERM)
The ERM shall be authorized to make all necessary actions and decisions to facilitate
effective and immediate emergency response. For purposes of identification, the
Project Manager or his authorized representative shall be designated as the ERM. He
shall be authorized to declare emergency status and all clear instructions. He shall
manage the overall emergency organization and form strategies of effective
emergency response and has the authority for the final decision in any emergency
action. He shall have authority to declare evacuation proceedings for the entire scope
of the project. The ERM shall be located at the Emergency Control and
Communication Center (ECCC).
The ERM is responsible in assuming leadership of the ECCC, and shall implement the
emergency plan in accordance with approved procedures and directives. He shall be
the central reception of information updates, including control measures taken by the
incident commander. The ERM shall assess the emergency situation and direct
actions to minimize damage and loss of life, maintain contact with upper management,
declare if the emergency is “under control” and authorize the “all clear” signal. The
ERM is also tasked to develop emergency control tactics, authorize to facilitate proper
support of logistics and emergency supplies.


Revision Date :
Emergency Response Coordinator (ERC)
The ERC shall be responsible in advising the SEIL to initiate personnel inventory as
per call-out list as may be necessary order to control the emergency situations. He
shall direct all emergency control and rescue operations during and or after the
emergency. He shall coordinate logistic support and other assistance necessary to
carry out the emergency response effectively. He shall coordinate proper support of
logistics and emergency supplies need to carry out this plan.
The Safety Manager or his authorized representative shall be designated as the ERC.
He shall be tasked to effectively coordinate the emergency scene and assist the ERM
to control the emergency. He will relay instructions coming from the ERM and provide
status information and assistance between operations and plant groups. He shall
coordinate the survey of damage to plant and operations equipment and initiates
plans for restoration in consultation the project’s executive management. He shall
maintain close interaction between the ERM and with the emergency response teams
throughout the entire emergency period.
Emergency Response Team (ERT).
The ERT shall be composed of operations personnel, duly trained and designated to
facilitate effective emergency response for different types of emergency. One of the
main components of emergency response is the ERT. The ERT unit should be well
trained, knowledgeable and well qualified to control the emergency incident. The ERT
may be divided into sub-group such as, but not limited to:
 Medical ERT
 Fire ERT
 Equipment & Structure ERT (Electrical, Mechanical & Civil)
 Chemical Spill ERT
ERT groups have the responsibility of controlling further damages, extinguishing fire,
containing chemical spillage and gas leakage, etc. They shall be in close coordination
and conformance to any ERT group having jurisdiction over a specific site area.
Site Emergency Response Groups (ERG) shall also be established to act as first aid
to emergencies. Each site ERG shall be composed of the following:
 Site Emergency Incident Leader (SEIL), who shall be the work site supervisor or
superintendent
 Site Emergency Incident Coordinator (SEIC), who shall be the site safety officer
 First Aider, who shall be any craftsman or skilled personnel who has undergone
qualified training to administer first aid.


Revision Date :
 Fire Watchman, who shall be any non-supervisory personnel qualified to perform

fire watch and incipient fire protection.
In the absence of a regular ERT member, the concerned unit shall ensure the
availability of suitable experienced personnel as a replacement. As soon as the
emergency is declared, ERC shall first inform the area foreman and then either
proceed directly to the scene of emergency. In the event of an emergency in the
jobsite, the respective general site ERT members shall facilitate immediate response.
Site Emergency Incident Leader (SEIL)

The SEIL is responsible for immediate execution of suppression and control tactics at
the site. He shall be in-charge of the site’s control post (SCP) at a safe location near
the emergency site. He shall keep the ERM informed of the emergency status as well
as give useful information to analyze possible complications brought about by the
emergency incident. He shall evaluate the needs to facilitate proper emergency
response and request the necessary assistance from the ERM.
The SEIL shall lead the ERG in performing specific site emergency response within
their capacity.
Site Emergency Incident Coordinator (SEIC)

The site Safety Officer shall be designated as the SEIC and is responsible for
coordinating and will coordinate with area foreman / supervisor and other functions
related to ERG activities.
Project Nurse
A central project nurse shall be designated to supervise and monitor all field or site
nurse, as well as provide logistics support to mobilize first aide stations. This project
nurse shall serve as the overall field first aid controller over and above his normal role
as nurse for the main project first aid room. Project field nurses shall be assigned if
work site personnel shall reach 50 or above, corresponding field first aid station shall
be established for these project field nurses.
First Aider
The first aider shall be designated either by full time designation or by activation from
a non-supervisory function, during emergency medical incidents with in his scope of
works area. In such case that a particular site requires a site nurse, the nurse shall
automatically function as a first aider, over and above his duties as site or field nurse.
2.9.6 Emergency Response Actions
The flow of emergency response action shall be as follows:
 By person noticing a FIRE inside a plant, facility or building:
o Break glass of the nearest manual alarm call point


Revision Date :
o Raise the alarm for emergency incident by informing the SEIL or the area
foreman/supervisor through telephone or verbally.
o The SEIL or foreman/Supervisor shall immediate assess the situation and raise
the emergency incident to the ERM/ERC.
o (Note: The affected area foreman/supervisor shall fill out an incident

investigation report together with the site Safety Officer.)
o If the person who discovers the fire has been trained and know how to put-out
the fire, he may attempt to put it out by the use of available fire fighting
equipment, provided that his life will not be in danger by doing so.
o If the person who discovers the fire does not know how to put-out the fire, the
next arriving person who has been trained may do so under the same
precautions are the 1st person.
o All personnel should clear the area and proceed to the assembly point, making
way for the ERT to perform emergency response.
 By person/persons next arriving at the scene of emergency incident necessitating
evacuation:
o All persons on hearing and local alarm shall immediately proceed to the
assembly area, unless he has active designation as member of the ERT.
o If the next person has been trained for the particular emergency response, he
may proceed to the incident scene provided his own life will not be in danger.
o In case of FIRE, the trained ERT member shall rush to the scene of fire and
attempt to put it out by the use of available fire fighting equipment, provided
likewise that his life will not be in danger by doing so.
o He shall assist the ERT to the location of incident and give any information he
may have on the incident.
o Render all possible assistance to the ERT without causing overcrowding and
confusion.
o The area SEIL or foreman/supervisor, non-essential staff will assemble at the

designated assembly point
2.9.7 Medical Response
As soon as a medical emergency is discovered, the following shall be observed

immediately:
 The persons reporting the emergency shall stay with the victim until emergency
medical help is available.


Revision Date :
 The companion of the victim shall keep the victim at ease and shall try to facilitate
fresh air to the victim.
 The companion shall remove and isolate contaminated clothing and shoes.
 In case of contact with irritating or corrosive substance, immediately flush skin or

eyes with running water for at least 20 minutes.
 On arrival at the scene of emergency, ERT members shall apply first aid and
assess the condition if needed to be further treated at a hospital.
 The ERT shall bring artificial respiration equipment for cases where the victim is
not or is having difficulty breathing.
 The ERT members shall be made aware of the materials and chemicals involved
in the incident and take precautions to protect themselves.
2.9.8 Equipment breakdown
 ERC is the responsible for all decisions relating to equipment
 Keep the ERM informed about the situation hand over the charge to ERC
 Brief the ERC about the technical aspects and any risk or hazard about materials
involved
 Ensure that the ERC members does not leave the affected area
 Rest of works shall go on interrupted
 Switch-off/isolate electric circuits to the affected areas on instruction from area

foremen
 Keep alert and be ready to follow instruction of the ERM
2.9.9 Structural damaged/collapse
 All work is to be stopped immediately and all affected personnel to evacuate to the
designated or neutral area.
 All equipment, hot works, and machine operations within the affected area shall be
stopped in a safe manner and shall not resume work until a safe order is given by
the emergency command center.
 The ERT shall immediately mobilize to respond to the situation as per their
designated functions.
 The “ALL CLEAR” alarm shall only be given ERC


Revision Date :
2.9.10 Pipe Gas and Chemical Release

 The SEIL and SEIC shall immediate inform the ERC of any emergency gas
release.
 The ERC shall immediately inform the facility owner in order to contain the release
incident.
 If the locality has an establish evacuation procedure, i.e. upwind directional path,
this procedure shall be coordinated by the SEIL to be followed immediately.
 The ERC shall supplement instruction for evacuation in case a local evacuation
path is uncertain.
 Other personnel within the area shall be immediately informed of the emergency
situation and shall be given instruction if evacuation is likewise needed.
 ERT members upon clearance with pipeline facility operators will proceed to the
scene for any applicable rescue or response.
 After evacuation from the workplace to a safe area the employee will continue to
stay together until they are further instructed.
2.9.11 Explosion
 Upon hearing an explosion, nearby personnel must immediately proceed to
evacuate to a neutral location where the effects of the explosion is minimal.
 Immediately on receiving information about the explosion, the ERC shall inform
any facility owner and shall instruct the ERT to rush to the scene of explosion and
take appropriate action if practicable to do so.
 The ERT shall ensure that the explosion does not escalate its condition.
 The contractor ERT shall coordinate closely with the ERT of the Client to
effectively control the situation.
2.9.12 Emergency Communication and Dissemination flow
The table below gives the flow of emergency communication:

EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION FLOW
STEP ACTION
1 Emergency Information if given by the incident discoverer
2 Local/Established Emergency Communication Procedure shall be followed
(CLIENT or ICOM Site Areas)
3 The Emergency Response Coordinator (ERC) shall be informed and shall
initiate emergency response by ERT based on the type of response needed


Revision Date :
4 The ERC shall coordinate with the Site Emergency Incident Leader (SEIL) if
the emergency is authentic and needs immediate emergency response.
5 If the emergency has been verified to be true, all personnel shall be
evacuated to the assembly area
6 If the emergency has been verified as false alarm, the SEIL shall inform the
ERC who shall refer the matter to the ERM. The ERM shall give instruction
for all clear-return work.
7 If the emergency response has been instructed by the ERM, the ERT shall
immediately form to respond and control the emergency situation.
2.9.13 Incident Notification and Communication
In the event of an emergency on site, personnel shall notify the medical center via cell
phone, telephone, radio, verbally or any possible means.
Medical
When movement of personnel are joined with movement of equipment, over and
above the day to day operations activities, work-related injuries are most probable and
which make up highest recognized statistics of injury in the world, otherwise known as
industrial injuries. This is plainly because majority of the time of the working class are
spent are work. Bumps and falls are the most common accidents experienced by
industrial workers. When operations workers are required to do work on high level
areas by using scaffolding and other elevating means, the risk of falling is evidently
present.
Rescue
When operations personnel venture into a remote desert area, most often during the
first time, the likelihood of being lost is very high. Since trails left behind along the
sand can easily be erased by the wind, going back to where they came from may
present the danger of being stranded, specifically once any untoward incident
happens like encountering engine failure, vehicle accident or even disorientation.
2.9.14 Suppression/Control of Incident
In the event of an incident which has the potential to cause serious injury or loss of life
and or property and which tends to cause disruption, the ERT shall report directly to
the ERM to receive orders and instructions. The first job of the ERT is to suppress and
control the emergency in order not to create further danger and destruction.
For ICOM job sites, the worksite group will be utilized for specific and minor
emergency response, handling and controlling the emergency situation of the job site.


Revision Date :
All site employees shall be endeavoured to be utilized for handling different situations
based on the trainings given to them. All employees will be trained for fire extinguisher
operation and medical victim initial response.
2.9.15 Post-Incident Action
The Incident site under controlled by the ICOM ERM shall be take action as follows:
Stand Down and Fire Watch
The ERM shall instruct the ERT for “stand down” in order to neutralize the incident
and to monitor the immediate area, the fire watch is assigned as a fire reinforcement
as search for possible recurrence of ignition. Some personnel involved in the team
may be assigned to investigate incident to find causes. The personnel assigned to
investigate the incident shall be qualified for investigation.
Investigate and Report: All incidents shall have corresponding records kept at the
HSE department with follow through of final investigation reports.
Preliminary Notification for major Injuries

Upon the event of any major injuries, the contractor’s safety representative, ERC or
Project Manager shall notify the CLIENT Project Representative and Safety Advisor
by ‘real-time’ communication of the following information:
 Nature of Injury
 Identity of injured personnel
 Status of injured personnel
 Other damages
 Corrective actions taken
Following this communication, a written report shall be submitted within the same
work day or if impracticable, immediately within the next day. Minor injuries shall be
reported to the CLIENT Safety Adviser within 24 hours with inclusive written report. A
final investigation report shall be submitted within 3 days to the CLIENT Safety
Adviser
Subsequent Notification for Major Incidents

In the event of any major incident, the contractor shall immediately report this by real-
time communication to the CLIENT Project Representative and Safety Advisor. A
written report shall be submitted within the same work day or if impracticable,
immediately within the next day, but in no case shall be more than 24 hours after the
incident. The report shall contain the following information:


Revision Date :
 Nature of Incident
 Identification of affected personnel and assets
 Status of incident
 Other minor damages
 Corrective actions taken
Minor incidents shall be reported to the CLIENT Safety Adviser within 24 hours with
inclusive written report. A final investigation report shall be submitted within 3 days to
the CLIENT Safety Advisor.
Restoration of Operation
The ERM shall ensure that the following took place before he announces ‘All Clear’
signal.
 The Area clean up shall be performed after the approval of the investigation team
 All operations equipment’s and portable power tools used shall be re-started (if it
was shut down/switch off during the emergency).
 All the communication equipment are tested and in operable condition.
 The Emergency Response Manager shall ensure that the facility is safe to enter
before he announces the “All Clear Signal”.
 All personnel shall proceed to their work locations as soon as the “All Clear Signal”
is announced by the Emergency Response Manager.
2.9.16 Revise the Plan

A committee shall convene upon initiation of either the company or contractor safety
representative, to analyse and form to revise any current emergency response plan.
The committee shall be composed of no less than the ERM, ERC, CLIENT Safety
Advisor and one representative from HSE Dept of the Client The revision shall be
particular to the ERP for a project site location, where due to the results of planned
activity, an incident or any conducted drill, a deficit has been found which presents
enough risk for an emergency response to fail and negate its purpose. The results to
which revision of the emergency response plan will be subjected, shall be facilitated
by the contractor’s HSE Department and published to all concerned project personnel,
copy furnished to the Client Company Representative, LPD, Client Safety Advisor,
contractor Project Manager, and contractor Safety Manager.
2.9.17 Training and Drills
Drill and Exercise Schedule

ICOM shall endeavour to conduct one announced and one unannounced emergency
drill on a semi-annual period. The exact date schedule of these drill shall be submitted
to CLIENT Safety Advisor for review and conformance, will shall include the type of
drill, drill scenario, current personnel involved, and Client participation. These drills


Revision Date :
shall involve the use of the Emergency Response Teams and the emergency officers
designated in the emergency organization chart. Emergency drill schedules shall be
well planned, coordinated and documented.
Established drill schedules shall also be aimed to train the Emergency Response
Team members in the proper response and procedures to be followed in an
emergency situation.
Drill Schedules and Scenarios shall be prepared by Emergency Response
Coordinator under advice of the Client’s Safety Advisor. (Refer to Appendix F
Emergency Drill Schedule)
Drill Evaluation
Appropriate reviews shall be made as post-drill evaluation and critic in order to
address effectivity for actual emergency incidents and all necessary provisions
additional to existing emergency response systems. The Post-Drill evaluation is aimed
to check the validity of the emergency response plan and procedures based on the
drills conducted.
The post-drill evaluation and critic meeting shall commence upon submission of the
post-drill report, which is to be submitted by the ERC. The ERC shall facilitate the
interdisciplinary team of evaluators, which shall minimum include the CLIENT Safety
advisor, the ERM, the ERC and ERT group leaders (Refer Appendix G Emergency
Event Drill Planning)
Drill Report
A Drill Evaluation Report shall be submitted to project management, which shall
include the following:
 Evaluation and update of the objectives of the Emergency Plan (How effective was
the ERP in meeting its objective.)
 Evaluation of the scope of the plan (Did the scope of the plan effectively include all
the necessary operations of the project.)
 Evaluation of the staff emergency preparedness training (inventory of emergency
preparedness training conducted)
 Evaluation of performance of the plan (How successful was the operations in
meeting the emergency preparedness related performance based on the base-line
set by the Client’s HSE SMS program.)
 Evaluation of the effectiveness of the plan (How effective was the plan in preparing
the operations for internal and external disasters.)
 Conclusions and Recommendations.
 Changes and revisions if any will be incorporated in the ERP.
2.9.18 Drill Scenario Sample


Revision Date :
Prior to an Emergency Drill, an emergency drill scenario shall be submitted to the

Client for review and confirmation. Below is a sample narrative of this scenario for
reference:
A worker will be assumed to have fallen down to the ground and complain of severe
pain in his legs and back, numbness in some parts of his body and that he cannot
move his legs. The scenario will depict a typical accident caused by negligence of
safety precautions when working near equipment such as cranes, forklifts and
loaders.
A witness shall immediate call the attention of the nearest Supervisor and Safety
Officer and report the incident. The Safety Officer will get details of the incident and
immediately proceed to the nearest operations office to call site office and coordinate
emergency medical response. The supervisor will stay with the victim, and together
with the safety officer, will help stabilize the condition of the victim and continue to
assess his situation.
The ambulance arrives on the incident scene. The time it takes from the moment the
victim has fallen down to the time the ambulance arrives must be recorded. A nurse
comes out of the ambulance and is met by the Safety Officer who briefs him of the
incident. The Nurse immediate assesses the condition of the victim and applies First
Aid. The victim is then carried by stretcher to the ambulance. The ambulance leaves
the incident scene and proceeds to the site office.
2.9.19 Remote Area Rescue

At the beginning of the drill, a pair of Rescues’ (previously designated site personnel)
is to be instructed to go to a Remote Site Area to begin operations activity. This
Project Area description shall be noted and recorded in order to verify the deviation
made which resulted in the Rescues’ being lost. In order to ensure no actual lost
personnel is at hand, a fully charged well capable communication unit (cell phone or
two-way radio) and a route map indicating the Lost Area shall be issued to the
personnel going to this remote site.
Contact numbers of the Rescuers, i.e., CLIENT Safety Coordinators, ICOM Project
Superintendent and ICOM Safety Manager/Superintendent/Supervisor, etc. shall be
ensured given to these personnel.
The Rescues’ will then be given about 30 to 60 minutes head start to go out into the
designated Lost Area. The Rescues’ shall then proceed to the Lost Area instead of the
Field Area. After arrival to the Lost Area, they will contact both ICOM Project
Superintendent and ICOM Safety Supervisor to report that they are missing and/or
stranded.
The details of the Rescues’ report shall be recorded. Other information shall be
inquired from the Rescues’, i.e. their names, badge number, vehicle description, initial
time of travel, the route references they initially took, the supplies they have with them,
and others.


Revision Date :
ICOM Safety Supervisor will then contact the Client’s Safety Advisor to report the
incident and both will join together to organize a Rescue team, and proceed to
simulate and perform the rescue operation together with the Project Superintendent.
The ambulance arrives on the incident scene, a well capable rescue vehicle with
emergency first aid capabilities will be made to proceed to the Lost Area, which may
be followed by another group involved to observed and document the drill.
When the Rescues’ are located and found, a convoy shall be made going back to the
site office. Once they reach the site office, the site nurse shall perform a quick
assessment of the physical conditions of the Rescues’.
Finally, a technical briefing shall be conducted by the project engineer and the Client
Safety Specialist to recap the drill, stressing on the lessons learned for the drill.
2.10 TRAINING & COMPETENT PERSONS
2.10.1 General
A copy of the ‘DESIGNATED COMPETENT PERSON ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
FORM’ is given in the attachments section of this manual. This form is to be filled up
and signed by ICOM’s Project Manager for submission to the Client’s Safety
Department.
To ensure safety and prevent any cause of accident in job execution,
competent/skilled persons shall be designated for the following activities, as may be
applicable to ICOM’s contract scope of work:
 Scaffolding and fall protection
 Demolition
 Cartridge Operated Tools
 Electrical & Instrumentation (including temporary electrical installations)
 Fire Protection Equipment
 Gas Regulators
 Fall Protection Equipment and systems
 Radiography systems
 Excavation/shoring
 Lifting and Erection
 Welding and Cutting
 Abrasive Blasting and painting
2.10.2 Qualification and Training

A competent person is one who is knowledgeable and qualified by their training and
experienced to perform specialized jobs properly and safely.
They shall undergo competitive skills training and shall include indoctrination of this
SAFETY MANUAL applicable to their job description. Particular attention shall be


Revision Date :
given to induction of competent persons with all HIPs applicable to their particular job
tasks.
A “Designated Competent Person Acknowledgement Form” shall be submitted as
discussed in the previous section of this manual, as required and to be filled-up and
signed by ICOM’s Project Manager for submission to the client.
A competency card will be issued to all designated Competent/Skilled Personnel for
easy identification in the field. A copy of the list of all ‘Competent Persons’ shall be
kept by the Project Manager and shall be made available upon request by CLIENT.
It shall be the duty of Competent Persons to conduct monthly safety inspection for the
area of his specialty to which he has been nominated as competent person, He shall
signify his inspection with color coding system.
2.10.3 Competent Persons Safety Training

Safety Training Program is an integral part of the Company’s Safety Policy, hence,
mandatory at the Project. These training events shall be held throughout the
operations period based on needs, relevant requirements or worksite conditions,
primarily to enhance safety awareness of every employee in the project.
Each training event shall be documented. Periodic Training on Emergency
Evacuation, Fire Drills and Emergency Response Procedures shall be conducted in
conjunction with Plant Operations drill schedules or as per coordination with the
Client.
2.10.4 Specific on Job Safety Training

The listed safety training courses shall be made an integral part of the overall training
program of ICOM:
1. Rigging Safety
2. Crane Works and Lifting Operations
3. Hazard on Chemical / Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
4. Fire Prevention / Fire Protection
5. Scaffolding Safety
6. Safety Tag-out / Lockout Procedure
7. Fall Protection
8. Hearing Conservation
9. First Aid
10. Emergency Procedure
11. Forklift Safety
12. Personnel Lift Operation
13. Pre-Job Safety Instruction


Revision Date :
14. Fire Extinguisher Training

15. Respiratory Protection Training
16. Confined Space Entries, etc.
17. Electrical Safety
18. Proper Use of PPE
19. Driving Safety
2.10.5 Employee Safety Induction
General Safety Induction Checklist-Agreement

Below are to be observed inside the project operations or facilities’ worksite:
General Safety
1. Do not touch or operate any facilities without permission, especially valves, control
levers and switches.
2. Do not rest, or wander under pipe rack or near vessels, especially those that are
under operations, installation or repair.
3. Do not run in the worksite and never engage in horse-play in the work area.
4. Do not bring any lighter or match into the plant, strictly follow smoking regulations.
5. Do not eat any food at jobsite. Foods can be eaten / taken at the tables of (ICOM
site mess hall) temporary facilities.
6. Do not work on any electrical equipment or installation of the project without work
permit. Confirm first if electrical lockout, tagout and blockade have been done.
7. Do not enter existing manholes, pits, vessels and other confined spaces before
oxygen and gas detection has been done.
8. Listen carefully to instructions from your foreman or supervisor. If you do not
understand or if the instruction in not clear, clarify your task with your superior
before commencing work.
9. Adhere to all safety signs, posters or hazards information posted or issued on the
worksite.
10. Observe sanitary regulations & defecate/urinate only in designated toilet facilities.
11. Take note that deliberate unsafe acts will be grounds for immediate Client
withdrawal of your ID with possible disciplinary actions.
12. Do not use damaged or defective tools and equipment. Have it checked by your
supervisor for possible repair or replacement.
13. Do not touch any chemical which you are not authorized to handle. Report spilled
chemicals to your supervisor.
14. Do not go near excavations, pits and hazardous areas not within your task area.
15. Do not use cellular phones inside the plant.


Revision Date :
16. Maintain good housekeeping and clean your area after your work.
Illness, Accidents & Emergencies

1. If you feel sick, inform your Foreman, who will endorse you to the project Doctor or
Nurse. The Medical staff will examine your condition and determine if you have to
be excused from your current task and take rest if necessary.
2. Report to your Foreman, Supervisor or any project officer any accidents, injuries or
fire that you or your co-worker may experience.
3. When an accident or incident causing damage happens, do not remove equipment
or tools, leave as they are until investigation has been done by the concerned
department, except on injuries which should be immediate administered with first
aid.
4. During emergency cases or abnormal incidents inside the Project Operations site,
follow strictly the Emergency Evacuation Procedure organized by project
authorities.
5. When you experience someone being electrocuted, do not touch the person. Turn
off the switch to de-energize the system.
Personal Protective Equipment

1. Everyone in the worksite should wear safety helmet, safety shoes and safety
glasses properly.
2. Workers should wear other safety gears instructed by the supervisor as may be
necessary for your work.
3. Proper respiratory equipment shall be required when working in confined spaces
or in areas where oxygen is limited.
4. Wear only safety footwear that is approved and in good condition. Your safety
footwear should be suitable for your job task. Wearing short pants or removal of
upper shirts/trousers is not allowed at work site.
5. Wear clothing that is suitable for both the weather and your work. Torn or loose
clothing and shirt tails worn outside trousers are prohibited. You are required to
work fully clothed.
Security Regulations
1. Don’t enter into road marked “CLOSED” with your Vehicle without plant
permission.
2. Do not enter restricted areas and facilities without permission. Limit your
movement only to areas within your job task.
3. Abide by all traffic signs and instructions, speed limit is 25 Km/Hr in all areas or as
regulated by project authorities.
4. Always pass at the right side of the road, follow the right lane traffic flow.


Revision Date :
5. Possession or use of any alcohol, mind altering drugs or other controlled

substance is strictly prohibited and can be a cause for immediate dismissal.
6. Gambling, fighting, horseplay or carrying firearms or other weapons within the
worksite or in areas under company jurisdiction is strictly prohibited and can be a
cause for dismissal.
7. Do not destroy any company property.
8. Intentional damage to company property will be grounds for termination.
9. Gasoline refuelling is not allowed inside the Live Plant.
Equipment and Machinery

1. Do not leave the engine of your truck, excavator, pay loader, dump truck, water
truck, and other engine operated equipment without stopping the engine.
2. Stop the engine of the equipment or machinery you are operating if you will leave
it.
3. Do not go under or within the reach of the crane boom and load in operation.
4. Do not repair or adjust any machinery while it is running or still in operation.
5. Never oil or clean moving parts of machinery while the machine is energized or
connected to its power source.
6. Never work under vehicles or equipment supported by jacks or hoists without
protective blocking and safety stand.
7. Do not operate any heavy equipment or specialized machinery if you are not
certified by Client.
8. Do not overload the capacity of any machinery you will operate.
9. Equipment and tools should be used only for their designed function. They should
not be substituted for other purposes which may damage them.
10. Do not take off the guards and shields of machinery. They are specifically
designed to protect you.
Working on High Places

1. Wear Full body harness (Fall Restraints) when working at heights exceeding 6 feet
(1.8 meters) which is already a dangerous zone;
2. If you will be working in an elevated area higher than 1.8 m, be careful and take all
necessary precautions to prevent your fall.
3. Wear only lanyards to have a length which shall be limited to provide a fall of no
greater than 1.82 meters (6 feet) except in case of mechanical fall arresting
devices which have been reviewed and approved by the Client. (Lanyards should
have a breaking strength of 2,450 kilograms = 5400 pounds).
4. Ensure that ladders and scaffoldings are in good working condition. Ladders
should be set firmly and the footing should be secured in place.


Revision Date :
5. Do not use ladders which are made of metal or other electrically conductive
material near electrical equipment, substations and power lines.
All personnel shall signify their commitment and conformance via signature that they
have understood and hereby conform to the provisions stated in this checklist and
acknowledge it to be part of their Safety Induction Course.
2.11 TRAFFIC PLAN
2.11.1 Operations Traffic Control Plan

This Plan consists of furnishing and installing traffic and security control devices and
equipment for the control of pedestrian and vehicular traffic through areas of
operations work. This also sets forth the procedures for establishing effective
measures of traffic control for personnel safety and convenience and for the security
required by normal operations. Refer to the supplemental specifications of each
project for specific project requirements. The Client’s standard on “Street and Road
Closure and Excavations, Reinstatement and Traffic Controls” shall govern all the
requirements in operations traffic control of site project.
Traffic incidents are known to be among the most frequent incidents in the kingdom,
hence a Traffic Safety Plan is necessary to help ensure the necessary preventive and
protective measures will be taken to minimize if not eliminate such incidents.
Even when all traffic-control measures are taken, a confused or distracted driver can
crash through a work site, or a daydreaming worker can step into the path of a
speeding vehicle. Some drivers take reckless chances by running stop signs or
changing lanes without signalling.
These unsafe acts jeopardize all, the driver, the public and even other drivers who
may lose control of their vehicle while attempting to avoid a collision. We must all
prepare for the unexpected on the road, both during and after work hours. When
worksite involves moving traffic, safety awareness should be at its peak, to protect
both the public and the crew. Following safety guidelines are herewith given:
2.11.2 Prescription
 Before every crossroad, in each side, shall be present with road signs of Stop
Signs, Yield, Directional Indicators, and one-way, two-way traffic,
 At each gate site shall be present the following road signs of Speed Limit, Office
direction Indicator, and Site direction Indicator.
Note: the road sign will be update as necessary with the supervision of the Client.
Example of signs:
30

Revision Date :
STOP TURN RIGHT SPEED LIMIT NO ENTRY
NO U-TURN NO OVERTAKING CLOSED TO CLOSED TO

TRUCKS PEDESTRIANS
Planning
All traffic control must be carefully planned and approved by governing authorities
before work begins. The person responsible for this planning should drive through the
traffic pattern before any work starts to ensure that there will be no driver confusion.
Signage
Standard devices, Client and other kingdom traffic regulations should be followed for
proper signage and barricading. Place initial warning signs at appropriate advanced
distances to facilitate effective responses and precautions. All signs and related
equipment should be in good condition and highly visible. In special cases, designated
traffic safety officers may be assigned to aid signage and directional instructions.
Barricades
Devices that guide traffic, such as cones, barrels, etc., should be highly visible and
spaced relatively close together so that drivers will not deviate from an assigned traffic
flow. All such barriers should be made of material that will cause little or no damage if
a vehicle strikes it.
Safety Gear
All employees should wear high-visibility orange, green or day glow vests. For night
work, the vest should have light-reflective strips.
Flaggers
Roadside operations sites must have at least one individual assigned to traffic control.
A highly visible sign paddle should be used during daylight hours. It should be
octagonal in shape, at least 18 inches across, and have letters at least six inches high
that say STOP on one side and SLOW on the present, a sign alerting drivers must be
placed a minimum of 500 feet from the beginning of the detour.
All operations vehicles should be equipped with backing alarms, two-way radios and
SLOW-MOVING VEHICLE signs when appropriate. Ideally, they should be painted a
highly visible color, and many jurisdictions also require flashing yellow beacons. All
operators must be qualified and trained to operate the equipment they are using. If a


Revision Date :
vehicle will be parked alongside the road, orange safety cones should be placed
around it.
2.12 SPECIAL ROAD & TRAFFIC CONDITIONS

All traffic control must be carefully planned and must be approved by the Client before
work begins. The person responsible for this planning should drive through the traffic
pattern before any work starts to ensure that there will be no driver confusion.
Orientation and training is also a vital part of personnel management where
knowledge of the hazards associated with special road and traffic conditions are
communicated. In the Kingdom, the most common special road hazards are Fog,
Camel crossing, dust/ sand storm and night driving.
All drivers shall obey Client Driving Regulations inside the plant and on Client
controlled areas. All drivers should have valid SAG Drivers License. Any vehicle in
operation and moving, the driver and passengers should fasten their seat belts. If the
vehicle stops and fails to start, re-ignition should not be attempted further without
knowing the cause why the engine is not starting. Caution should be known on the
presence of explosive gas vapour, if so, all personnel should proceed to the nearest
safe area and report the incident immediately by dialling the emergency number.
2.12.1 Fog Precautions

All personnel must be reminded during the onset of winter or cold season, foggy
weather occurs very frequently. Driving in heavy fog is like driving with a blindfold on,
and it is during these times when the most dangerous driving hazard exists. Consider
the following useful information when driving in Fog.
 Take particular care when driving in fog, especially at night. Fog can be patchy,
going from a light mist to a thick blanket in an instant.
 As you enter fog, check your mirrors and slow down. Use your foot brake lightly so
that your lights warn following drivers.
 Use dipped headlights and fog lights if visibility is reduced so you can be seen. But
remember it's an offence to use high-intensity rear fog lights in clear conditions.
 Keep an eye on your speedometer because studies show that some drivers
acclimate themselves to foggy conditions and unconsciously increase their speed
over time. If you can see less than 12 meters (40 feet) ahead, your speed needs to
be reduced to less than 20mph.
 Use your windscreen wipers and demisters.
 Beware of other drivers who are not using their headlights.
 If you park your car on a main road, try and get your vehicle completely off the
road. You could be rear-ended!
2.12.2 Camel Population

Please be reminded also to be extremely cautious about the presence of stray camels
on the roads of the kingdom, especially during night time and the cold season. Drive
carefully and have a safe travel at all times.


Revision Date :
2.12.3 Night Work & Night Driving

If work is done at night, the entire site must be illuminated. Increase the warning
distance of signs as it gets darker, in areas of fast-moving traffic. Flaggers should
have orange-cone flashlights and barricades should be equipped with flashing lights.
Any excavations or utility accesses should be taped off and barricaded with flashing
warning lights. To prepare personnel for night driving, here are some tips:
 Roadways exposed to sandstorm and high winds are special hazards, hence extra
care should be taken such as slower speed, use of headlights even during daytime,
use of windshield wipers, etc.
 It is vital nowadays to have emergency communication devices such as cell phones
and two-way radios.
 Have your eyes checked. It may not be apparent but most people haven’t had
consultation with an eye care professional for an exam in over a year; one quick
visit could diagnose any problems and point you in a healthier direction. People with
astigmatism were significantly more likely to report being disturbed by glare or light
sensitivity.
 Prepare your vehicle for night driving. Clean headlights, taillights, signal lights and
windows (both inside and out) once a week.
 When in doubt, turn your headlights on. Whether it's dusk or a dreary day, lights
help you to see better and make you easier seen.
 When following another vehicle, keep your headlights switched on low beam, so
you don't blind the driver in front of you. In the instance that a fellow driver doesn't
offer the same courtesy, and you're a victim of glare, keep your eye on the right
edge of the road and use it as a steering guide.
 Make frequent stops for snacks and stretches. Movement and light food will help
ward off tiredness.
Pay careful attention to your driving even as the sun goes down. Twilight is one of the
most difficult times to be on the road since driver's eyes are constantly changing to
adapt to the growing darkness.
Night Work
If work is done at night, the entire site must be illuminated. Increase the warning
distance of signs as it gets darker, in areas of fast-moving traffic. Flagman should
have orange-cone flashlights and barricades should be equipped with flashing lights.
Any excavations or utility accesses should be taped off and barricaded with flashing
warning lights.
2.12.4 Training
All company employees and subcontractors involved in the project must receive an
initial safety orientation to the potential hazards of the project, including traffic safety.
Changes or unusual conditions should be communicated to workers immediately.
Above all, everyone should be reminded to keep their brain turned on and stay alert
and not to get hurt.


Revision Date :
All ICOM employees and subcontractors involved in the project must receive an initial
safety orientation to the potential hazards of the project, including traffic safety.
Changes or unusual conditions should be communicated to workers immediately.
2.12.5 Traffic Violations

All driving personnel involved in the project must receive an orientation of the following
traffic violations:
Penalty Points
II. Moving Traffic Violations
* 14
Reckless driving (combination of moving violations)
Speeding: Exceeding speed limit by
3
a) Less than 10 kph *10
b) 10 to 20 kph *12
c) 21 to 30 kph
d) Over 30 kph
*12
Driving on the wrong side of a divided roadway
8
Passing in a “No Passing” zone
10
Underage dependent driving a motor vehicle
8
Failure to obey a traffic signal or stop sign
8
Not using seat belts (drivers or passengers)
5
More than 3 people in front seat (also requires seat belt violation)
8
Passengers in back of open pickup truck
6
Use of mobile phone under conditions prohibited in GI
6
Failure to yield to pedestrians at a crosswalk or intersection
6
Driving with an unsecured load or without panels in place
6
Following too closely (tailgating)
4
Turning or switching lanes without signalling
8
Turning from the wrong lane
6
Failure to yield the right-of-way
14
Driving under influence of medications or intoxicants*
8
Riding a motorcycle without a helmet
8
Driving during night time without headlights
10
Failure to stop when directed by Industrial Security*
III. Parking Offenses
8
Parking in an emergency route or emergency vehicle space
6
Parking in a posted Handicapped Parking area without authorization
3
Parking on the wrong side of the street (against the traffic flow)
2
Parking in an unauthorized space or area
IV. Other Offenses


Revision Date :
6
Misuse of company vehicles (including violations of GI 710.010)
2.12.6 Saudi Arabia Traffic Violations

Major Violation - High
 Driving the vehicles before getting a driving license.
 Driving the vehicle without license plates (with impoundment of the vehicle until the
removal of the violation).
 Driving the vehicle without a rear license plate (with impoundment of the vehicle
until the removal of the violation).
 To use different license plates other than those belong to the vehicle (with
impoundment of the vehicle until the removal of the violation).
 To use illegal license plates (with impoundment of the vehicle until the removal of
the violation).
 To install equipment in the vehicle, similar to equipment of official vehicles and
emergency vehicles (with impoundment of the vehicle until the removal of the
violation).
 To obliterate or attempt to obliterate the special features that define the vehicles
(with impoundment of the vehicle until the removal of the violation).
 Driving the vehicle under the influence of intoxicant or medical narcotic drugs that
he had been warned of its narcotic influence,
 To cross the traffic light at the red light.
 To drive the vehicle in opposite direction of the traffic flow.
 To drive elusively in high speed between vehicles on public roads.
 To exceed the speed limit by more than twenty-five kilometers per hour.
 To overtake in areas where overtaking is prohibited such as corners and the
highlands.
 To park on railways.
 Not covering or proper wrapping of loads.
 To carry out works on public roads prior to coordination with the competent
department.
 No full stops at (Stop) sing.
 Not giving priority through full stopping at (priority ahead) in the case of the
passage of vehicles on the road which has been given the priority.
 Not giving priority to vehicles coming from the right side at the intersection of equal
priorities at the same time, and when there is no priority sign.
 Not giving priority to vehicles on the main road in the absence of priority sign.


Revision Date :
 Non-compliance with the hand signals of a traffic policeman when organizing the
traffic, and not giving his signals the priority over the traffic lights.
 Not giving the priority to vehicles inside the roundabout in the absence of traffic
lights or a traffic policeman to direct the traffic flow.
 Driving a vehicle without the necessary equipment such as brakes, lights, or their
equivalent, putting public safety at risk (with impoundment of the vehicle until the
removal of the violation).
 Not using lights needed when driving or in bad weather conditions where visibility
is not clear.
 Driving the vehicle inside a tunnel without lighting its lights.
Major Violation - Moderate

 To modify the vehicle or addition of parts to its body without taking the legal
procedures to make such modifications (with the impoundment of the vehicle until
the removal of the violation).
 To drive public works, industrial, agricultural or operations vehicles on public
roads before taking the necessary actions to avoid damaging the roads, we well as
mounting of reflectors on both rear sides of the vehicle ( with the impoundment of
the vehicle until the removal of the violation).
 Driving a vehicle that causes pollution to the environment on public roads (with the
impoundment of the vehicle until the removal of the violation).
 To exceed the speed limit by not more than twenty-five kilometers per hour.
 To ruin and damage road signs, marks, reflectors and boards of traffic.
 Non-stop at checkpoints or for security patrols in the presence of stop signal or
sign to stop.
 Non-compliance with traffic regulations at intersections.
 Using the vehicle for the purpose other than the registered purpose.
 To transport a number of passengers more than the number specified in the
registration license.
 To load passengers in areas not specified for them in the vehicle.
 To refuse showing the vehicle of the driving legal document to the authorized
parties.
 Non-compliance with road lanes.
 Leaving objects or things on public roads, hence, putting public safety at risk.
 Not giving the priority to official convoys or to emergency vehicles.
 Overtaking school buses while stopping for loading and unloading.
 Driving with an expired driving license.


Revision Date :
Minor Violation - Moderate

 Non-availability of the statutory requirements of the trailer.
 Failure to take the periodical vehicles technical inspection test.
 To violate the rules for using lights when meeting other vehicles.
 Not taking the necessary precautions when stopping the vehicles in emergency
cases.
 Installation of obstacles inside the vehicle which obstruct the driving vision.
 Not having a driving license.
 Not having driving permit while driving.
 Leaving the vehicle on a slippery road without taking the necessary precautions.
 In violation of road traffic regulations.
 Failure to maintain the vehicle’s license plates.
 Failure to complete the procedures for transferring the vehicle’s ownership.
 Failure to complete the procedures for amending the vehicle’s purpose use.
 Non-use of Seatbelts.
 Unbuckling of safety seat belts.
 Non-use of children safety seats.
 Non-observance of priority to pass rules.
 Not exporting of vehicles meant for export within the given period.
 Using of mobile phone by hand while driving.
 Misuse of the vehicle horn.
 Not wearing a helmet when driving a motorcycle.
 Driving the vehicle in undedicated lanes.
 Failure of animals’ owners to move their animals away from the roads.
Minor Violation - Low

 To equip the vehicle with unauthorized devices or to place indecent slogans or
posters that violates the public morals.
 To leave the vehicle on public roads in areas not allocated for such vehicle with a
necessity.
 Throwing of any objects outside the vehicle during driving.
 To drive the vehicle without a front license plate.
 Passengers to get out/in the vehicle while moving.


Revision Date :
 Pedestrians crossing the road from places other than places designated for their
passage.
 Pedestrians’ non-compliance with their directive sings.
 To drive slowly which impede the traffic flow.
 Parking in places not intended for parking.
 To park in people of special needs parking spaces if not allowed to do so.
 Not paying attention to the road while driving the vehicle.
 The lack of an insurance policy.
2.13 INJURY AND DAMAGE REPORTING

2.13.1 The Investigation
Accidents, whether they result in injury, damage, disease or loss, need to be
controlled. Similarly those that they have no end result - i.e. the near misses should
be considered for control actions.
To enable an accident control system to be developed, it is necessary that all
accidents are reported; investigated and analyzed, so that remedial action can be
decided and plans can be drawn to prevent a recurrence. The most important
question to be asked in any accident investigation is; “what action has been taken to
prevent a recurrence.”
Successful accident prevention requires a minimum of four fundamental activities:
a. A study of all working areas to detect and eliminate or control physical or
environmental hazards which contribute to accidents.
b. A study of all operating methods and practices
c. Education, instruction, training and other Loss Prevention activity to minimize
human factors which contribute to accidents.
d. For cause analysis, a thorough investigation of every accident which resulted to a
disabling injury in order to determine contributing circumstances. Accidents that do
not result in personal injury (so called “near accident or near misses”) are warning.
They should not be ignored.
Purpose
An investigation must be for fact finding, not fault finding, otherwise, they may do
more harm than good. The principal purposes of an accident investigation are:
 To learn accident causes so that similar accident may be prevented by
mechanical improvement, better supervisor or employee training.
 To determine the changes or deviation that produced an “error” that in turn,
result in an accident (system safety analysis)
 To publicize the particular hazard among employees and their supervisor and
to direct attention to accident prevention in general.
 To determine facts bearing on legal liability.

Revision Date :
Case to be investigated
All accidents/incidents are to be investigated. A near-miss or a minor injury, which
may or may not have a few minutes lost time and if safety violation is a possible
cause, demands study. Incident/accident investigation shall comply with Client
standards on incident investigation.
Each investigation shall be started as soon as possible. The chief value of such an
investigation lies in uncovering contributing causes.
Who Conducts the Investigation

A qualified Safety Investigator shall be responsible for the investigation of the
accident/incident. Because of his expertise and wider spectrum of knowledge in
safety, he will be able to carry out the task well. But he shall take help from the
supervisor and involve him fully in the whole process of the Investigation. And
before it, front line supervisor shall investigate the accident immediately and report
to the Safety Department.
The Process
For good results, ICOM management has to;
 Formulate detailed steps for investigation of accidents.
 The procedure should immediately start the investigation, once the accident is
reported.
 Make sure that the steps and procedures are made known to all concerned.
Coverage of Investigation
An investigation of accident shall cover the following information:
 The injury
o its nature, part of body, permanent or temporary disablement etc. This
information can be obtained from first aider or the attending Doctor.
 How the accident took place
o Details of the sequence of events that led to accidents, machinery,
equipment involved, what exactly the man was doing at that time, the
source of accident, etc.
 The unsafe conditions or unsafe acts: that contributed to the accident
directly or indirectly. These may include actions (or failure to take actions) by
other workers and the supervisor.
 Communications: relevant to the accident like instructions, messages and
standing orders and their understanding by the employees involved, violation of
company norms or standing order etc.


Revision Date :
 The factor and circumstances that contributed to the unsafe

acts/conditions: This should include the people, the equipment and the
conditions of work.
 Step to be taken to prevent similar accident in future: The investigation
report shall clearly spell out the corrective actions required and person
responsible for same.
 A schedule for actions: A time schedule of actions shall be a part of report.
These actions shall be discussed to the concerned personnel prior to its
scheduled implementation.
2.13.2 The Four Link Chain.

All work supervisors shall be advised to analyze their site activities by using the
‘Four-Link Chain’ method. As explained below, work supervisors are to take
corrective measures to check unsafe acts and conditions before incidents can
occur. In most cases of industrial injury, it is always possible to establish the four-
link chain of events in the following manner:
FAULT UNSAFE ACCIDENT / INJURY

OF ACT / INCIDENT
PERSON CONDITION
 The best plan to prevent accident is to tackle the first two links of chain. Unsafe
acts and conditions happen out of neglect.
 Unsafe acts and unsafe conditions are caused, hence they are faults of people.
 Not all unsafe acts and conditions cause accidents neither does every incident
result in an injury.
 Whether anyone is injured or not, these are dangerous occurrences and
causes must be removed to prevent any chances of accident/injury.
2.13.3 Guidelines and Action Plan for Useful Investigation
1. Start investigation as soon as possible. The more time in delaying the

investigation, the more likely the evidences are lost and facts inaccurate.
2. Observe and record all physical evidence.
3. Examine as many witnesses as possible. Examine each witness separately
and patiently. Made an effort to reconstruct the events.
4. Collect as much information as possible about the extent of machines,
equipment and man involvements.
5. Make efforts to identify all the unsafe acts and conditions that led to the
accident / incident.
6. The investigator has to look for indirect causes, especially in the following
areas:


Revision Date :
a) Failure of components
b) Faulty tools
c) Poor maintenance
d) Incorrect work method
e) Inadequate work methods
f) Errors on the part of supervisor
g) Poor housekeeping and disorderly arrangement in work place
h) Specific training need; Ignored
i) Non observance of rules / operating instructions or lack of instructions
j) Non-use or improper use of safety equipment and reasons for it
k) Psychological factors
l) Responsible, organization factor
7. It never pays to overlook any suggestion / ideas put forth.
8. Recommendation to prevent recurrence of the accident must be specified and
cleared. A time bound action plan shall be prepared at the end.
9. The recommendations shall be brought to the notice of all concerned in writing.
10. The findings and recommendations will be discussed in meetings.
The records of all accidents and investigation shall be recorded and copy of which
shall be submitted to Client Safety Advisor.
2.13.4 Reporting
All injuries, including damage to equipment and near miss incidents, must be reported.
A ‘First Information Accident Report’ shall be done to initiate immediate corrective
action.
 In the event of minor injuries, report to your Supervisor. Do not leave your work
area without advising your immediate supervisor.
 Once the supervisor is informed, report to the medical first aid room for treatment.
 The people involved in a serious accident or witness to a fellow employee getting
hurt should not attempt to move the injured person, unless further injury can occur
due to the situation at hand.
Preventing Further Injury

If the investigation is being made almost simultaneously right after the incident, the
following steps should be followed in order to prevent further injury:
 All witnesses and all those involved should remain calm
 An immediate initiative should be made to call for help; If the supervisor is nearby,
the supervisor should be the one to designate the person who will contact for help
 The injured person should not be left alone as much as possible


Revision Date :
 If any witness or any involved person is certified and knows how to administer first
aid, he should assist the injured as much as necessary until a medical response
team arrives
Note: After the injured is removed by the medical team, secure the area and do not
move or remove anything. If necessary, barricade or rope off the area. Keep out of the
accident location until notice is given that it is safe to return.
2.13.5 Plan
ICOM shall be responsible for reporting accidents of its employees and its lower tier
employees to Client and in some cases to the Saudi Arab Government as required.
ICOM site management shall ensure that an immediate report is made to the
company representative in the case of all:
 Fatal Injuries
 Injuries requiring medical attention which result in lost time
 Damage over SR. 10,000 to contractor’s plant or equipment
 Damage, in any amount, to the Client’s equipment or property
 Fires
 Damage & near misses to cranes and heavy equipment
For accident involving contractor employees, fatalities, serious injury to two or more
contractor employees, or damage to the Client equipment or property, a preliminary
written report will be submitted within 24 Hours followed by a detailed written report
submitted within 3 days to the company Representative. In addition, the Client may
convene an Engineering review or investigation committee.
ICOM will maintain, in a format approved by the company Representative, a current
record showing all:
 Work Injuries
 Fires
 Incidents of property damage over SR 10,000/- Motor vehicle Accidents
 Incident involving damage to Client equipment and property
 Damage, near misses and other statistics so required by the Client.
The record shall be available for inspection at all times and shall be submitted to the
Client on request. A final written report shall be prepared and submitted to the
company.
In addition to the report required above, a record of all injuries and damages in a form
approved by the Company shall be maintained at the site safety office.
A copy of this record shall be sent to the proponent department and to the
Contractor’s project management. Monthly summary shall be submitted separately as
required in addition to the individual report.


Revision Date :
2.13.6 Near-Miss Reporting

ICOM operations shall strive to report and investigate Near-Miss incidents in the
objective of identifying unsafe condition and preventing future serious incidents. A
“near-miss” is an event that signals a system weakness that if not remedied could lead
to significant consequences in the future. As such, a near-miss is also an opportunity
to improve system structure and stability, and an opportunity to reduce risk exposure
to potential catastrophe, and prevention of recurrence of the same incident.
The Client guidelines for reporting a near-miss, including the prescribed report form,
shall be used in reporting near-miss incidents for the entire project execution.
Framework for a near miss reporting

 Provide timely feedback to the report.
 Have a procedure for de-identifying the information as soon as the essential
elements have been collected.
 Be managed by trained individuals using procedures and data structures
compatible with reporting, prioritization, and an analysis of adverse events.
 Collect and analyze information on the recovery process that prevented the near
miss from becoming an adverse event.
 Result in corrective actions that reduce the potential for further near miss errors
and corresponding adverse events.
2.13.7 Data for Near-Miss Record

 The reporter’s narrative.
 Who was involved?
 What happened/type of adverse event avoided?
 Where did the near miss occur?
 When did the events occur?
 Need for urgent action.
 Likelihood of near miss (or adverse event avoided?).
 Severity of outcome avoided.
 The causes of the potential adverse event.
 The recovery procedures.
 Narrative of remedial action.
2.14 SAFETY COMMITTEE & SAFETY MEETINGS
2.14.1 Objective and Functions


Revision Date :
The Site Safety Committee is organized at the project site and composed of the
project key personnel who will act as members of the Committee for this ad-hoc safety
functions aside from their specific assigned job duties and responsibilities.
The main objective of this Site Safety Committee is to ensure full implementation of
the Safety Manual in order to attain a safe and healthful work environment throughout
the duration of the contract job execution. Its functions mainly includes but not limited
to following:
 Detects and correct unsafe practices
 Administers all the Safety Procedures, Programs and Training as set forth in this
Safety Manual.
 Conducts regular safety inspections
 Conducts Monthly Committee Safety Meeting for review of safety performances
and relevant matters on safety.
2.14.2 Responsibility
The success of this SAFETY MANUAL depends largely on the cooperation of
everyone on the project site. In order to achieve the safety goals, a site safety
committee shall be designated. Responsibilities of the members on the Safety
Committee are as follows:
 The Project Manager is responsible for implementing and enforcing this SAFETY
MANUAL. He shall attend the Safety Operation Committee (SOC) meeting which
is to be held monthly.
 The HSE Officer is responsible for administering and monitoring this procedure
and actively takes part in direct compliance of the same. For the purpose of
complying with this responsibility, and pending consultation and joint agreement
with the Client, the following may be noted:
o It may be ideal to follow a ratio of 1 Safety Officer for every 50 personnel.
However, for relatively small work areas were personnel are concentrated by
numbers, the number of personnel per Safety Officer may be increased.
o In the same manner where critical areas with small number personnel may
need constant safety monitoring, a Safety Officer maybe assigned.
 Front line supervisors are responsible for the execution of their assigned task
within the Safety, Health and Environmental requirements.
 All Employees are responsible for complying with the directives and programs
developed through the activities outlined in this procedure.
 Conducts appropriate Safety, Health and Environmental related meetings and
programs on a regular and frequent basis.
2.14.3 Weekly Safety Inspection by Site Safety Committee

The inspection team shall tour the entire job site and observe the work conditions. The
inspection shall analyze the safety performance of each work area and document


Revision Date :
alleged violations. Each violation shall be charged to the responsible supervisor who
will be held accountable for appropriate corrective action.
Imminent danger situations shall be corrected immediately and the committee shall
attempt to have other violations corrected without causing excessive delay in the
inspection itinerary.
Areas of outstanding safety compliance shall be noted and recommend three Front
Line Supervisors to the HSE Department for commendation on agreed periodical
basis. Out of these three ‘Front Line Supervisors’, the HSE Department will select one
supervisor as recipient of a certificate of safety appreciation and on his
recommendation to two task performers who will also receive safety certificates. All
the findings shall be summarized into a report and shall be included in the regular
Safety Committee Minutes for distribution.
2.14.4 Safety Meetings
Monthly Site Safety Committee Meeting

This meeting shall be chaired by the Project Manager or his authorized representative
and HSE Officer will meet at least once a month.
The agenda shall include but not limited to the following topics:
 Project Safety Goals and Objectives
 Current and anticipated safety requirements.
 Prevailing safety deficiencies and appropriate corrective measures.
 Applicable Safety Training based on the need and stage of the project.
 Safety incentives and recognition.
This meeting shall be chaired by the Contractor Project Manager or his representative,
and shall include the advice and guidance of the Client’s Safety Advisor. The date and
time of the regular meeting shall be determined by the Project Manager.
2.14.5 Weekly Supervisory Staff Meeting

Supervisory staff meeting shall be held on a weekly basis (Date and Time to be
decided by the Field Manager). This meeting shall be conducted by the Field Manager
or his authorized representative and the HSE Officer. This meeting shall encourage
the involvement the task performers in safety task planning and develop personal
commitment & accountability on all work task owner.
The purpose of this meeting is to formally discuss the past week activities and next
week activities related to safety. Safety infringements noted during the week shall be
discussed as well as any special requirements needed for the coming week. The
meeting shall analyze each task for hazards, occupational health and environmental
issues, identifying safe work practices and communicating the information as a team
to reach a consensus on how the work will be performed to ensure a safe, quality and
timely execution of the task.


Revision Date :
2.14.6 Weekly Safety Tool Box Meeting

Tool box meeting conducted by respective work supervisor with their crews, shall be
held on a designated day prior to the commencement of work.
The basic purpose of the tool box meeting shall be to point out the previous week’s
observed unsafe conditions and practices which shall include the following;
a. coming week’s activities;
b. possible unsafe conditions and practices;
c. Associated hazards and the preventive measures to be taken.
In addition to these, a specific safety talk shall be included in connection to job

activities in order to educate the employees and update their knowledge in the field of
safety. HSE Officers shall provide technical assistance to the work supervisors during
those meetings.
Each meeting shall be documented and shall include the list of the names of
attendees and topics covered. These tool box meeting reports shall be kept on file by
the Site Safety Manager and copies shall be distributed to the following:
a. Client’s Safety Advisor
b. Client’s Project Management Representative
c. ICOM’s Project Manager
2.14.7 Pre-Job Safety Instruction Meeting

The Front Line Supervisor shall conduct pre-job safety instruction meeting with his
crew before a certain job is started, preferably at the actual location of the activity.
The basic purpose of this pre-job instruction meeting is to provide information,
instruction and coaching, ensuring the task performers has a thorough understanding
of the hazards, occupational health and environmental issues and safe work process
required to safely execute the task.
2.14.8 Safety Logbook

A hard bound safety log book shall be maintained at the site office and at each
operations site. It shall be the responsibility of the Job Supervisor to check daily
entries and answer the comments entered by the Safety Officer in the Safety
Logbook. Corrective measures, when required, shall be coordinated with the involved
disciplines front line supervisor.
The log book shall be divided into but not limited to the following section:
 Time & Date of Safety Meetings
 For Accident, Observed Hazards and other entries related to Safety:
o Name of observer
o Time and date
o Title and phone number


Revision Date :
o Comments/description of conditions
o Action taken by HSE Officer
2.15 HSE Incentive Program

The primary purpose for this HSE incentive Plan is to provide a vehicle to involve all
project personnel in the safe and healthy execution of the site project activities and
avoid injury or environmental incidents.
The intention of this incentive plan is to provide a positive attitude towards Health,
Safety & the Environment by bringing about rewards and awards for a considerable
and commendable behavioral achievement on site HSE. The plan is intended to be
flexible and active throughout the project execution phase, hence any adjustments
determined and agreed by both ICOM and the Client shall initiate for the plan to be
reviewed in order to ensure that all affected personnel are influenced positively by the
implementation of this plan.
2.15.1 Scope
This HSE Incentive Plan is applicable to all ICOM employees and its lower tier
personnel under its subcontractors, all of whom must be assigned in the specified
project incentive budget during the promotional period of this HSE Incentive Plan.
2.15.2 Terms of the Incentive Plan

The following are terms in which the plan operates:
Participant
The incentive plan participants include all ICOM and Client personnel assigned to the
service contract, including all personnel under ICOM subcontractors. The participants
may be 'Grouped' according to the following:
1. Work Group Discipline (i.e. Electrical, Mechanical, Civil, etc.)
2. Individual Craft (Technicians, Skilled, Labor, etc.)
3. Work Area group (Substation #, Pump station #, etc.)
The particular grouping per season of incentive period is will be decided upon by the
joint concession of ICOM and Client key HSE Staff.
Award Selection Committee

A 3-Men Safety Promotion Team will evaluate and recommend the personnel who will
be awarded with the specific award portions of the incentive plan. These teams will
also be assigned to a work area or work group to determine whether the observed
group is eligible for a 'Safe Behavior Group Performance Award'.
The team shall be comprised of the following key staff:
 Client Safety Advisor
 ICOM HSE in-charge


Revision Date :
 ICOM Work Supervisor or Foreman

 Project Mgt Representative
 Client Mgt Representative
Award Plan Description

The plan is based on rewarding the positive, proactive safe behaviors. The plan is
composed of the following four parts:
A minimum of every Project-Quarter (3 months project based period), HSE awards
may be given to selected ICOM personnel or its subcontractor for 'Safe Realization of
Work', in exception of the 'On-the-spot HSE Award' which is given on an
instantaneous manner. The awards are:
1. 'Man of the Month' Award
2. Safe Behavior Group Performance Award
3. Project Site HSE Milestone Achievement Award
4. On-the-spot HSE award
ICOM project operations shall recommend on the forms of incentive, which may be
such as paid leave, cash amount, salary adjustment, etc, subject upon approval of
ICOM management.
All above awards shall be recommended by the Award Selection Committee and
approved by ICOM management.
As part of the overall plan, awards that have not been distributed due to
disqualification or non-eligibility shall be reserved for the next project incentive season
period.
NOTE: In the event of a project fatality the entire HSE incentive program will be
stopped.
Resumption of the HSE incentive program may be done upon the recommendation of
ICOM project operations and the Client.
Participant Eligibility
Participants, whether direct ICOM or its subcontractor personnel shall only become
eligible for the incentive awards if during the work period covered by an incentive
scheme does not involve any Lost Time Incident (LTI) for their particular group which
is predetermined by the Award Selection Committee.
2.15.3 Safety Performance Measurement
The safety performance Award will be divided equally into two portions, the Safe Work
Realization portion and the Safe Behavior Promotion portion. Each portion has its own
set of criteria for receiving the award. The ward will be measured at least on a three-
monthly basis.
Safe Work Realization


Revision Date :
The Safe Work Realization portion is based upon the number of LTI or Recordable
injury incidents or other statistical parameters that a group of personnel has had
during the measurement period.
Safe Behavior Promotion

The Safe Behavior Promotion points based upon reaching a minimum threshold of
points based upon the monthly or periodical observation records of the 3-Men Award
Selection Committee that has been assigned.
Specific amounts of points are assigned to specific observable safe behavior
categories as reported in the next section and in the guideline Attachment 1.
Behavior Measurement
The 3-men Safety Promotion Team that is assigned to that area of work, craft
subcontractor, etc. will measure the Safe Behavior Performance Award in the
following manner:
The points will be awarded at least every three month to each SUBCONTRACTOR /
group and then total for the three-month measurement period. At least each three
month there will be a total of 100 points period.
a. Award eligibility amount is based upon the achievement of a Score of at least 80%
of the total available points for the recording period.
b. The Safe Behavior performance award Points Categories are for 75 points as per
the site visit check list reported in Attachment 1, and for the other 25 points are
reported here be below:
1. No crew has violated any established HIP or JHA, Safe Work Permit, Work
Methodology Statement or other Applicable permits. (8pts).
2. ICOM personnel participate in the site HSE Meetings. (3pts.)
3. ICOM personnel reports HSE irregularities and Participates actively in

proposing Recommendations. (4pts.)
4. Over 90% of the ICOM personnel have conducted a daily toolbox meeting each
day for the month. (3pts.)
5. No one of the ICOM personnel has been excluded from the site due to a safety
Violation. (3pts.)
The above categories shall be evaluated during the entire extension of each of each
HSE competition period.
2.15.4 Project Milestone Celebrations

The following are the criteria and suggested type of Safety Milestone Celebrations that
the site project can conduct in general:


Revision Date :
a. 1,000,000 hrs w/o LTI or w/o Recordable. Gift or Award. For every one (1) million
safe-manhours officially achieved by the project, an incentive award scheme shall
be agreed by ICOM and the Client.
b. This incentive scheme shall include and benefit, by minimum, all ICOM project
personnel, hence for every succeeding 1,000,000 hrs w/o LTI or w/o Recordable,
a gift or award is due
c. Six Months w/o Recordable cases, gift or award
d. One-year w/o LTI or Recordable cases, gift or award
2.15.5 On the Spot Award System

A certain amount of funds should be set aside for use by the three- person teams that
will be in place. Part of these teams’ duties will be to promote and encourage safe
behavior.
These teams will have awards that they can give to individuals or work crews at their
respective work areas, whenever they see behavior that should be
rewarded. Examples of behaviors could be:
a. Crew has an exceptionally orderly, clean work area.
b. An individual corrects an unsafe behavior of another.
c. An individual or crew corrects an unsafe condition.
d. An individual or crew actively promotes safe behaviors in themselves and others.
The award could be in the form of gift certificates or vouchers that the individuals can
use at a local store.
2.15.6 Awards
The awards that can be distributed can take the form of:
a. Dinners
b. Gifts
c. Vouchers
These awards can also be mix of any of the above. The important point to maintain is
that the award is an recognition of the awardees outstanding contribution, adherence
or implementation of HSE and does not become an entitlement in order to
continuously maintain the prestige of the award.
Incentive Plan Budget
The available amount to be assigned will be established as affix contractual parameter
to the total budgeted hours estimated. ICOM will manage the incentive plan back-
charging the costs as per contractual agreement and quotation.
2.15.7 Guideline for Incentive Plan


Revision Date :
The grading criteria shall be as follows:

1 to 2 = Unsatisfactory
3 to 4 = Satisfactory
5 = Very Good
The work area must be visited and inspected and the area crew shall be held
responsible for the implementations of HSE on the job. Project personnel must be
interviewed in order to accurately access that they understand the knowledge and the
compliance with each item.
A format of the grading criteria can be similar to the table provided below:
Evaluation Criteria SCORE COMMENTS

1 Workers safety dress – badge – PPE wearing and using
2 Site appearance – Housekeeping – Material at adequate
distance from edge
3 Storage – use material – MSDS available when applicable
4 All correct Fall arrests are in use, (Harness, Handrails, Barriers)
– Holes and opening excavations or scaffold securely guard
railed
5 Permit / JHA to Work Known/displayed on the work site – the
document is well filled – Tool Box is regularly done
6 Behaviour and method of work safety and environmental friendly
7 Tools in good and safe conditions – properly used
8 Health / Environmental hazard identified and known
9 Waste and rubbish management
10 Is all various machinery/equipment in general in good order and
used correctly (crane, slings, welding equipment, excavator,
dump, trucks, scaffold, ladder, etc.)
11 Electrical devices / Ground program for temporary safety devices
12 Everyone reach their place of work safely access/egress
13 Fire extinguisher in place and in good condition
14 Emergency basic information known
15 Traffic / Parking vehicle under control
TOTAL
Other points during the last period
a No one has violated JHA/WP/HSE Method, etc.
b Constant participation to HSE Meetings
c Report HSE irregularities and proposing proactive actions
d Constant execution of daily tool box meeting


Revision Date :
e No exclusion from the site due to HSE violation

GRAND TOTAL
2.16 SAFETY AWARENESS PROGRAM
In order to promote Safety Awareness, Posters, Safety Bulletins, Slogans, Signs etc.
shall be posted at jobsite and offices. Site Safety Committee will recommend on
agreed periodical basis, three front line Supervisors names to the Safety Department.
1. The Site Safety Officer will select one Supervisor amongst the three, on his
discretion.
2. The selected front line Supervisor and on his recommendation, two task
performers will be given a certificate of safety appreciation.
3. As proposed above, ICOM shall form a safety committee from management staff,
front line Supervisor or Foreman, and the task performer.
4. The purpose of the safety committee is to uplift safety awareness and set the
attitude of employees towards utmost safety.
a. Safety walk-through shall be conducted once a week to familiarize and

recognize hazards in the work place. Necessary actions shall be done to
prevent the recurrence of any unsafe conditions.
b. Special meetings will be conducted after each safety walk-through to eliminate
all the infractions and have it emphasized to all level of the organization.
c. ICOM, together with the Client, shall jointly convene and form consultations to
establish a totally safe working environment.
The primary aim of joint consultation is to enhance total involvements of employees

for their health and safety at their workplaces, by encouraging their participation in
safety inspections, and giving them a say in developing a more realistic approach to
accident prevention and achieve implementation of safe working methods.
2.17 DUST CONTROL

Dust is a prevalent air pollutant at operations site which ICOM shall encounter in this
contract job implementation especially during the stage of civil works phase.
 Dust producing activities occur during excavation as the soils are loosened and
also the results of air blown sand and silt particles.
 ICOM shall apply non-contaminated water fro dust control to prevent blowing of
dust becoming a nuisance of surrounding facilities and inhabitants.
 ICOM shall coordinate with the Client’s Safety Advisor for the minimum application
of dust control, which shall also be based on weather conditions with the project
site locality..


Revision Date :
 Plant roads that are contaminated by sand or soil spilled from Dump Truck shall be
cleared by the use of suitable sweeping tools, hand shovels and disposed to
appropriate dumping locations.
2.17.1 Dust Control Plan

As the Kingdom is greatly recognized by its prominent and frequent sand storms, this
plan aims to identify ‘dust sources’ at the operations site and describes all of the dust
control measures to be implemented before, during, and after any dust generating
activity for the duration of the project.
Where there is an operations site, there is a need for operations dust control. High
winds sweeping over building sites or other areas where soil is disturbed by
machinery are often the major source for dust generation and the need for immediate
and effective open-areas dust control. Airborne dust particles translate into loss of soil
and an increased likelihood of higher levels of sedimentation and water pollution. In
the absence of optimal operations dust control, a work environment can become
intolerable, contributing to respiratory health problems both onsite and in areas struck
by windborne dust.
Nuisance dust is a frequent problem which naturally goes with the terrain of the Saudi
Arabia, hence operations dust control has become a regular requirement by the
Client. It is because of this requirement that a operations dust control plan must be
produced and implemented on almost every operations site.
ICOM shall consult progressively with the Client for any further recommendations
regarding the Dust Control Plan in order to effectively meet the needs of current site
situations. Operations activities shall not commence until the provisions for dust
control has not been satisfied and found effective for specific sand storm and heavy
dust conditions. ICOM must also provide written notification to the Client prior to the
commencement of earthmoving activities. A copy of the approved work schedule must
be retained at the project site and made available upon request by any relative Client
or ICOM project officer.
For a operations dust control plan to work effectively it must contain a way to monitor
the amount of dust in the area. It should also include methods of minimizing or reduce
the visible dust. It is recommended that visibly dry soil that has been disturbed,
including unpaved roads, should be sprayed down with water at least once to three
times a day. This action does not have to be performed on non-working days or when
sufficient moisture has fallen to make the surface not prone to producing dust.
If necessary, the plan shall be adjusted to include steps to deal with the wind. Wind
direction should be observed and recorded so downwind areas can be checked for
evidence of dust.
The installation of dust control devices is suggested where practical. This would
include, but is not limited to, windbreaks, plastic tarps, and a tree line or shrubs.
The last requirement of a typical operations dust control plan is to control the speed of
vehicles over the unpaved landscape. This is the biggest factor in reducing nuisance
dust.


Revision Date :
2.17.2 Sources of ‘Fugitive’ Dust

1. Identify the relative locations of actual and potential sources of fugitive dust
emissions.
a. Sand Storms
b. Bulk material handling and storage areas.
c. Paved and unpaved access roads, haul roads, traffic areas, and equipment
storage yards.
d. Exit points where carryout and track-out onto paved public roads may occur.
e. Water supply locations if water application will be used for controlling visible
dust emissions.
2. Identify the relative locations of sensitive receptors or locations which may have
considerable effect from heavy dust within 500 meters of the project.
a. No sensitive receptors within 500 meters of the project.
b. Residential areas, schools, day care, churches, hospitals, nursing facilities,
commercial, retail, etc.
c. Freeways, roads, or traffic areas that may be affected by the dust generating
activities.
d. Others.
3. Pointers for limiting visible dust emissions from activities that cause fugitive dust
emissions.
a. Demolitions are limited and planned for dust control this project.
b. Water will be applied to the following areas for the duration of the demolition
activities:
 Building exterior surfaces;
 Unpaved surface areas where equipment will operate;
 Razed building materials; and
c. Water or dust suppressants will be applied to unpaved surface areas within 100
feet of structure during demolition.
2.17.3 General Guidelines
 The site will be pre-watered and work will be phased to reduce the amount of
disturbed surface area at any one time.
 Water tanker shall be coordinated to facilitate frequent water drizzling activities.
 Water will be applied to dry areas during levelling, grading, trenching, and
earthmoving activities.
 Wind barriers will be constructed and maintained, and water or dust suppressants
will be applied to the disturbed surface areas.


Revision Date :
 Water or dust suppressants will be applied on disturbed surface areas to form a

visible crust, and vehicle access will be restricted to maintain the visible crust.
 Vehicular access will be restricted and water or dust suppressants will be applied
and maintained at all un-vegetated areas.
 Gravel, marl or stabilizing soil shall be applied as practicable and maintained at all
previously disturbed areas.
 Previously disturbed areas will be paved.
 Apply water or dust suppressants to unpaved haul and access roads.
 Post speed limit signs of not more than 15 miles per hour at each entrance, and
again every 500 feet.
 Dust suppressants will be applied to vehicle traffic and equipment storage areas.
 Water application equipment will apply water to control fugitive dust during wind
events, unless unsafe to do so. Outdoor operations activities that disturb the soil
will cease whenever visible dust emissions cannot be effectively controlled.
 Water or dust suppressants will be applied when handling bulk materials.
 Wind barriers with less than 50 percent porosity will be installed and maintained,
and water or dust suppressants will be applied.
 Water or dust suppressants will be applied to storage piles.
 Storage piles will be covered with tarps, plastic, or other suitable material and
anchored in a manner that prevents the cover from being removed by wind action.
 Wind barriers with less than 50 percent porosity will be installed and maintained
around the storage piles, and water or dust suppressants will be applied.
 A three-sided structure (< 50% porosity) will be used that is at least as high as the
storage piles.
 All haul trucks will be loaded such that the freeboard is not less than six inches
when transported across any paved public access road.
 A sufficient amount of water will be applied to the top of the load to limit visible dust
emissions.
Contingencies to be implemented if application equipment becomes inoperable, more
equipment is needed to effectively control fugitive dust emissions during active and
inactive periods, accessibility limitations occur at the water sources, or staff is not
available to operate the application equipment.
3.0 SAFE WORK PRACTICES
3.1 SCAFFOLDING, LADDERS AND ELEVATED WORK ACCESS
ICOM shall ensure that all its work places shall be safe and of adequate dimensions to
facilitate moving personnel and their tools and equipment. Where men, tools, or
materials could fall 1.8 meters (6 feet) or more, a guardrail system (consisting of
toprails and midrails) and toe boards shall be provided. Every work place and every


Revision Date :
means of getting to and from a working place shall be provided with adequate lighting
which shall be properly maintained.
Should the provision of these safeguards be impracticable, other means of preventing
falls, such as safety harness, nets, and other available and accepted means shall be
used. Personal Protective Equipment to restrain or arrest personnel falling from
scaffolds shall be as prescribed this SAFETY MANUAL from Section 2.2 - PPE.
ICOM and the Client shall jointly be responsible in ensuring that each work place is
safe and that it remains safe so long as men work there. Similarly, each supervisor is
responsible for ensuring that every man working under his direction or control has a
safe working place and a safe means of getting to and from every working place.
Where work cannot safely be done on the ground or from part of a building or
permanent structure, scaffolds, ladders or other means of support shall be provided
and properly maintained.
All scaffold works and erection shall be supervised by a Client approved Scaffold
Supervisor and/or Inspector.
3.1.1 INSTRUCTIONS AND STANDARDS

Scaffold safety regulations shall be referred to applicable sections of the American
National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) and US Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
1910.28.
Where scaffold manufacturers products meet other scaffold standards that are
equivalent to or higher than ANSI requirements, then those products can be used.
Scaffold products from different manufacturers shall not be mixed on a scaffold,
unless they are specifically designed to be used together, in such case that the Client
does not identify the reference standard for scaffold safety. Hence, inherent to their
operations, the Client may prescribe the handbook to be used as base standard for
guidance in scaffolding activities.
The following standards are used as references:

Uniform Building Code = ANSI A10.8 – 1988
Scaffolding Safety Requirements = ANSI A14.1-1982 / ANSI A14.1a- 1985
Ladders, Portable Wood Safety Requirements = ANSI A14.2 – 1990
Portable Metal Ladders = ANSI A14.3 – 1984
Ladders, Fixed-Safety Requirements = ANSI A92.2 – 1990
US. Code of Federal Regulations, 29. CFR Part 1910.28, Safety Requirements for
Scaffolding
National Safety Council Data Sheets = Data Sheet 568
Job-Made Ladders = NFPA 70 – 90 National Electrical Code (NEC)
3.1.2 Prevention of Fall


Revision Date :
Permanent decking, parts of a structure, walkways, footbridges, etc., which men use
in the course of their work or for a permanent or temporary access, shall be provided
with a guardrail system and toe boards (permanent or temporary) at all edges from
which men, tools, or materials could fall 1.8 meters (6 feet) or more.
Elevated work platforms with holes and gaps shall be guarded or securely covered.
Stairs (permanent or temporary) shall have all treads properly secured and shall be
fitted with handrails throughout their length and conform to the applicable building
code.
Where there is danger of men being struck by falling material, protective coverings
shall be erected or No. 18 gauge wire, 1/2 inch mesh or equivalent, shall be securely
fixed between the toe board and mid rail to prevent falling objects.
Where the slope of a ramp exceeds 1 vertical to 4 horizontal, the ramp shall be fitted
with stepping cleats at 0.3 meter (1 foot) intervals. When a ramp is to be used by the
general public, its slope shall not exceed 1 vertical to 4 horizontal. Handrails shall be
provided.
All scaffold structures shall be erected with metal components approved per ANSI
requirements or equivalent. Scaffolds shall be stored to prevent damage and to
permit easy access for use. Scaffold erection plans (drawings) shall be submitted to
Client’s Loss Prevention Department for review prior to men being allowed to work on
the scaffold. The work site shall utilize current scaffold assembly systems but shall
conform to minimum standards set by Client.
3.1.3 Requirements Common to all Scaffolding

Scaffold erections shall be capable of supporting without failure at least 4 times the
maximum intended load plus the dead-load.
Foundations
A sound base is an essential requirement for safe scaffolding, therefore the ground or
floor on which a scaffold is going to stand must be carefully examined. Sand or made-
up ground may need compacting to ensure there are no cavities. Such bases as
floors, roofs, etc. may need shoring from underneath.
 Timber sills at least 23 centimeters (9 inches) wide by 3.8 centimeters (1-1/2
inches) thick (not scaffold planks) will be required to spread the load on sand,
made up ground, asphalt pavement, wooden floors, and slippery surfaces. A sill
shall extend under at least two posts.
 Where scaffolding is erected on a solid bearing such as rock or concrete, small
timber pads may be used in place of sills and nailed to prevent the base plates
sliding off.
 Concrete blocks, barrels, and other loose or unsuitable material shall not be used
for the operations or support of scaffolding.
 If used to compensate for variations in ground level, the screw-jack shall not be
adjusted to more than two-thirds of the total length of the thread.


Revision Date :
 The base plate shall be of a type approved for supporting scaffolding posts. For
this item, the manufacturer specifications shall be referred to.
 The ground or floor on which a scaffold is going to stand must be carefully
examined. Sand or made up ground may need consolidating to ensure there are
no cavities. Such bases as floors roof etc. may need shoring from underneath.
Planks, decks, platforms

 All scaffolds must be at least 2 planks wide, no employee should work from a
single plank.
 Supports for scaffold planks shall be spaced with due regard to the nature other
platform and the load it will bear. Supporter 2” planks shall never be more than 10
ft. apart.
 Except on decking contiguous to the surface of a cylindrical or spherical structure,
planks shall be laid flush.
 All planking of platforms shall be overlapped a minimum of 12 inches or secured
from moving.
 Where necessary, planks shall be secured in position to prevent displacement by
high winds.
 Adequate space for man to pass in safety shall be provided and maintained
wherever materials are placed on decking or if any higher platform is erected there
on.
 Decking shall be kept free of unnecessary obstruction, materials projecting nails.
 Decking which has become slippery with oil or any other substance shall be
sanded, cleaned or otherwise treated as soon as possible.
 Slopes in decking shall not exceed 1 vertical to 4 horizontal and stepping cleats at
1 ft. intervals shall be provided.
 The end of the working platform should, where possible, extend beyond the end of
the wall or working face by a distance of 600 mm when work is carried out up to
the end of the wall.
 All decking shall be closed planked for the full width of the scaffold structure and
shall never be less than three 9” planks in width.
Posts
 Posts shall be pitched on 15 centimeters (6 inches) by 15 centimeters (6 inch)
steel base plates and at least 0.64 centimeters (1/4 inch) thick. Joints in posts
should be staggered, i.e., joints in adjacent posts should not occur in the same lift.
All posts shall be vertical.
 The inner row of posts shall be placed as close as possible to the face of the
building or structure.


Revision Date :
 To avoid projections, the posts may be up to 41 centimeters (16 inches) away from
the wall or structure as necessary, provided that, where there is room to do so, the
gap between the wall or the structure and the inner posts shall be closed with
planks on extended board bearers.
 The outer row of posts shall be positioned from the inner row of posts depending
on the load requirements of the scaffold, and the working platform shall be fully
decked out.
Runners
 Runners shall be securely fixed to posts with standard couplers and shall be
horizontal.
 Joints in runners should be staggered, i.e., joints in adjacent runners should not
occur in the same bay.
 Runners should be secured end-to-end by sleeve couplers, not by joint pins.
 Runners shall be vertically spaced no more than 2.0 meters (6 feet, 6 inches) to
give adequate headroom along the platforms.
Bearers
Bearers should be installed between posts and securely fixed to the posts bearing on
the runner coupler and secured with standard couplers. When coupled directly to the
runners, the coupler must be kept as close to the posts as possible. These bearers
must remain in position as they are a structural part of the scaffold.
Board Bearers
Board bearers shall be installed between bearers to accommodate differences in
plank lengths. Board bearers shall be secured to the runners between bearers where
necessary to support platform units (planks). These may be removed when no longer
required to support platform units.
Bracing
Cross bracing shall be installed across the width of the scaffold at least every third set
of posts horizontally and every fourth runner vertically. Such bracing shall extend
diagonally from the inner and outer runners upward to the next outer and inner
runners. These braces should be fixed to the runners with standard couplers as close
to the posts as possible. Where such a fixing is impracticable, adjustable couplers
may be used to fix the braces to the posts.
 Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at approximately 45-degree angle
from near the base of the first outer post upward to the extreme top of the scaffold.
Where possible, such bracing shall be duplicated at every fifth post.
 On short but high runs, diagonal bracing shall be installed at an angle of 45
degrees from the base of the first outer post to the last outer post and shall
alternate directions to the top of the scaffold.


Revision Date :
 When bracing cannot be attached to the posts, this bracing may be attached to the
runners, as close as possible to the posts.
 Only standard couplers or adjustable couplers may be used. Joints in braces shall
be made with end-to-end or parallel couplers.
 Temporary rakers (inclined load-bearing tube supports) brace the scaffold against
the ground when setting out. These rakers are replaced by permanent braces
when the scaffold has been plumbed, levelled and tied. Rakers must be secured
with proper couplers at the scaffold and coupled to a ground stake.
Ties
It is essential that all scaffolds, with the exception of certain tower and mobile
scaffolds be securely tied to the building or structure throughout their length and
height to prevent movement of the scaffold either towards or away from the building or
structure. This should be done by connecting a tie tube to both runners or posts and
coupling this to a two-way tie or column box tie assembly.
 Where the foregoing is impracticable, tubes may be securely wedged between
opposing surfaces on the building or structure by the use of reveal pins and
coupled to the tie tubes.
 Where reveal ties are used, they shall not exceed 50% of the total number of ties.
Two-way ties or column box ties shall be evenly distributed over the scaffold area.
To ensure the security of reveal ties, it is necessary to check frequently for
tightness.
 Ties shall occur at the top of the scaffold and at least every 7.9 meters (26 feet)
vertically and 9.1 meters (30 feet) horizontally and at each end of the scaffold. All
tie assembly connections shall be made with standard couplers.
Platform Units
 All platform units (i.e., planks, fabricated decks, etc.) shall be closed planked with,
whenever practicable, each plank resting on at least three supports.
 Planks shall be secured in position to prevent displacement by high winds. Planks
shall extend over their end supports by not less than 15 centimeters (6 inches) and
not more than 30.5 centimeters (12 inches).
 Supports for scaffold planks shall be spaced with due regard to the nature of the
platform and the load it will bear.
 Except on platform units adjacent to the surface of a cylindrical or spherical
structure, planks shall be laid flush.
 Adequate space for men to pass in safety shall be provided and maintained
wherever materials are placed on platform units or if any higher platform is erected
thereon.


Revision Date :
 Platform units shall be kept free of unnecessary obstructions, materials, and

projecting nails. Platform units which have become slippery with oil or any other
substance shall be cleaned, or otherwise removed and replaced. All platform units
shall be closed planked for the full width of the scaffold structure.
 Slopes in platform units shall not exceed 1 vertical to 4 horizontal and stepping
cleats at 0.3 meter (1 foot) intervals shall be provided.
Guardrail Systems and Toeboards

 Guardrail systems (consisting of toprails and midrails) and toeboards shall be
installed at all open sides and ends of all scaffolds and supports on no more than
3-meter (10-foot) centers from which men or materials could fall a distance of more
than 1.8 meters (6 feet).
 Toprails shall be no less than 0.91 meter (36 inches) and no more than 1.14
meters (45 inches) above the working surface; midrails shall be installed
equidistant between the working surface and the toprail.
 Toeboards shall not be less than 10 centimeters (4 inches) in height by 2.5
centimeters (1 inch) thick.
 Guardrail systems and toeboards shall be securely fixed to the inside of posts to
withstand a lateral thrust of 200 pounds.
Landings
 Safe landings shall be provided at the top of all ladders.
 Rings shall be eliminated above the landing level, and side rails shall extend 36 to
42 inches above the landing for mounting and dismounting.
 Where multiple ladders are required, solidly decked platforms shall be provided.
 Guardrails, intermediate rails and toe boards shall be erected on the outside edges
and exposed sides of the platform.
Access
Access to a working platform is best achieved by providing a separate ladder tower or
a cantilevered access platform so as not to obstruct the working platform and to
minimize the risk of persons falling through gaps in the guardrail system or platform
units. Access must be provided to working platforms.
Scaffold Ladders
Scaffold ladders provide the means of access and egress for scaffolds. Access
ladders may be optioned and generally be classified as follows:
Portable Straight and Extension Ladders
 A straight ladder is a portable ladder that only consists of one section which
determines its overall length. It cannot support itself or be adjusted in length.


Revision Date :
 An extension ladder is a portable ladder that cannot support itself but can be
adjusted in length. It consists of two or more sections which are arranged to
permit length adjustment. Its overall length is the sum of the length of all its
sections measured along the side rails.
 Portable straight and extension ladders shall have a firm base and be positioned
with a slope of 1:4.
 A Vertical Ladder IS a type of fixed ladder which is permanently attached to the
horizontal or vertical components of scaffolding. The main factor to consider in
the use of a vertical ladder is clearance.
The following clearance guidelines shall be used.
 Safe clearances shall be maintained to prevent workers from bumping into, or
snagging onto, projecting objects while ascending or descending the ladder.
 Climbing Side - Ladders shall have a minimum clear perpendicular distance of
30 inches from the rungs to the nearest projecting object on the climbing side.
When unavoidable obstructions are encountered, the minimum clearance
distance may be reduced to 24 inches if deflector plates are provided.
 Back Side of Ladder - The perpendicular distance from the face of the rung on
the climbing side to the nearest fixed object on the back side of the ladder shall
not be less than 10 inches. When unavoidable, horizontal obstructions (e.g.
beams, pipes, etc.) are encountered, the vertical toe clearances specified in the
following sections, shall apply.
 Side Clearance - The minimum clear distance to the nearest fixed object shall
be 15 inches on each side of the centerline of single rung ladders.
 Vertical Clearance - The minimum vertical toe clearance from horizontal
obstructions shall be 1 1/2 inches below and 4 1/2 inches above the top edge of
the rung.
 Multiple Ladders - When two or more separate ladders are used with a landing
platform, the side-step distance shall be a minimum of 15 inches from the
centerline of the upper ladder to the near side of the lower ladder.
Workmanship
Scaffolding shall be erected, altered, and dismantled by experienced men working
under the direction of a competent supervisor. Posts shall be set accurately in place
and checked vertically by using a spirit level or by using vertical lines on the
building or structure. Scaffolding couplers should be tightened with proper
scaffolding spanners. The use of an ordinary spanner or tool giving greater
leverage could damage the screw threads and render the coupler unserviceable.


Revision Date :
Scaffolding materials shall not be thrown or dropped from heights.
Inspections
All scaffolds shall be inspected regularly by a competent Supervisor and after
adjustments, modifications, adverse weather conditions, etc. Erected scaffolds and
platforms should also be inspected continuously, by those using the scaffold, to
insure that the scaffold has not been altered and is in a safe working condition.
Training of Erection Personnel

Personnel erecting scaffold shall successfully complete training provided by a
qualified trainer, be tested/certified as scaffold builders and work under the direct
supervision of a Competent Person.
All scaffolding and work platforms must be in accordance with jobsite specifications
and requirements. All scaffolds shall be erected with the strict supervision of
CLIENT approved Scaffolding Supervisor, inspected and signed-off by CLIENT
approved Scaffolding Inspector.
Elevated Work Places

A scaffold is an elevated working platform for supporting both personnel and
materials. It’s a temporary structure. It’s main use being in operations and / or
maintenance works. Scaffolding is the structure that supports the working platform.
Sound scaffolding is essential to safety operations. Scaffold should be designed to
support at least four times the anticipated weight plus the dead load.
Access
Access to a working platform is best achieved by providing a separate ladder tower
or cantilevered access platform so as not to obstruct the working platform and to
minimize the risk of persons through the gap in the guard rails or decking.
Scaffold Operations Using

Personnel erecting the scaffolding should ensure that at the time of handling over to
the user, it is stable and in safe condition.
Personnel using scaffold and particularly subsequent users should ensure that the
scaffolds are properly constructed and suitable for the purpose for which they
require them.
Scaffold erectors should ensure that the scaffolds are maintained in the relevant
condition throughout their use. It is essential that scaffold erectors should not
interfere with the scaffold structure or platforms or ties or braces in any way while
using, and should not leave it in a hazardous condition for other to use.
Scaffold erectors should ensure that all the necessary safeguards have been
provided and maintained and are used.
Protection of the Public


Revision Date :
Scaffolding is frequently erected in areas to which members of the public has

access. Appropriate measures shall be taken to avoid exposure of hazards to
people unrelated to scaffolding activities.
Board Bearers
Board bearers shall be secured to the ledgers between transoms where necessary
to support decking. These may be removed when no longer required to support
decking.
Bracing
 Ledger bracing at right to the building or structure at alternate pairs of standard
is necessary for the full height of the scaffold. These braces should be fixed to
the ledgers with 90 degree load bearing couplers as close to the standards as
possible. Where such a fixing is impracticable, swivel coupler may be use to fix
the braces to the standards.
 Longitudinal bracing to the full height of the scaffold is necessary. This should
be fixed diagonally across the face of a scaffold at an angle as close to 45
degree as possible or it may be the dog type at each end of the scaffold.
 Temporary rakers will normally be required to brace the scaffold against the
ground when setting out. These rakers are replaced by permanent braces when
the scaffold has been plumbed, levelled and tied.
Ties
 It is essential that all scaffold with the exception of certain tower and mobile
scaffold be securely tied to the building or structure throughout their length and
height to prevent movement of the scaffold either towards or away from the
building or structure. This should be done by connecting a tie tube to both
ledgers or standard and coupling this to a through tie of column box tie
assembly.
 Where the foregoing is impractical, tubes may be securely wedged between
opposing surfaces on the building or structure by the use of reveal pins, and
coupled to the tie tubes.
 To ensure the security of reveal ties, it is necessary to check frequently for
tightness.
 Ties shall occur at least every 10 ft. vertically and 20 ft. horizontally. All ties
assembly connection shall be made with 90 degree load bearing couplers.
 All free standing tower scaffolding must be guyed, or tied every 30 ft.
Decking
 All decking shall be closed planked with, wherever practicable, each plank
resting on at least three supports. Planks shall extend over their end support by
min 6” and max 12”.


Revision Date :
 Timber sole plates at least 200 mm wide by 35 mm thick (not scaffold planks)
shall be required to spread the load on sand, made up ground, asphalt
pavement wooden floors and slippery surfaces.
 Where scaffolding is erected on solid bearing such as rock or concrete, small
timber pads may be used in place of sole plates.
 Concrete blocks, barrels, and other loose or unstable materials shall not be
used for the operations or support of scaffolding.
Standards
Standards shall be pitched on base plates and sole plates or timber pads. Joints in
standard should be staggered (i.e.) joints in adjacent standards should not occur in
the same lift. All standards shall be vertical.
The inner row of the standard shall be place as close as possible to the face of the
building or structure. To avoid projection, the standard may be up to 15inch away
from the wall or structure as necessary, provided that there is room to do so, the
gap between the wall or structure and the inner standard shall be closed with a
single plank on extended broad bearers.
The outer row of the standard shall be approximately 3’4” from the inner row to
allow for four 9” planks between them.
Ledgers
 Ledgers shall be securely fixed to standards with 90 degrees load bearing
couplers and shall be horizontal.
 Joints in ledgers should be staged (i.e.) joints in adjacent ledgers should not
occur in the same bay.
 Ledgers shall be vertically spaced at 6ft. to 7 ft. to give adequate head room
along the platforms.
Transoms
Transoms shall be place on the ledgers within 12 inches of each standard and
secured with 90 degree load bearing couplers. These transoms must remain in
position as they are a structural part of the scaffold.
Tubular Metal Scaffold
Some common type of tubular scaffold are Independent tied scaffold, Put log
scaffold, Bird cage scaffold, Truss out scaffold, Cantilever scaffold, Slung scaffold,
Suspended access scaffold, Tower scaffolds, Steeple jacks scaffold.
3.1.4 Scaffolding Terms

Tubular members
 Standard: A tube used as a column or vertical in the operations of scaffold, and
transmitting a load to the ground via base plate.


Revision Date :
 Ledger: A tube spanning horizontally and typing a scaffold longitudinally. It may

also act as a support for put logs, transoms or board bearers.
 Transom: A tube spanning across ledgers to tie scaffold transversely, which may
also support a working platform.
 Board Bearer: A tube spanning across ledgers between transoms to support a
working platform.
 Brace: A tube incorporated diagonally across two or more members in a scaffold
and fixed to them to afford stability.
 Tie: A tube used to connect a scaffold to a rigid anchorage.
 Guard Rail: A tube erected at the edge of platforms and other places to prevent
persons falling from the platform or place.
 Hand Rail: A tube used on stairs before permanent handrails, banister etc. are fitted
to prevent the fall of persons.
Scaffold Fittings
 Base Plate: A steel plate providing a flat bearing surface for load distribution form
standards. It has an integral spigot and fixing holes for use with sole plates.
 Adjustable Base Plate: Base plate used for compensating variation in ground levels.
Also used for strutting and shoring.
 Fixed Coupler: A load bearing coupler for connecting two tubes together at fixed
right angles.
 Universal Coupler: A load bearing coupler used for connecting two tubes together
at right angles or in parallel.
 Swivel Coupler: Coupler used for connecting two tubes together at any angle
through 360 degrees. Not designed for load bearing purposes.
 Joint Pin (Also known as spigot) a pin used for connecting two tubes end to end.
Fitted internally it expands to apply grip against the wall of the tube.
 Put Log Coupler: A non load bearing coupler used for fixing two tubes at right
angles e.g. intermediate putlogs or board bearers to ledgers.
 Reveal Pin: Instead into the end of a tube and adjusted to form a rigid horizontal or
vertical member between two opposing surfaces. It forms a solid anchorage to
which a scaffold can be tied.
General Terms
Sole Plate (Also Known As Spreader) = A timber or other member of adequate size
and suitable quality used to distribution the load from the base plate over an area of
ground, floor joist etc.
Toe Board = A board positioning at the edge of a platform or place so as to prevent

persons, tools and materials falling from the platform or place.


Revision Date :
Decking = A close boarded scaffold platform.
Longitudinal Bracing = Tubes secures diagonally across the face of the scaffold to
ensure stability.
Lift = the height from the ground or floor to the lowest ledger, or the vertical distance
between two adjacent ledgers.
Ledgers Bracing = Tubes secured diagonally between lifts from ledger to ledger or
standards to standards to ensure stability.
System Scaffolding = (Also known as unit or frame Scaffolding) Tubular welded

frame, or patent scaffolding composed wholly or partly of purpose-made frames or
units.
Planks Used For Scaffolding
 Planks shall be of rough timber, 2 inches thick by 9 inches wide and shall conform
to the following specification.
1. On the face plank, the end shall not be split up more than 12 inch, with blending
fixed or the end bolted through.
2. On the face of the plank not more than one third the width in any one place shall
be knot wood.
3. On the edge of the plank, not more than half the depth shall be kept wood.
4. On the edge of the plank, the grain should not cross from face to face within a
distance of less than 12 inch.
 From end to end, plank must not be twisted by more than 1/2 inch.
 Planks shall not be painted or treated in any way that would conceal defects.
 Planks which are split, decayed, or warped shall not be used, but the parts affected
may be cut off to produce shorter planks with the ends banded or bolted through.
 Planks should be stacked on a suitable foundation. Where the height of a stack
exceeds 20 planks, measures should be taken to tie or bond succeeding layers.
 Planks should not be stood on end unattended.
Scaffold planks shall not be used for shuttering for concrete, shoring for trenches or as
sole plates for scaffolding.
3.1.5 Ladder
Ladders can be one of the most hazardous pieces of equipment if used improperly.
Ladder accidents are caused by carelessness, by misuse, or by defects in the ladder
structure. The following rules will ensure your safety.
Using Ladders:
 Carry a ladder with the front end high enough to clear anyone ahead of you.


Revision Date :
 Before you use a ladder, inspect all rungs, fittings, braces, cleats and rails for
possible defects. Place a “DANGER” tag on all defective ladders and report them
to your supervisor.
 Select the correct ladder for the job. Never use a ladder too short or too narrow for
the job. Correct pitch of the horizontal distance from the top support to the foot of
the ladder is ¼ the length of the ladder.
 Always face the ladder, using both hands when climbing or descending. Use a
hand line or material hoist to raise and lower tools and materials.
 Do not use the ladder as a walkway. This can be dangerous and will weaken the
ladder structurally.
 Never work higher than the third rung from the top of a straight ladder.
 Do not use metal ladders near electrical equipment or lines.
 Job-built ladders must meet all applicable standards. The side rail of the ladder
must extend 1 meter above any platform, etc., that is being accessed by the
ladder.
 Ladders shall not be used as a scaffold member, or for any purpose for which they
are not intended.
 All permanent ladders shall be securely fastened at both top and bottom. Long
ladders should also be secured at midpoint.
 When portable straight and extension ladders are used on hard surfaces, they
shall be equipped with non-skid footing or securely fastened to prevent slipping.
 The base of the ladder shall be placed away from the wall by a distance of one-
fourth of the working length of the ladder. The working length is the length of the
ladder from the bottom to the point where it contacts the wall.
Precautions in using Ladders:

 Be sure that your shoes/boots are free from mud, grease, or other substances that
could cause a slip or fall.
 Always use a safety belt while working from ladders.
 Ladders shall be maintained in good condition.
 Defective ladders shall be taken out of service, tagged, and repaired or replaced.
 Safety Officer, supervisors and foremen shall always closely inspect ladders
before each use.
 The combined weight of the person and load shall not exceed the load limit for the
ladder.
 There shall not be more than one person on a ladder at the same time. If a job
requires more than one person, a scaffold or a second ladder should be
considered.


Revision Date :
 Rope or other similar means shall secure the top of the ladder, or another person
should hold the ladder.
 Unsecured portable ladders should not be left standing unattended.
 Ladders shall not be extended beyond the manufacturer’s recommendation.
 Wooden and fibre glass ladders shall not be painted. Ladders shall not be placed
in front of doors which open toward the ladder, unless the door is locked or
guarded.
 When ascending or descending on a ladder, climbers should face the ladder and
maintain a firm grip.
 Do not carry tools or other materials in your hands when ascending or descending
on a ladder.
 Use a hand line to raise or lower heavy or bulky objects.
 When a climbing device is required, the climber shall use it.
 Do not work higher than the third rung from the top of straight ladders.
 Be sure that your shoes are not greasy, muddy, or slippery before you climb.
 When working from a ladder, never extend further than an arm’s length to reach
work.
 When using a stepladder, climbers shall not stand on the top two steps (or as
recommended by the manufacturer), stand on the spreader of a stepladder, or use
a stepladder as a straight ladder.
 When raising or lowering a ladder, make sure it does not come in contact with an
energized electrical source.
 When performing electrical work that requires the use of a ladder, use a wooden or
approved fibre glass ladder.
 Metal ladders shall not be used for electrical work.
3.2 POWERED PORTABLE AND HAND TOOLS

ICOM shall ensure that effective and good working hand/power tools shall be provided
to its workforce in order to efficiently and safety execute its work tasks and in order to
help maintain all its work places a healthy working environment.
Hand tools are those tools for which the hand provide the motive force (i.e.) picks,
shovel, axes, crowbars, wrenches, saws, chisels, hammer, screw drivers etc.
Accidents arising from the use of hand tools are frequently caused by human error.
Power tools however allow many jobs to be carried out more efficiently and with
greater speed and accuracy. Many accidents have occurred because of the incorrect
usage of portable and power tools.
A craftsman is evaluated by the condition of the tools and how he uses them. The
widespread use and abuse of hand and portable powered tools highly contribute to the
high incidence rate and severity of many tool injuries. It is important that the elimination
of tool accident be made a part of every safety program.


Revision Date :
Each year hand tools are the source of considerable amount of all compensable
disabling injuries. Disabilities resulting from misuse of tools or using damaged tools
include loss of eyes and vision, puncture wounds from flying chips, severed finger,
tendons, and arteries, broken bones, contusions from puncture wounds, and injuries
too numerous to mention.
3.2.1 Basic Causes of Hand Tool Accidents

 Purchase of inferior tools which break in use.
 Use of tools in poor condition, e.g. screw driver with broken handles, hammers,
with loose hands and electric tools with broken plugs.
 Using wrong tools for the job, e.g. pliers instead of a wrench, or a file or screw
driver instead of a crow bar.
 Incorrect use of the tools, e.g. Filing a pipe as a lever to the handle of a wrench or
spanner or applying a screw driver to an object held in the other hand.
 Leaving tools in a dangerous place e.g. spanner on a building beam from which it
may be disclosed and fall on someone, or a sharp unsheathed knife among a
bundle of tools which may be grasped by an unwary hand.
 Home-made hand tools are not allowed at Client operations sites.
3.2.2 Powered Portable Tools

Powered portable tools present similar hazards as a stationary machine of the same
kind, in addition to the risk of handling typical injuries cause by portable power tools
are burns, cuts, and strains. Sources of injury include electric shock, particles in the
eyes, fires, falls, and falling tools.
 Powered Portable Tools temporary wirings shall be required with Ground Fault
Circuit Interrupters (GFCI).
 All portable power tools shall be stored in clean dry conditions. Power tools must
not be left lying around the job site where they could be damaged.
 Rotating tools must should be switched off and held until rotation has completely
stopped before they are set down.
 Tools must be disconnected before changing bits, blades, cutters, or wheels.
 The source of power should always be disconnected before accessories on a
portable tool are changed, and guard should be replaced or put in correct
adjustment before the tools is used again.
 A tool should not be left in an overhead place where there is a chance that the
cord or hose, if pulled, will cause the tool to fall.
 The tool cord or hose and the tool may be suspended by a tool balancer which
keeps them out of the operator’s way.
 Cord and hoses on the floor create a stumbling or tripping hazard.


Revision Date :
 They should be suspended over aisles or work areas, or if laid across the floor,
protected by wooden strips or special race ways.
 Do not lay cords or hoses over nails, bolts or sharp edges. They should also be
kept away from oil, hot surfaces, and chemicals.
 Power driven should be stored in secured places and not left in areas where they
may be struck by passers-by or otherwise activated.
 All electrical power tools must be inspected and color coded on a monthly basis.
 Power portable tools shall bear underwriter label "UL" label.
 Power portable hand tools such as grinders must have "Dead Man switch".
3.2.3 Pneumatic Tools

 An air compressor shall always be under the supervision of a competent person. It
should always be sighted in such place so as the have adequate ventilation.
Compressor shall not be permitted to operate in confined spaces without the
provision of adequate exhaust ventilation.
 All compressed air hoses shall be of the correct size to fit the tools being used.
Any joint in the hoses shall be made with the proper coupler. The hose length shall
be kept as short as possible and placed so as not to be subjected to damage.
 An air hose on the floor should be protected against trucks, and pedestrian by two
planks laid on either side of it or by a runway built over it. It is preferable, however,
to suspend hoses over aisles and work areas.
 Air hose from the tools should not be disconnected and used for cleaning
machines or removing dust from clothing.
 Air should be shut off before attempting to disconnect the air hose from the air line.
Any air pressure inside the line should also be release before disconnecting.
 If kinking or excessive wear of the hose occurs, it can be protected by a wrapping
of strip metal wire.
 Pneumatic tools require clean air to operate efficiently.
 During operation all air tools should be held firmly to prevent them spinning and
jumping. This pressure should be determined during the stopping process to
prevent injury to the operator’s feet and hand.
3.2.4 Individual Tools Precautions
Jack hammer and concrete breakers

 The tool bit retaining spring shall always be securely in position to prevent the bit
from dropping out. The bit must be kept sharp.
 The trigger should not be squeeze until the tools is in the work.


Revision Date :
 Required eye protection must be worn while using any pneumatic tools to prevent
hazards from flying chips. Where possible, screen should be set up to shield
person working nearby.
 Workers should wear hearing protection.
 Two jack hammers should be operated away from each other that are back to back
to prevent face cut from flying chips.
 The operators should wear safety shoes.
 The operator should maintain a firm grip with both hands and should stand in a
balance position.
Air Powered Grinder

This tool shall require the same type of guarding as electric grinder. Over speeding of
the wheel should be avoided.
Air Operated Nailer and Staplers
The principal hazard from these tools is the accidental discharge of the fastener. In
such instances, the fastener can become a dangerous projectile and inflict serious
injury at considerable distance.
Electrically Operated Tools

Electric shock is the chief hazard from electrically powered tools. Injury categories are
electric flash burns, minor shock, and shock resulting in death.
General Precautions:
 All electrically operated tools shall be rated and used at a voltage not exceeding
125 volts.
 Before any electrical tool is used, the supervisor shall ensure that the supply
voltage is within the range marked on the information plate on the tool.
 All electrically operated hand tools shall be properly grounded or be of the double
insulated type. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI) shall be properly installed.
 All tools shall be used with the trailing lead as short as possible.
 Each load shall be fitted with a grounded plug to fit the socket outlet on the
distribution load.
 Where it is necessary to make electrical splices, these shall be made with proper
connector blocks or by plug and socket connectors.
 Taped joints should be used.
 Electric cords of power tools should be inspected frequently and kept in good
condition, they should be of adequate wire size.
 Heavy duty plugs that clamp to the cord should be used to prevent strain on the
current carrying parts and the cords accidentally pulled.
 Electric cords should not be pulled.


Revision Date :
 Cords should be protected from sharp objects, heat and oil or solvents that might
damage or soften the insulation.
 Use only three wire extension cords that have three prong grounding-type plugs
and three pole receptacles that accept the pools plug.
 Damage or worn cords must be replaced immediately.
Maintenance and Storage

The position and maintenance of all tools shall be carried out at least once in every
week by an electrician and defects should be rectified and logged. All tools shall be
stored in a clean, dry place and a record of issue and receipt shall be maintained
by the storekeeper.
Grinders
All grinders shall be equipped with a protective guard which allows only the working
part of the wheel to be exposed. For portable grinding machines, the maximum
angular exposure of the periphery and sides of wheel should not be exceed 180
degrees and the top portion of the wheel should always be enclosed. Guards should
be adjustable so that operators will be inclined to make the correct adjustment rather
than remove the guard. However, the guard should be easily removable to facilitate
replacement of the wheel.
In addition to this mechanical guarding, the operator must wear safety goggles at all
time to prevent eye injuries from broken wheel and spokes.
The wheel should be kept away from water and oil, which might affect its balance, the
wheel should be protected against blows from other tools, and care should be
exercised not to strike the sides of a wheel against object or to drop the wheel.
Soldering Irons
Soldering irons are the source of burns and of illness resulting form inhalation of
fumes. Insulated, non combustible holders should be used to eliminate the fire hazard
and the danger of burns from accidental contact. Holders should be designated so
that employee cannot accidentally touch the hot icons if they should reach for them
without looking.
Exhaust facilities must be provided where lead soldering is done. Even if lead fumes
are not present in harmful quantities, it is desirable to exhaust the nuisance fumes and
smoke. Lead solder particles should not be allowed to accumulate on the floor and on
work tables.
Drills
Injuries commonly result from contact with the spindle or drill, breaking a drill, being
struck by insecurely clamped work, failure to replace pulley or gear guards etc. The
following guidelines are given:


Revision Date :
 When drills are used, the pieces of work should be clamped on or anchored to a
sturdy base to prevent whipping.
 Care should be taken not to drill too large a hole at one time. If this is not done, the
drill may bind on break through and the torque set up could twist the tools against
the user’s wrist.
 When the operator must guide the drill with a hand, the drill should be equipped
with a sleeve that fits over the drill bit.
 The drill should be held securely and at the proper angle, starting slowly and
increasing speed as needed after the start.
 When deep drills are being drilled, the drill should be frequently removed and the
chips cleaned out. If chips are allowed to pile up, the tool may jam.
 Sleeves should be in place to protect the operator’s hand and also serve as a limit
stop, if the drill should suddenly plunge through the material.
 Oversized bit should not be ground down to fit small electric drills, instead an
adopter should be used that will fit the large bit and provide extra power through a
speed reduction gear, however this again is an indication of improper drill size.
 Electric drills should be of the proper size for the job. If the drill has a side handle,
it should be used, a punch mark should be used to facilitate starting the drill and
bit.
3.2.5 Other Common Hand Tools
Open-End Wrenches
Open-end wrenches have strong jaws are satisfactory for medium-duty turning. They
are susceptible to slipping if they do not fit properly or used incorrectly.
Combination Wrenches
Combination wrenches have a box end and an open end. They are very handy for
speeding the turning with the open end and using the box for initial loosening or final
tightening.
Box and Socket Wrenches

These can be used where a heavy pull is necessary and safety is a consideration. Box
wrenches and socket wrenches completely encircle the nut, bolt or fitting and grip it at
all corners. Extension to secure greater leverage may easily cause the wrench head
to break, therefore such practice should not be allowed.
The correct tool should be used for a particular task, i.e. a pipe wrench should never
be used on nuts or bolts, the corners of which will break the teeth of the wrench,
thereby making it unsafe to use later on pipe and fitting. A wrench should not be
struck with a hammer nor used as a hammer unless it is a specialized type specially
designed for such use.
Pliers


Revision Date :
Pliers are often considered a general-purpose tool and are often misused for purposes
for which they are not designated. Pliers are meant for gripping and cutting
operations. Pliers should not be used as wrench because their jaws are flexible and
frequently slip when used for this work. Pliers also tend to round the corners of bolts
heads and parts of the lathe, the operator should always cross file. Use a vise,
whenever possible, to hold the object being filed.
Shovel
Shovel edges should be kept trimmed and handles should be checked for splinters.
Workers should wear safety shoes. Workers should have their feet well separated to
get good balance and spring in the knees. The leg muscle should take much of the
load.
To reduce the chance of injury, the ball of the foot not the rack should be used to
press the shovel in to clay or other stiff material. If the instep is used and the foot slip
off the shovel may enter through the worker’s shoes and into the foot.
Dipping the shoe a pail of water occasionally will help to keep it free from sticky
materials, making it easier to use and less likely to cause strain. Greasing or waxing
the shovel blade will also prevent some kind of materials from sticking.
When not in use, hang up shovels, stand them against a wall, or keep them in racks or
boxes. Shovel blades should not be allowed to become blunt turned, split, or jagged.
Shaft of shovel should be kept free from cracks and splinters.
Torsion Tools
Safe use of all wrenches requires the user always to be alert and prepared for the
possibility that the wrench may slip off the fastener, the fastener may suddenly turn
free, the wrench may break or the fasten may break.
The user should always be braced in such a way that should the wrench become free
from any reason, the user will not lose balance and be injured by falling into moving
machinery or falling off a platform. The user should always inspect a wrench for flaws.
Previous overloading or misuse of the tools may have weakened it to the point that it
will not even carry a normal load. The user should be safely braced when pulling hard
on a wrench.
Wrench should not be altered to change their size or reduce their dimension to fit into
close quarters. Instead a wrench of the correct size and fit should be used. It is unsafe
practice to try to make the wrong wrench fit by using shims.
Saws
Care should be taken to select the correct saw for the work to do. For cutting across
the grain of the wood, used a cross cut saw, for cutting with the grain, use a ripping
saw. For fast cross cut work on green wood, use a course (4 to 5 points per inch) saw;
for smooth accurate cutting of dry. Saws should be kept sharp and the teeth kept well
set to prevent binding in the timber which can cause the blade to buckle.


Revision Date :
When not in use, saws should be wiped off with an oily rag and kept in racks or hung
by the handle to prevent the teeth from being dulled. Do not drop a saw. For wood,
use a fine saw (8 to 10 point per inch) the number of point per inch is stamped on the
blade.
Files
Selection of the right kind of files will prevent injuries, lengthen the life of the file, and
increase production. A file cleaning card or brush should be used to keep the file in
peak condition. Files should not be hammered or used as a pry. Such abuse
frequently result in the file’s chipping or breaking, causing an injury to the user.
The correct way to hold a file for light work is to grasp the handle firmly in one hand
and use the thumb and forefinger of the other to guide the point, using smooth file
strokes.
A file should never be used without a smooth, crack-free handle, otherwise, if the file
binds, the tang may puncture the palm of the hand, the wrist, or other part of the body.
Under some condition, a clamp-on, raised offset handle can provide extra clearance
for the hands.
Files should not be on lathe stock turning at high speeds (faster the three turns per file
stroke), because the end of the file may strike the chuck, dog, of face plate and throw
the file (or metal chip) back the operator and inflict serious injury. The operator must
avoid contact with the turning wheels.
Tap and Die Work

Tap and die works requires certain precautions. The work should be firmly mounted in
the vise. A top wrench of the proper size should be secured. Steady downward
pressure should be applied on the taper tap. Excessive pressure causes the tap to
enter the hole at an angle or bind the tap causing it to break. A proper size hole must
be made for the tap. The tap should be lubricated as necessary.
Keep hands away from broken tap ends. Broken taps should be removed with a tap
extractor. If a broken tap is removed by using a prick punch or a chisel and hammer,
the worker should wear a safety goggles. When treads are being cut with a hand die,
the hands and arms should be kept clear of the sharp threads coming through the die,
and metal cuttings should be cleared away with a brush.
Hacksaws
Hacksaw should be adjusted and tightened in the frame to prevent buckling and
breaking, but should not be so tight that the pins that support the blades. Install blade
with teeth pointing forward. Blades with 14 teeth to the inch should be used for cutting
soft metal; 18 teeth for tool steel iron pipe, hard metal, and general shop use, 24 teeth
for drill rods, sheet metal, copper and brass, and tubing, and 32 teeth for thin metal


Revision Date :
(less than 18 gauge or 1.2 mm) and tubing. When thin metal are cut, make sure that
at least two teeth are in contact with the surface being cut.
Pressure should be applied on the forward stroke only. Lift the saw slightly and pull
back in the cut lightly to protect the teeth. Cutting speed of 40 to 60 strokes per
minutes is recommended. If the blade is twisted or too much pressure is applied, the
blade may break and cause injury to the hands or arms of the used. Do not continue
an old cut after changing to a new blade, it may bend and break because the set of
the teeth on the new blade will be thicker than that of used blade.
Chisels
Cold chisel have a cutting edge at one end for cutting, shaping and removing metal
softer than the cutting edge itself and a struck face on the opposite end. Selection of a
cold chisel shall be based on the materials to be cut, the size and the shape of the
tool, and the depth of the cut to be made. The chisel should be heavy enough so that
it will not buckle or spring when struck. A chisel, only large enough for the job, should
be selected so that the blade is used rather than only the point or corner.
Cutting edge should be kept sharp at all times and the original shape and angle
maintained. Re-sharpened cold chisels should be suitably hardened and tempered to
maintain them in a safe working condition. The chisel head will mushroom in use. As
soon as mushrooming is observed, the head should be reground with a slight taper
around the edge to prevent chipping and reduce the tendency to re-mushroom.
Eye protection should be worn at all times when a cold chisel is used. When shearing
and chipping with a cold chisel, the worker should hold the tool at an angle that
permits one bevel of cutting edge to be flat against the shearing plane. On jobs where
if is necessary to use a sledge hammer for striking the chisel, the chisel should be
held by a second person using a pair of tongs. Wood chisels should also be
maintained in a sharp condition so that minimum pressure is exerted when making a
cut. If the chisel is to be struck, only a wooden or soft mallet should be used.
Hammers
Hammers are made in various types and sized, with varying degrees of hardness and
different configuration for specific purposed. They should be selected for their
intended use and used only for those purposes.
Proper use of practically all types involves certain basic rules. The following are some
of these rules:
 Safety goggles should always be worn to protect eyes.
 A hammer blow should always be struck squarely with the hammer striking face
parallel with the surface being struck. Always avoid glancing blows and over
strikes.
 When striking another tool (chisel, punch, wedge, etc.) the striking face of the
hammer should have a diameter approximately 3/8” (9mm) larger than the struck
face of the tool.


Revision Date :
 Always use a hammer of suitable size and weight for the job. Don’t use a tack
hammer to drive a spike, nor a sledge to drive a tack.
 Never use a hammer to strike another hammer.
 Never use a hammer to loose or damage handle.
 Discard any hammer if it shows dents, cracks, chips, mushrooming or excessive
wear. Redressing is not recommended.
 Wooden handles of hammer should be of the best straight grained materials and
free from silvers. Alternate materials such as fiber glass or steel with a rubber
sleeve may be used.
 Hammer head should be secured to wooden handles with proper wedges
Screw Drivers
Screw drivers is probably the most commonly used and abused tools. The unsafe
practice of using screw drivers for punches, wedges, pinch bars or pries must be
stopped. If used in such manner, they can cause injury and become unfit for the work
they are intended to do. Furthermore, a broken handle bent blade, dull or twisted tip
may cause a screw driver to slip out of the slot and cause a hand injury.
The following pointers are given:
 A screw driver tip should be selected to fit the screw. A sharp square edged bit will
not slip as easily as a dull, rounded one and requires less pressure.
 When putting in a screw, the work should be help in a vise or laid on a flat surface.
This practice will lessen the chances of injury to the hands if the screwdriver
should slip from the work.
 When it is necessary to work around electrical current - bearing equipment, use an
insulated screw driver. However, the handle, insulated with dielectric materials, is
intended only as a secondary protection.
Insulated blades are also intended only as a protective measure against shorting out
components. Be sure electrical current is off before beginning work.
3.2.6 Maintenance and Inspection of hand tools

No dull or damaged tool should be returned to stock, it should be removed from
services. The Tool may be forwarded to the engineering department who shall asses
the possibility of repair, and if so warranted, the tool can be considered for appropriate
repair by competent repair persons and/or tool repair shop.
3.2.7 Selection of Tools

The majority of tool-related accidents are caused by not selecting the correct tools for
the job. It is therefore essential that the correct type, size, and weight of tool should be
decided upon before any work is carried out.


Revision Date :
While there are many tools capable of doing a job, proper selection means choosing
the tools that can be most safety used by the employee while adequately performing
the task. If power is available, power tool should be considered.
Error, accidents and damage to the job will result when improper tools are used. For
example, an adequate wrench can tighten a nut but it would be better if the employee
used a box end or a socket wrench of the proper size.
3.2.8 Use of Hand Tools

The misuse of common hand tools is a source of injury to industrial workers. Failure to
observe one or more of the following five safe practices accounts for most hand and
powered hand tool accident.
 Always wear safety goggles to protect the eyes. In operations requiring the use of
hand and portable power tools, particles are likely to fly. Therefore, it is essential
that safety goggles, or equivalent eye protection, be worn by the machine operator
and his assistants, including other personnel in the immediate vicinity.
 Select the right tools for the job.
 Do not perform unsafe tool practices such as:
o Striking hardened surfaces with tool that may break, shatter or split
o Striking faces of the tools together (such as using any hammer to strike another
hammer or hatchet)
o Using a claw hammer to strike a steel chisel
o using a wrench or pliers for a hammer
o Using pliers instead of the proper wrench.
 Keep tools in good condition. Unsafe tools include wrenches with cracked or work
jaws, screw drivers with broken tips, or split or broken handles, hammers with
chipped, mushroomed, or loose heads, broken or split handles, mushroomed
heads on chisels, dull saws and extension cords or electric tools with broken plugs
improper or removed grounding system, or split insulation.
 Some common causes of accident are:
o Screw drivers applied to object s held in the hand, knives pulled toward the
body, failure to ground electrical equipment and nail hammer striking
hardened tools.
 Keep tools in a safe place. Many accidents have been caused by tools falling from
overhead and by knives, chisels, and other sharp tools carried in the pocket or left
in toolboxes with cutting edges exposed.
3.2.9 Purchasing Hand Tools


Revision Date :
The person doing the purchasing should always take into consideration the safety
features of each product offered for sale. Hand tools should be carefully inspected
including the small tools by equipment department before they are approved for
purchase or placed on an approved purchasing list. An appropriate list of safety
factors that might be considered in the selection of hand tools and portables power
tools are as follows:
Electrically powered tools should be equipped with automatic cut off (dead-man
control switch). Control switches should be of sturdy operations and adequately
protected to prevent accidental starting of the hand tool. All cords on electrically
powered tools should be equipped with the ground wires. Handles of hammers,
shovels, axes, and picks should be of straight- grained wood free from slivers and
preferably from ash, hickory or maple. Proper tempering and the use of the correct
grade of steel in the heads of hammers, chisels, stamps, punches, and other tools
should be carefully considered. Design and operations should be considered in terms
of safe use. Methods of packing and shipping employed by the vendor should be
considered to preclude damage of the hand tools in transit.
3.2.10 Hand Tools Inspection, Repair & Storage
All hand tools shall be inspected when they arrive at the tool crib. Preferably the tool
crib attendant should be responsible for these inspections. In addition to this, periodic
inspection should cover housekeeping in the tool supply room, tool maintenance,
service handling routine and condition of tools.
All hand tools shall be regularly inspected both before storage and after use. If wear or
damage is observed the tools should be withdrawn from used from repair or disposal.
The storekeeper should maintain a record of all tools issued, repaired and withdrawn
from use. This can be done with the connection of small tools and equipment foreman.
Hand tools shall be stored in proper racks and boxes.
3.2.11 Tool Boxes & Carrying of Tools
Tool boxes are meant to hold tools, not to stand on, use as an anvil, a sawhorse, or to
store lunch. Tool boxes are made of plastic or steel. In the case of steel toolboxes, all
seams should be welded and smooth with no protruding edges to catch clothing or
hands. A tool box will have a catch or a hasp at each end and should be locked with
either a pad lock or its own built in lock.
Employee should never carry tools in any way that might interfere with their freely
using both hands on a ladder or while climbing on a structure. A strong bag, bucket, or
similar container should be used to hoist tools from the ground to the job. Tools should
be returned to the tools box properly after use and not carried in pockets or dropped to
the ground.
Chisel, screw drivers and pointed tools should never be carried edge or point up in a
workers pocket. They should be carried in a tool box, a cart, or in a carrying tool box.
A cart or in carrying belt like that used by electrician and steel workers, in a pocket
tool pouch, or in the hand with point and cutting edges away from the body. Tools
should be handled from one employee to another, never thrown. Edged or pointed
tools should be passed, preferably in their carrying case, with the handle toward the
receiver. Workers carrying tools on their shoulders should pay close attention to


Revision Date :
clearances when turning around and should handle the tools so that they will not strike
others.
3.3 WELDING & CUTTING EQUIPMENT
3.3.1 General
Welding and cutting are safe operation if carried out in the correct manner. Where
equipment is defective or there is no proper ventilation in the working place, then
hazard will arise. For the Welders performing the welding, only pre-qualified and
holders of Test Certificates accredited by CLIENT is permitted to perform welding for a
particular approved Welding Procedure Specification (WPS).
Hazards generally associated with welding are hot sparks, arc radiation, air
contamination, electrical shock, chipping slag, and the handling of compressed gases.
In addition there is also the potential for fire or explosion in the welding area which
puts the worker at risk. This section outlines the principle involved and the precautions
to be taken in welding and cutting operations.
3.3.2 Environmental Factors

Air Contamination
The most significant hazard in the welding process is the generation of fumes and
gases. The amount of fumes and gases involved will depend on the welding process,
the base material, the filler materials, and the shielding if any.
The toxicity of the contaminant depends primarily upon their concentration and upon
the physiological responses of the human body.
Sampling by a qualified person may be necessary to fully identify the fumes and
gases actually being given off in a specific operation. Associated hazards on welding
to affected persons are:
Effect of Toxic Gases

Exposure to various toxic gases generated during welding processes may produce
one or more of the following:
 Inflammation of the lungs (chemical pneumoconiosis)
 Pulmonary oedema (swelling and accumulation of fluids)
 Emphysema (loss of elasticity of the lungs) A very small percentage of
emphysema is caused by occupational exposure
 Chronic bronchitis
 Asphyxiation.
 Metal fume fever.
Effects of Light Rays

Electric arcs and gas flames both produce ultraviolet and infrared rays which have a
harmful effect on the eyes and skin for continued or repeated ultraviolet exposure. The
usual effect of ultra violet is to “sun burn” the surface of the eyes which is painful and
disabling, but temporary in most instances.


Revision Date :
Permanent eye injury may result from looking directly into powerful arc without eye
protection, due to the effect of visible and near infrared radiation. Ultraviolet may also
produce the same effects on the skin as a severe burn.
Production of ultraviolet radiation is high in gas shielded arc welding. For example, a
shield of argon gas around the arc doubles the intensity of the ultraviolet radiation,
and with the greater current densities required, the intensity may be five to thirty times
as great as with non-shielding welding such as covered electrode or gas shielded
metal arc welding.
Infrared radiation has the effect of heating the tissue with which it comes in contact. If
the heat is not enough to cause an ordinary thermal burn, there is no harm.
Noise
In welding and cutting and the associated operation, noise levels may exceed the
permissible limits. Workers must protect their ears with ear plug and / or muffs.
Fire Hazards
The arc or flame of the welding /cutting may cause fire, by heat conduction through
the metals being welded or cut, by molten slag and metal from the cut or by sparks
that fly from the work-unsafe cutting and welding practices are serious problem
throughout industry. Cutting and welding fires account for 7 % of all industrial fires and
12 % of all industrial fire losses.
3.3.3 Gas Welding and Cutting
Oxy Acetylene Equipment and Use

A gas welding process unit metals by heating them with the flame from the
combustion of a fuel gas. Welding sometimes includes the use of pressure and a filler
metal. A gas cutting process severs or removes metal by melting the metal. In this
instance we are concerned with gas welding processes using oxygen and acetylene.
Gases
Oxygen (O2) is colourless and odourless. Oxygen it promotes and accentuates rapid
combustion and is thus a fire hazard. It is non-toxic supports life.
Acetylene (C2H2) has a distinct odour often likened to that of garlic or sour apples. It
consists of 92.3 % by weight of carbon and 7.7 % by weight of hydrogen.
It is explosive when mixed with oxygen over wide range of level (2½% - 81%).
Acetylene burn with oxygen can produce a higher flame temperature than any other
commercial gas. Acetylene is toxic.
Free acetylene becomes unstable at pressure above 15 psig. Inside the cylinder
acetylene is dissolved in acetone to prevent internal explosion.
The range of flammable limits of acetylene (2.5 to 81 % acetylene in air) is greater
than that of other commonly used gas which increases the hazard.
3.3.4 Precautions


Revision Date :
Welders shall ensure that welding areas are fully “boxed in” with non-combustible
materials. Written permission is required for surface preparation work as soon as
welding permit is required specific object.
3.3.5 Handling and Storage of Cylinder

Most of the gases used for welding and cutting are purchased in cylinder. Serious
accident may result from the misuse, abuse or mishandling of compressed gas
cylinder. Observance of the following rules will help control hazards in the storage and
handling of compressed gas cylinders.
 Do not remove or change numbers or marks stamped on cylinders.
 Cylinders must not be rolled or dragged. Cylinders shall be transported on a hand
trolley or motor vehicle, suitably secured to avoid them from falling.
 Protect cylinder from cuts or abrasions.
 Where cylinders must be handled by a crane or derrick, as on operations jobs,
carry them in a cradle or suitable platform and take extreme care that they are not
dropped or bumped. Do not use slings
 Do not drop cylinders or let them strike each other violently.
 Do not use cylinder for rollers, support or any purpose other than to contain gas.
 Do not tamper with safety devices in valves or on cylinders.
 When empty cylinders are to be returned to the vendors mark them EMPTY with
chalk. Close the valve and replace the valve protection caps, if the cylinder is
designed to accept a cap.
 A slight pressure should be made in them to prevent moisture from entering.
 Always consider cylinder as being full and handle them with corresponding care.
Accident have resulted when container under partial pressure were thought to be
empty.
 The fusible safety plugs on acetylene cylinders melt at about the boiling point of
water
 When handling cylinder, hands and clothing should be free from grit grease and
oil. This prevent slipping and grit and grease from entering valves. Cylinders
should never be lifted by their valves since they are not designed to take such
stress.
3.3.6 Storage
 Cylinder should be stored in an upright position in a safe, dry, well ventilated place
prepared and reserved for the purpose. Flammable substance such as oil and
volatile liquids should not be stored in the same area. Cylinder should not be
stored near places where they can be knocked down or damage.
 Oxygen cylinders should not be stored within 20 feet (6 M) of cylinders containing
flammable gases or the location of other highly combustible materials. If closer


Revision Date :
than 20 ft. cylinders should be separated by a fire resistive partition at least 5 ft.
high, having a fire resistance rating of at least 30 minutes.
 All cylinders should be stored with the valve end up in an upright position. To
prevent rusting, the cylinder, stored in the open should be protected from ground
contact, extreme of weather, and the direct rays of the sun.
 Cylinders are not designed for temperature in excess of 130 degree Fahrenheit.
Accordingly they should not be stored near sources of heat such as radiators of
furnaces or near highly flammable substances, like gasoline.
 Cylinders storage rooms and buildings must be well ventilated and open flame and
smoking must be prohibited. Storage room should have no other occupancy.
 Cylinder storage should be planned so that cylinder will be used in the order in
which they are received from the supplier, empty and full cylinder should be stored.
 Separately, with empty cylinder being plainly identified as such to avoid confusion.
Group together empty cylinder which have held the same contents.
 Storage room for cylinder containing flammable gases should be well ventilated to
prevent the accumulation of explosive concentration of gas. No source of ignition
should be permitted. Smoking should be prohibited. Wiring should be in conduit
 Electrical lights should be in fixed position and enclosed in glass or other
transparent materials to prevent gas from contacting lighted sockets or lamps and
should be equipped with guards to prevent breakage. Electric switches should be
located outside the room.
3.3.7 Using Cylinder

The safe procedures for the use of compressed gas cylinder include:
 Only soapy water should be used to check for leaks. Presence of a leak is often
indicated by a hissing sound or by the nature of the torch flame. Cylinders and
valves should be kept clean. Grit, grease, oil and dirty water around the valve
sockets and connection prevent the proper formation of gas tight - joints.
 The operator should stand well clear when gas is being deliberately blown through
to clear valves and should never be attempted unless the valve and opening are
pointed away from the operator and other persons. This should never be done
near other welding work or near sparks, open flames, or other possible sources of
ignition.
 Hoses should be kept for one type of gas and color coded for identification. They
should be examined before use for any signs of splitting which might give rise to
leakage. All connection should be made by clips of crimps.
 Connection and check valves should be regularly examined to detect leakage.
Equipment should be fitted with the correct pressure regulator and check should
be made to ensure that the regulator is working properly; the torch nozzle should
be kept tight.


Revision Date :
 An acetylene cylinder valve wrench shall be available at all times for the cylinder in
use. The wrench should be kept in position on the valve.
 Unless the cylinder valve has first been closed tightly, do not attempt to stop a leak
between the cylinder and regulator by tightening the union nut.
 Means of ignition should be readily available. A flint gun is to be used for lighting
torches. Do not use matches or cigarette lighters.
 Acetylene can form explosive compounds in contact with certain metals or alloys
particularly copper or silver. Joint fittings or lines made of copper should not be
 Used and acetylene should not be allowed to come into contact with extraneous
copper pipe work or tubing. No valves or metal fitting used with acetylene should
be made of copper, brass or other copper containing alloys.
 It is dangerous to let the torch flame come into contact with the cylinder or for the
lighted torch itself to be hung on the regulators. It is equally dangerous to rest blow
pipes, even extinguished ones, on old drums. “Empty drums which have contained
low flash point liquids are known to have become lethal bombs when a hot welding
torch was laid down on them.
 Never strike an arc or tap an electrode against a cylinder.
 Whenever possible the cylinder in use should be kept upright on a custom built
stand fitted with a bracket to accommodate the hoses and equipment. Unless the
cylinder valve is protected by a recess in the head, the metal cap should keep in
place to protect the valve when the cylinder is not connected for use.
 Keep oxygen cylinder and fitting away form oil and grease and do not handle them
with oily hands, gloves, or clothing.
 Make sure the threads on a regular or union correspond to those on the cylinder
valve outlet. Do not force connections that do not fit.
 Open cylinder valves slowly. A cylinder not provided with a hand wheel valve
should be opened with a spindle key or a special key or a special wrench or other
tool provided or approved by the gas supplier.
 Small fires at the cylinder should be extinguished, if possible, by closing the
cylinder valve. In case of a large fire or if extinguishment is not possible, evacuate
and use a heavy stream of water to fight fire.
 Use regulators and pressure gauge only with gases for which they are designed
and intended. Do not attempt to repair or alter cylinder, valves or attachments. This
work should be done only by the manufacturer.
 Never use oxygen as a substitute for compressed air in pneumatic tools, in oil
preheating burners, to start internal combustion engine, or to dust clothing. Use it
only for the purpose for which it is intended.
 Cylinder valve shall be closed when the work is finished.
 Never bring cylinder into tanks or unventilated rooms or other closed quarters.


Revision Date :
3.3.8 Hose and Hose Connection

Oxygen and acetylene hoses should be different colors or otherwise identified and
distinguished from each other. Red is the generally recognized color for the fuel hose
and green for oxygen hose.
Following are suggestion for the safe use of hose in welding and cutting operation:
 Do not use unnecessarily long hose - it takes too long to purge. When long hose
must be used, see that it does not become kinked or tangled and that it is
protected from being run over by trucks or otherwise damaged. Where long hose
must be used in areas exposed to vehicular or pedestrian traffic, suspend it high
enough overhead to permit unobstructed passage.
 Protect the hose that must be laid on the floor or ground so that they will not
interfere with the safe passage or become damaged or entangled.
 Examine the hose periodically and frequently for leaks and worn places and check
hose connection. Test for leaks by immersing the hose under normal working
pressure in water.
 Repair leaks at once, besides being a waste escaping fuel gas may become
ignited and start a serious fire, it may also set fire to the welders clothing. Repair
hose leaks by cutting the hose and inserting a splice. Don’t try to repair leaks hose
by taping.
 A single hose having more than one gas passage shall not be used. When oxygen
and acetylene hoses are taped together for convenience and to prevent tangling
not more than 4” of each 21” of hose should be taped.
 The use of those with an external metallic covering is not recommended. In some
machine process and in certain type of operation, hose with an inner metallic
reinforcement, which is exposed neither to the gas passage nor to the outside
atmosphere, is acceptable.
 Flash back devices between torch and hose can prevent burn back into hoses and
regulators. If a flash back occurs and burns the hose, discard the burned section.
 Protect hose from sparks, hot slag, other hot objects and grease and oil. Strike
hose in a cool place.
3.3.9 Torches
Torches are constructed of metal casting, forging and tubing. Usually they are made
of brass or bronze, but stainless steel may also be used. They should be of
substantial design to withstand the rough handling they sometimes receive. The gases
enter the torch by separate inlets go through valves to the mixing chambers and then
to the outlet orifice, located at the torch tip.
In the operation of the torch several precautions should be observed:
 Select the proper welding head or mixer tip or cutting nozzle and screw it firmly
into the torch.


Revision Date :
 Before changing torches, shut off the gas at the pressure reducing regulators and
not by crimping the hose.
 To discontinue welding or cutting for a few minutes, closing only the torch valves is
permissible. If the welding or cutting is to be stopped for a longer period proceed
as follows:
 Close oxygen and acetylene cylinder valves.
 Open torch valves to relieve all gas pressure - adjusting screws.
 Do not use matches to light torch, use a friction lighter or other suitable source of
ignition.
 When lighting, point the torch tip so that no one will be burned when the gas
ignites.
 Never put down the torch until the gases have been completely shut off. Do not
hang torch from regular or other equipment so that they come in contact with the
sides of the gas cylinders.
 When extinguishing the flame, close the acetylene and oxygen valves on the other
recommended by the torch manufacturer.
3.3.10 Faults (Gas Welding and Cutting)

It is common for minor “explosion” to occur during welding or cutting. Some are more
frightening than harmful but some can lead to very dangerous conditions.
A. Snap Out Can Occur During Use When:

 Both regulators at incorrect pressure.
 Torch nozzle obstructed.
 Nozzle held too close to the work.
Corrective Action
 Completely shutdown torch valves.
 Check regulators setting.
 Check cylinder pressure.
 Check nozzle.
 Re-light.
 Ensure adequate gas flow.
B. Back Fire Can Occur On Lighting Up When:

 Regulator not set for to correct pressure.
 Light applied before flow of gas mixture properly establish.


Revision Date :
Corrective Action
 Close both torch valves, oxygen first.
 Check and adjust regulator setting.
 Check torch.
 Re-light, when gas flow is properly established.
C. Back Fire Can Occur During Use When:

 Regulators not set to correct pressure.
 Nozzle obstructed.
 Nozzle over heated.
Corrective Action
 Close both torch valves, oxygen first
 Check and adjust regulators settings.
 Cool torch and check nozzle orifice for obstruction.
 Re-light.
A flash back is the most dangerous of the occurrences, the cause being mixed gases
in the hoses. Usually this mixing of gases occurs when the hoses have been
disconnected from regulators or torches or when a new hose is being used for the first
time. Sometimes it is due to loose connection usually one of the hoses will have bust
and possibly ignited.
3.3.11 General Preventive Action

 Ensure all connections are tight.
 Ensure cylinder valves are open and torch valves closed.
 Ensure the flashback arrestor is installed from torch and regulator
 Set regulators to the required pressure.
 Purge each hose separately and consecutively by opening the torch valve and
allowing gas to flow for sufficient time to ensure only pure gas remains in the
hoses.
 Close the valve for each gas as the exercise is completed.
 This exercise should be carried out only in the open or in extremely well ventilated
areas.
3.3.12 General Corrective Action


Revision Date :
 Close both torch valves.

 Close both cylinder valves.
 Extinguish hose if alight.
 Remove acetylene regulator if “bull nose” is sooty, suspect a dangerous condition
and carry out safety procedure advised under “heated cylinder”
3.3.13 Heated Cylinder

Where the acetylene cylinder becomes accidentally heated or gets hot from severe
back fire through faulty equipment, operators must:
 Raise the alarm.
 Remove any external source of heat.
 Shut off valves, detached regulator and other fittings.
 Drag cylinder to an open area.
 Keep applying water or immerse in any possible way until cool.
 Open valve fully and keep applying water until cylinder is empty.
3.3.14 Electric Arc Welding

Arc welding is a process for joining metals by heating with the electric arc. The
process includes shielding, welding using an inert gas to blanket the weld. For arc
welding two welding leads are required from the source of current supply. Usually one
end is connected to the work and the other to the electrode holder.
3.3.15 Power Supply

If a gasoline powered welding generator is used inside a building or in a confined
area, the engine exhaust should lead to the outside atmosphere. Otherwise carbon
monoxide and other toxic gases may accumulate. With small diameter electrodes
used for manual arc welding, current values vary from 10 to 50 amps. For most
manual welding, because the welder must withstand the heat, current values should
not exceed 500 to 600 amps.
Appropriate measures shall be implemented to avoid spillage of fuel of generator sets.
Refuse and Proper bonding and grounding of all generator sets and welding machines
shall be done.
Automatic machine arc welding may use current values up to 200 amps or even
higher on specials application. Either AC or DC may be used for arc welding or cutting
of any kind.
3.3.16 VOLTAGE
The voltage across the welding arc varies from 15 to 40 volts, depending on the type
and size of electrodes used. The welding circuit must supply somewhat higher voltage
to strike the arc. This voltage is called the open circuit voltage. After arc is established
the open circuit voltage drops to a value about equal to the arc voltage plus the lead


Revision Date :
voltage drop. The open circuit voltage on DC welding machines should be less than
100 volts. For AC Transformer welding machines the maximum open circuit voltage
should be 80 volts on manuals and 100 volts on automatics.
Heavy duty AC welding machines will have an open circuit voltage of 75 to 80 volts
with a special tap to provide for 100 volts where necessary. The tap should not be
accessible to the welder for current adjustment but should be under the control of a
responsible electrician or supervisor. Open circuit voltage should be as low as 50 volts
on small AC welding machines used without expert supervision.
It is worth recalling here that, whereas the shock produce by D.C. tends to throw the
victim away from the point of contact, the shock produce by A.C. has the opposite
effect and make the victim holds on to it. For these reasons, D.C should be used for
welding operation us any situation where the effect of electric shock is likely to be
extreme such as in dump as in confirmed space (tanks boilers etc.). In each welding
circuit there are three main connections, the welding lead, the welding return, and the
welding ground.
The following guidelines are further given:
 The welding lead is the conductor carrying the current back from the point of
supply to the electrode holder.
 The welding return is the conductor carrying the current back from the work to the
point of supply. Its conductivity should at least equal that of the welding lead.
 The welding return should be used to ground the metal case of the regulators. The
high current capacity is essential because all the current fed to the arc has to be
conducted back to the supply point. The current involved could be as high as 300
amps on hand welding operation.
 The welding ground is essential to keep the work and anything in contact with it at
ground potential. It should be of low impedance so that there can be no rise in the
potential of the work and so that sufficient fault current passes quickly enough to
cut off the supply system by a separate substantial conductor.
 Welding cable insulation needs to be robust enough, to withstand normal treatment
over rough ground and the wear inflicted by root and vehicular traffic.
 Electrodes holder should be constructed to accommodate all sizes of electrodes
and with an ejector for hot, spect stubs to safeguard welder’s hands. Holders
should be unplugged when not in use.
 A shield should be fitted between electrode holder and handle to prevent live
elements from being touched. The handle itself should be made of non flammable
insulating materials and free from joints or holes.
 It is essential that an operator should be able to unplug his electrode holder
without moving his position or before changing to a new position. Putting down live
gear in the course of work or handling live gear when moving position can be
highly dangerous if any external metallic contact is made.
3.3.17 Protection against Electric Shock


Revision Date :
Although open circuit voltage on stand arc welding units is not high compared to those
of other processes, they cannot be neglected as a potential hazard. Normally the work
set up is such that the work is grounded and unless care is exercised, the welder or
operator can easily become grounded.
The welder or welding operator shall be insulated from both the work and the metal
electrode and other. The bare metal part of an electrode or electrode holder should
never be permitted to touch the operator bare skin or wet clothing. Some specific
precautions for prevention of electric shock are:
 In confined places, cover or arrange cable to prevent contact with falling sparks
 Never change electrode with bare hands or wet gloves or when standing on wet
floors or grounded surfaces.
 Ground the frames of welding units, portables or stationary.
 If a cable (either work lead or electrode lead) becomes worn, exposing bare
conductors, it may be repaired if the insulation repair on work lead cables is
equivalent in insulation to the original cable covering
 Keep welding cables dry and free of grease and oil to prevent premature
breakdown of the insulation.
 Suspend cable on substantial overhead support if the cable must be run some
distance from the welding unit. Protect cable that must be laid on the floor or
ground so that they will not interfere with safe passage or become damage or
entangled.
 Take special care to keep welding cables away from power supply cables or high
tension wires.
 Never coil or loop welding cable around the body.
3.3.18 General Safety Precautions for Welding and Cutting

No welding or burning shall be carried out on barrels, tanks, piping or other systems
without first obtaining an approval from the concerned area proponent, conducting gas
test and getting a hot work permit. Other precautions are to be followed, i.e.:
 Before starting the work, the work area must be inspected to ensure that sparks or
molten metal won’t fall on combustible materials.
 Welding or cutting should not be done in or near room containing flammable or
combustible liquids or gases.
 Suitable fire extinguishing equipment should be readily available in the work area.
 Approved eye protection must be worn with the suitable filter lenses.
 Never weld or burn barrels, tanks, piping or other system which may have
contained either combustible or unknown products without first obtaining the
approval from the safety representative or other responsible authority.
 Appropriate gloves must be worn.
 The frames of all welding machines must be grounded.


Revision Date :
 When a crescent or special wrench is required to operate the acetylene cylinder

valve, the wrench must be kept in position on the valve.
 When welding and cutting is carried out in confined areas for a long time, the
space shall be well ventilated.
 During the work the concentration of oxygen in air must be greater than 18 %.
When working in a confined area, the workers should at least be in pair to avoid
accidents.
 The confined area should be tested free from flammable gases or vapors.
 Hot work should be done in or near closed tanks that have contained flammable
materials until the tanks have been thoroughly drained and purged, and tested free
from flammable gases or vapors.
 Welding machines shall be placed 15 cm above the ground to keep them dry.
 Welding machines shall be placed level secured with a suitable wedge to keep
them in horizontal position.
 Whenever welding works is suspended or the welder leaves the operations area,
the switches shall be turned off and the welding rod disconnected from the holder.
 For gas work, the pressure gauges with cracked glass or damage regulators shall
be renewed.
 When welding or cutting materials that is supported by a crane, a shield or an
effective screen should be provided to protect the suspension ropes or chains.
 Whenever possible, all combustible materials should be removed from the work
area.
 If the combustible materials cannot be removed from the work area, it should be
covered with an asbestos blanket or some similar fire proof materials or sheet
metal.
 Sparks hot metal or slag should not be allowed to fall on, welding cables hoses or
gas cylinder.
 Sparks hot metal or slag should not be allowed to fall through any floor opening
onto combustible materials.
 Suitable metal bins should be provided for spend electrode stubs as they are
usually hot when discarded and can easily cause a fire.
 Wood or any combustible materials should not be used for cribbing or packing
during hot work operation.
 After the completion of the job, the work area should be wet down using water
spray.
 A fire watcher should be stationed at or neat any hot work operation and the fire
watch should continue for at least 30 minutes after the job is completed.


Revision Date :
3.3.19 Welding and Cutting Tanks and Vessels

Careful test should be made to establish that the tank is free from explosive and
flammable vapours or substances. If there is any doubt, there is known to have any
kind of flammable or explosive content it should be cleaned thoroughly prior to welding
and cutting.
Extreme care should be taken in considering methods of tanks welding and cutting as
these jobs are hazardous operations unless correct safety measures are taken. The
use of oxygen for blowing out container and small tanks is forbidden
3.3.20 Confined Spaces
It is vital that forced ventilation be maintained in confined spaces at all times. Air lines
may be needed for men working inside such places.
No gas cylinder should ever be allowed into such an area. Where work in confined
spaces has to take place over several days, the hoses and equipment should be
taken outside overnight in the case of any leakage that could occur, resulting in a built
up of gas.
In all cases, a confined space work permit must be obtained and all necessary safety
precautions taken before any work is done. Work in confined space shall be
considered dangerous and critical, hence utmost care should be taken to ensure no
personnel are injured during activities involving confined space entry.
3.3.21 Personal Protection Required For Welding and Cutting

 Helmets, hand shields and head shields are necessary to protect eyes and face
against head and the effect of intense light emitted by an electric arc.
 Goggles are required to protect the eyes of the welder from pieces of flying slag
when chipping takes place. The goggles should be worn under the regular welding
head shield.
 They should be fitted with opaque side pieces.
 Electric welding operation must be effectively screened to prevent nearby
personnel from being affected by harmful light radiation.
 Screens should be of fire resistant materials or should be suitably treated with a
fire resistant compound.
 Gloves are necessary protection to the hands against heat, sparks, molten metal
and radiation. Leather, suitable reinforced at point of maximum wear, is the
materials most generally worn. Gloves should be long enough to protect wrists and
forearms.
 Safety boots and leggings are essentials to provide effective protection against
heat sparks and falling metal.


Revision Date :
3.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS & EQUIPMENT
3.4.1 General
Electricity has long been recognized as a serious workplace hazard specially
operations industry, exposing employees to such dangers as electric shock,
electrocution, fires, and explosions.
ICOM recognizes the important role of these procedures in defining basic
requirements for safety in electrical installations. In addition, safety procedures for
electrical installations are aimed to make it easier for employers and employees to use
and understand.
Any electrical installation & equipment which may be related to ICOM Contract Scope
of Work and as provide by the same contract shall foregoing the following procedure.
3.4.2 Installation Safety Requirements

The Client may prescribe the general guidelines for installation safety requirements for
electrical equipment and installations used to provide electric power and light at the
jobsite. These guidelines shall apply to installations, both temporary and permanent,
used on the jobsite.
3.4.3 Electrical Tools and Appliances

All electrical appliances and equipment used by ICOM on site shall be of 125 volt
rating, double insulated type. All Extension cords and electrical outlets must be
protected by Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI). All Electrical Generating
Equipment that will be used on site most be properly Grounded.
3.4.4 Examination, Installation, and Use of Equipment

ICOM shall ensure that electrical equipment is free from recognized hazards that are
likely to cause death or serious physical harm to employees. Safety of equipment
must be determined by the following:
 Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the provisions of the standard.
Suitability of equipment for an identified purpose may be evidenced by a listing, by
labelling, or by certification for that identified purpose.
 Mechanical strength and durability. For parts designed to enclose and protect
other equipment, this includes the adequacy of the protection thus provided.
 Electrical insulation.
 Heating effects under conditions of use.
 Arcing effects.
 Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity, and specific use.
 Ground Fault Protection (GFCI)
Other factors that contribute to the practical safeguarding of employees who use or
are likely to come in contact with the equipment.


Revision Date :
3.4.5 Guarding
Live parts of electrical equipment used at the jobsite more must be guarded against
accidental contact. Guarding of live parts must be accomplished as follows:
 Location in a cabinet, room, vault, or similar enclosure accessible only to qualified
persons.
 Use of permanent, substantial partitions or screens to exclude unqualified persons.
 Location on a suitable balcony, gallery, or platform elevated and arranged to
exclude unqualified persons.
 Elevation of eight feet or more above the floor.
Entrance to rooms and other guarded locations containing exposed live parts must be
marked with conspicuous warning signs forbidding unqualified persons to enter.
Electric installations that are over 600 volts and that are open to unqualified persons
must be made with metal-enclosed equipment or enclosed in a vault or area controlled
by a lock. In addition, equipment must be marked with appropriate caution signs.
3.4.6 Over-current Protection
The following requirements apply to over-current protection of circuits rated 600 volts,
nominal, or less.
 Conductors and equipment must be protected from over-current in accordance
with their ability to safely conduct current and the conductors must have sufficient
current-carrying capacity to carry the load.
 Over-current devices must not interrupt the continuity of the grounded conductor
unless all conductors of the circuit are opened simultaneously, except for motor-
running overload protection.
 Over-current devices must be readily accessible and not located where they could
create an employee safety hazard by being exposed to physical damage or
located in the vicinity of easily ignitable material.
 Fuses and circuit breakers must be so located or shielded that employees will not
be burned or otherwise injured by their operation, e.g., arcing.
3.4.7 Grounding of Equipment Connected by Cord and Plug

Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of cord-and-plug connected equipment that
may become energized must be grounded in the following situations:
 When operated at over 150 volts to ground, except for guarded motors and metal
frames of electrically heated appliances if the appliance frames are permanently
and effectively insulated from ground.
 Hand held motor-operated tools.
 Cord- and plug-connected equipment used in damp or wet locations or by
employees standing on the ground or on metal floors or working inside metal tanks
or boilers.

Revision Date :
 Portable and mobile X-ray and associated equipment.

 Tools likely to be used in wet and/or conductive locations.
 Portable hand lamps.
 Exemptions:
o Tools likely to be used in wet and/or conductive locations need not be
grounded if supplied through an isolating transformer with an ungrounded
secondary of not over 50 volts.
o Listed or labelled portable tools and appliances protected by a system of
double insulation, or its equivalent, need not be grounded.
o If such a system is employed, the equipment must be distinctively marked to
indicate that the tool or appliance uses a system of double insulation.
3.4.8 Establishing an Electrically Safe Work Condition

Identify power source. Determine all possible sources of electric supply to the
equipment being worked on.
 Check electrical plans, one-line diagrams, panel-board schedules, identification
signs and tags on electrical equipment, and so on.
 Most electrical equipment has a single source of supply. But sometimes there are
multiple sources. These can include emergency and standby generators,
interactive power sources such as photovoltaic or fuel cell systems and dual utility
feeds for major industrial facilities.
 Sometimes “illegal” circuits are installed that don’t comply with NEC rules. These
can create a back feed hazard after workers have disconnected all the electrical
power sources they know about.
3.4.9 Disconnect power sources. After properly interrupting the load current, open
the disconnecting means for each source.
 Most circuit breakers, safety switches, and other disconnecting means are capable
of interrupting the load current they carry.
 When the rating of a disconnecting means is not sufficient to interrupt load current,
the load must be removed by another operation before the disconnect is operated.
 Fuses should not be considered as disconnecting means. A circuit can’t be de-
energized merely by removing one or more plug or cartridge fuses. However, a
pullout block or safety switch with fuses can be considered a disconnecting means.
Operating the switch or pulling out the fuse block disconnects all ungrounded
(phase) conductors of the circuit.
 On most premise wiring systems, only the ungrounded (phase) conductors are
disconnected. The grounded (neutral) conductors are never intentionally
interrupted.


Revision Date :
 Attachment plugs of electric appliances such as cooking and laundry equipment

are permitted to be used as disconnects.
3.4.10 Verify that power is off

Wherever possible, visually verify that all blades of the disconnecting means are
fully open, or that draw-out type circuit breakers are racked out to their fully
disconnected position.
 Disconnecting means sometimes malfunction, and fail to open all phase
conductors when operated. After operating the disconnecting handle, a qualified
person should open the equipment door or cover and look to see that there is a
physical opening (air gap) in each blade of the disconnecting means.
 Sometimes it’s impossible to visually verify the existence of an air gap. In these
cases, test for the presence of voltage to verify that the circuit has actually been
disconnected. Using a digital multimeter (DMM) or other tester rated for that
voltage level, test for voltage between all phase conductors and between each
phase conductor and ground (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground).
3.4.11 Lockout & Tagout
Apply lockout-tagout devices in accordance with the employer’s written electrical

safety program. Normally these are padlocks to keep the disconnecting means open,
and tags that identify the person(s) responsible for applying and removing the locks.
3.4.12 Test for the Presence of Voltage.

 Use a digital multimeter (DMM) or other tester rated Category III to test conductors
and equipment operating at up to 480 volts.
 Testers rated Category II can be used on single-phase 120-volt circuits.
 Discharge stored electrical energy (and install safety grounds under certain
conditions)
 Discharge sources of stored energy such as capacities used for power factor
correction and motor starting.
 In high-voltage installations such as industrial substations, energized conductors
and equipment can induce hazardous voltages in nearby conductors and
equipment that are de-energized. On these high-voltage systems, temporary
equipment grounding jumpers are installed to establish a safe “equipotential zone”
where employees are working.
3.4.13 Safety-Related Maintenance and Environmental Considerations

Maintenance of Equipment
The employer must ensure that all wiring components and utilization equipment in
hazardous locations are maintained in a dust-tight, dust-ignition-proof, or explosion-
proof condition without loose or missing screws, gaskets, threaded connections, seals,
or other impairments to a tight condition.
Environmental Deterioration of Equipment


Revision Date :
Unless identified for use in the operating environment, no conductors or equipment

can be located:
a. In damp or wet locations.
b. Where exposed to gases, fumes, vapors, liquids, or other agents having a
deteriorating effect on the conductors or equipment.
c. Where exposed to excessive temperatures.
Control equipment, utilization equipment, and busways approved for use in dry
locations only must be protected against damage from the weather during building
operations.
For protection against corrosion, metal raceways, cable armor, boxes, cable
sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, fittings, supports, and support hardware must
be of materials appropriate for the environment in which they are installed.
3.4.14 Safety Requirements for Special Equipment
Batteries
Batteries of the unsealed type must be located in enclosures with outside vents or in
well-ventilated rooms arranged to prevent the escape of fumes, gases, or electrolyte
spray into other areas. Other provisions include the following:
 Ventilation-to ensure diffusion of the gases from the battery and to prevent the
accumulation of an explosive mixture.
 Racks and trays-treated to make them resistant to the electrolyte.
 Floors-acid-resistant operations unless protected from acid accumulations.
 Face shields, aprons, and rubber gloves-for workers handling acids or batteries.
 Facilities for quick drenching of the eyes and body-within 25 feet (7.62 m) of
battery handling areas.
 Facilities-for flushing and neutralizing spilled electrolytes and for fire protection.
Battery Charging
Battery charging installations must be located in areas designated for that purpose.
When batteries are being charged, vent caps must be maintained in functioning
condition and kept in place to avoid electrolyte spray. Also, charging apparatus must
be protected from damage by trucks
3.5 CRANES AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT
3.5.1 Cranes and Lifting Equipment


Revision Date :
Perhaps the most commonly used material handling equipment is the crane, which
over the years has been developed to meet highly specialized application with the
result that there is now a great range of type and size in used in industry, the docks
and in operations sites.
Accident with cranes and lifting equipment can be both costly and spectacular
particularly, in oil processing and handling areas where an accident can fracture an oil
or gas line, causing serious loss of product with the ever present danger of serious fire
and loss of lives.
As a deterrent to unskilled operation, all operators of Heavy Equipment shall be
required to possess CLIENT certification, specific for the equipment to be operated
and in accordance with CLIENT regulations and standard.
Cranes cannot create accident by themselves. Accidents with cranes can only be
caused by negligence of Safe Operating Procedures by the operator. There are a
number of common techniques and requirements that apply to the safe operations of
every type of crane and these are dealt as explained below.
3.5.2 Crane and Rigging personnel
Operator
 The operator shall be in possession of a valid Saudi Arabian government crane
operator license and CLIENT crane operator certificate.
 An operator should not operate a crane for which he has not been certified.
 The operator should be physically fit and mentally alert. If the operator feels any
sign of drowsiness or illness then he should stop the work.
 He must know and comply with the standard lifting hand signal.
 An absolute limit of approach 25 feet (7.5 meters) on any part of a crane operating
near overhead power line voltage greater than 250,000.
 All cranes operating near energized power lines shall be developed with approved
JSA.
 The Crane Operators shall utilize and perform the daily inspection checklist,
countersigned by the Equipment Section head and/or competent person.
 The records of crane inspection shall be made available for review and inspection
by CLIENT and Client personnel at any time.
 An “Anti-two block device” shall be provided
Rigger
The rigger is responsible for properly attaching the load to the crane and giving the
correct hand signal to the crane operator. He is the only person authorized to give


Revision Date :
signal to the crane operator. The rigger should be capable of rigging all type of loads
to be lifted. The rigger shall be in possession of a valid CLIENT recognized rigger
certificate.
The Rigger shall only be allowed to rig loads of up to the limit of his certification;
however, a Rigger 3 or Rigger 2 may be allowed to rig loads exceeding their
certification if supervised by the Rigger of the higher certification. In such case, prior to
this activity, the approval of CLIENT shall be obtained.
All Riggers shall be certified by Client recognized certification body for levels as
Rigger-III, Rigger-II, or Rigger-I for a minimum of two (2) years, the Rigger certification
identifies the load weight limit and type of lifts that can be rigged without supervision.
 Rigger-III can rig loads up to 10 tons.
 Rigger-II Can rig loads up to 40 tons, originate critical lift plans, and rig/supervise
crane suspended personnel platform (Manbasket) operations.
 Rigger-I Can rig all loads and approve critical lift plans for critical lifts.
3.5.3 Maintenance and Inspection

All rigging equipment and accessories shall be subjected to regular and periodic
inspection and maintenance procedures as required by CLIENT regulations. Records
of inspections and maintenance shall be kept and made available for review upon
request of Client.
 Any welding repair carried out to steel members on the boom. A-frame or any
other parts of the crane should be inspected by a qualified welding inspector.
 The crane should be subjected to a load test prior to use in every project site and
Client inspection /certificate must be secured.
3.5.4 Load Indicators

All cranes shall be fitted with an appropriate safe working load indicator and a load
chart should be place inside the crane cab where the operator can easily see it.
The supervisor of the operation should make arrangement to mark clearly the weight
of any load to be lifted, upon the load or otherwise to indicate to the rigger and
operator.
3.5.5 Work Permit

A crane should not enter a restricted area, or operate within 30 M (100 ft) from any oil
line, gas line and 60 M (200 ft) from any overhead power line until a work permit for
that particular crane has been issued. A critical lift plan shall be filled out by the crane
operator and the rigger when working inside any restricted area.
3.5.6 General Conditions


Revision Date :
 Cranes must be in good mechanical condition and assembled in accordance with

the manufactures instruction.
 All cranes must be inspected by Client approved third party agency.
 Client prescribed ‘Daily Inspection Form’ shall be filled out daily during every use
of crane.
 All controls levers, switches and buttons shall be clearly marked to indicate their
functions.
 A valid Client inspection sticker shall be patched on each heavy equipment that
requiring such sticker.
3.5.7 Operational Instructions and Guidelines
Location of Crane
 The strength of the ground where the crane is to pass or positioned shall be
examined. If necessary reinforcement, such as installation of steel plate shall be
made. Steel plates or wooden mats must be used if on soil or asphalt.
 Know the exact location of utility lines, pipelines and other underground
obstruction, and avoid them with room to spare by marking the location clearly.
 Position the crane as close to the load as possible and in such a way as to
minimize the swing.
 Before performing any type of work, be sure that the crane is secured against
travel or lateral movement. If necessary, block the crane to prevent movement.
Remove the blocking before attempting to travel.
 Ensure that, whenever possible, the crane is operated in its most stable position
and in the area of highest capacity. Most of the lifting should be done in the rear
quadrant.
Crane Operation
 If there is a warning sign on the switch or engine starting control, do not start the
engine until the warning sign has been removed by the person who placed it there.
 Before starting the engine, make sure that all the personnel are well cleared of the
machine
 Make sure that the fire extinguisher on the crane is in good condition and if used,
should be refilled immediately
 Let the machine warm up for a few minutes to give the oil in the pump a chance to
circulate. Do not operate the machine under load until the hydraulic oil has warmed
to the minimum operating temperature specified in the manufactures manual.
 Ensure that the swing lock is disengaged before starting to operate. Should there
be a swing motion, a clear space of at least 2 ft. shall be maintained between the
crane body, the counterweight and any moving part of the crane and fixed object
nearby to prevent persons being trapped and crushed when the crane swings.


Revision Date :
Swinging shall be done slowly. Swinging too fast can throw the load out of radius
and cause overloading and the risk of striking adjacent objects.
 An operator must not leave his position at the controls while the load is suspended.
The operators should know the location and use of all emergency shutdowns.
 The operator must have an unobstructed view of the load hook and the point of
operation at all times. In case this is impractical, the operator should be backed up
by a rigger or a trained watchman who will be giving the signal of directions.
 When operating a crane with the boom at a high angle, the operator should take
care that the suspended load does not strike the boom. In such cases, critical lift
plan shall be prepared and approved.
 Before swinging a load, be sure the swing path is clear and that the outrigger are
properly set. Control the load at all times using taglines to guide or snub the load
when required.
 In the case of hydraulics telescopic boom cranes, the boom section should be
extended equally.
 When loading and unloading a truck, ensure that the driver leaves the cab, and
always work over the rear of the truck. Never swing over the cabin.
The Load & Load Lifting Coordination

 Regardless of the size or weight of the load to be lifted, used the crane outrigger.
Extend the beams fully and get the wheels off the ground.
 The safe working load, a specified in the manufacturer’s instruction, shall not be
exceeded at any time. The lifting load includes the dead load of lifting hook, ropes
and all other rigging equipment.
 The load shall be lifted smoothly. Snatching can cause boom or rope failure.
 Never hoist more than one load at a time.
 When the weight of the load is closed to the operating maximum or if the
compaction of the ground is unsure, the load should be raised only a few inches
and the crane be checked for stability.
 Loads shall not be dragged or pulled sideways. This causes side stress on the
boom and overloads the crane.
 Operators should watch the load at all times. He should watch the signal man and /
or load while it is moving. In case the operator has to look in another direction, stop
the operation immediately.
 Do not permit anyone to ride on the loads, slings, hooks and other accessories for
any reason.
 Keep everyone away from suspended loads. No one is allowed to walk under the
load.
 A load should never be removed from a truck by hooking a crane to the load and
having the truck pull out from under it. The load should be lifted clear off the truck


Revision Date :
body, and the operator should make sure that the crane can handle it safely before
the truck is moved out from under the load.
 Load must be rigged so that they are stable, sling must be attached to the load
above its center of gravity, not below it.
3.5.8 Precautions and Safety Tips

 The shortest boom possible should be used.
 Secure unused slings.
 Exercise caution when working near overhead lines having long spans as they
tend to swing laterally due to the wind and accidental contact could occur.
 Never use the machines stability to determine if a load falls within its capacity.
 If the load does not ride properly, lower it and have it readjusted.
 When lifting heavy loads, care should be taken to prevent sudden loading or
unloading of the hoist line. Ease into the load; lift it a few inches off the ground and
hold to check the brakes.
 If the crane tips when hoisting or lowering a load, the operator should lower the
load as quickly as possible by snubbing it lightly with the brakes.
 The load should be kept directly below the boom tip. The hoist line must be
plumbed at all times.
 Personnel shall never steady a hook block by grasping the crane rope. If hoisting
is suddenly started, hands can be pinched between the rope and the sheaves
wheel.
 Use taglines to control or guide all loads during lifting or swinging operations.
 Personnel must stay away from slings when they are pulled from under skid
mounted loads by the crane.
 Sling shall not be pulled from under a load when the load is resting on the slings
 Neither the load nor the boom should ever be lowered to a point where less than
two full wraps of rope remain on the drum. If all cable is inadvertently removed
from the drum, be sure it is rewound in the correct direction.
 All Heavy Equipment such as crane, man lift, forklift, bob cat, loaders, trucks,
buses, pick-ups, etc., on site shall be equipped with automatic back-up alarms.
Inspection of these emergency devices shall be included with the regular daily
checklist to be done by the Heavy Equipment Operator in order to ensure the
devices are in good audible condition.
 A crane operator, after dark, should have clearance lights. Flood lights should
illuminate the area beneath the boom and lights mounted on the underside of the
boom are recommended.
 Never attempt to adjust, repair or lubricate moving machinery. Always lower off the
load to the ground, lock or support the boom, and stop the engine.


Revision Date :
 The operator must have safe access to and egress from the cabin or seat.
 The operator must never leave the crane cab with the load suspended. Should it
become necessary to leave the crane, lower the body to the ground and stop the
engine before leaving the cab.
 On the crane, where the operating controls are separate from the drivers cab,
there must be an operators cab at all times when travelling.
 Whenever possible, crane hooks should be fitted with safety latches to prevent
slings; chains ropes etc. from jumping off the hook.
 Crane boom shall be lowered to the ground level, and the hook shall be secured to
the specified position when crane is not in use. In the case of hydraulic boom
cranes, the boom is to be fully retracted in the travelling position.
 Except for hydraulics boom cranes, there must be an attendant preceding the
crane.
 On approaching any overhead obstruction or road crossing, the attendant should
stop the crane and give the necessary signals or instruction to enable the crane to
pass the obstruction or road crossing in safety.
 When using a crawler on soft ground it may be necessary to move the load behind
in order to raise the leading end of the crawlers. Snub the load to the machine to
prevent its possible upset to the crane.
 Overhead power lines: A distance of at least 25 ft should be maintained between
any part of an operating crane, its loads or attachment and any overhead power
line.
 Should a crane of necessity have to approach any closer, special precaution shall
be taken.
3.5.9 Travelling guidelines

 As a normal procedure, lifting shall only be performed from a stationary position,
hence ‘pick and carry’ activities shall not be allowed, unless permission is given by
the Client.
 When a crane has been allowed to travelling with the load, keep the speed low,
avoid sudden starts and stops and use a tagline to control the load. In such cases,
the critical lift plan shall be prepared and approved.
 When allowed for travelling with a load, the boom should always be carried in line
with the direction of motion. In such cases, the critical lift plan shall be prepared
and approved.
 When allowed to travel on sloping ground.
- Load must be less than the capacity
- Boom should not be high.
- Load must always be kept uphill from crane.
In such cases, the critical lift plan shall be prepared and approved.


Revision Date :
 Never travel a rubber tire unit with a load over the side. In such cases, the critical
lift plan shall be prepared and approved.
 Prior to travelling the crane, the route must be checked and established, be aware
of overhead power lines, pipelines, underground pipelines, and any other
obstruction.
 While travelling the boom must be in line with the chassis of the crane and the
swing brake applied.
 With the exception of those involved in the operation of the crane, no one should
be permitted to get on, leave or ride on the equipment when it is in motion or in
operation.
3.5.10 Pre-Operational Checklist for Mobile Cranes

CRANE & RIGGING PRE-LIFT CHECKLIST YES NO
Is the Crane configured in accordance with the Lift Plan?
Has the Crane been inspected and the condition acceptable?
Is the Supporting surface stable?
Has the rigging equipment been inspected, secured and in acceptable condition?
Are Proper Crane mats placed under outrigger floats and at a 90-degrees angle to the outrigger
cylinder? Are crawler crane in proper crane mats?
Is the crane in 1-degree of level? Has the levelness of the crane been check with a four foot
carpenter’s level or other acceptable method? The “Target” level in the crane cab can be used for
initial levelling but should not be considered reliable for critical lifts.
Is the exact load weight known?
Is the location of the center of gravity of the load known and the crane hook positioned directly
above it?
Was the load radius measured exactly? For Heavy Lifts, has the potential increasing load radius
due to deflection in the boom, tire and/or carrier been considered?
Was the boom length determined exactly?
Was the boom angle determined exactly?
Is wind condition acceptable? If wind speed is in excess of 30 Mph, the lift should not be made; if
the wind speed is more than 20 Mph consider postponing the lift.
Is the rope reeving balance to prevent boom twist?
Is the rigging capacity acceptable?
Is the weight of the rigging known?
Has the clearance between the boom and the load been considered and is it sufficient?
Has the clearance between the boom tip and block been considered and is it sufficient?
Is the crane operator experience and qualified?


Revision Date :
Has a qualified Signalperson (Rigger) been assigned and method of communication between the
crane operator and Rigger established?
Is a person assigned to control the load with the use of a tagline?
Is the area clear of obstacles (Including Power lines, Pipelines and unnecessary personnel)?
Has a Pre-lift meeting between the crane operator, Rigger, supervisor, and other affected person
been conducted?
3.5.11 Shutdown Procedure (Mobile Cranes)

 Remove the load from the hook.
 Either ground the hook or raised it to its highest operating position.
 Ground any out riggers.
 Apply the swing and parking brakes.
 Position the boom at an angle of 50 degree.
 Very long booms, normally those in excess of 120 ft. should be lowered out to the
ground level and resting on suitable packing if they are to be left overnight.
 Lock the cab if possible.
Routine Checks
 Check that there are no obstructions on tracks.

 Check that the brakes are in good condition.
 Check that the warning signals operate.
 Check that the limit and overload switches work.
 Check that all cranes motion functions are operating correctly.
 Check wind speed. No lifts allowed if wind is over 20 MPH (32 KPH)
 Check all pin connections, bolts, latches, locks braking and restraining devices
before operation.
 Do not add to counter weight to increase capacity.
 Do not store flammable materials on the crane at any time.
 Check the tire pressure daily.
3.6 MECHANICAL & MOBILE EQUIPMENT, VEHICLE INSPECTION &

MAINTENANCE
In order to help ensure that all contractor vehicles, mechanical and mobile equipment
are properly maintained, an inspection and maintenance program shall be
implemented. Prior to mobilization on site, all vehicles, mechanical and mobile


Revision Date :
equipment, shall undergo initial inspection, which shall be conducted by the following
departments:
 Client’s Transportation Department or an accredited 3rd party inspection agency,
who shall inspect the vehicle/mobile equipment to assess its mechanical and
operational condition
 HSE Department or an accredited 3rd party inspection agency, who shall inspect
the vehicle/mobile equipment to assess its compliance with the Client vehicle
safety regulations as per Client regulations on Mechanical & Mobile Equipment.
 All vehicles, mechanical and mobile equipment shall be subjected to regular and
periodic inspection, preventive maintenance, over an above Client vehicle
inspection requirements and occasional repairs and upgrades. All inspection,
maintenance and repair activities performed to these site vehicles and equipment
shall be documented and recorded.
 A sticker system shall also be implemented to signify that the vehicle has
undergone appropriate inspection. It shall be the responsibility of the transportation
manager/supervisor to ensure that the above inspections, maintenance and
repairs are properly implemented, as well as not allow any vehicle or equipment to
be mobilized on site without undergoing the appropriate inspections.
 It shall be the responsibility of the HSE department to advice and monitor the
implementation of these inspections, maintenance and repairs.
3.6.1 Maintenance Schedule

 The transport manager shall issue corresponding notice to the user of the
preventive maintenance schedule at least 1 day in advance to give preparation for
alternative service vehicles to be secured.
 Information system shall be implemented to effectively monitor the kilometer
readings of all vehicles
 The transport section shall make necessary arrangements to have alternative
service vehicles available so as not to disrupt on-going critical project operations.
 Preventive maintenance schedules shall be based on the following:
 1st 1,000 Km of the vehicle
 1st 5,000 Km of the vehicle
 Every succeeding 5,000 Km
 Multiples of 5,000 Km (i.e. 5k, 15k, 25k…etc) shall be regular preventive
maintenance
 Multiples of 10,000 Km (i.e. 10k, 20k, 30k…etc) shall include tune up
3.6.2 Repair


Revision Date :
 The user shall report to the transport section any malfunction or damage which
may be noticed and discovered during the use of the vehicle.
 A vehicle repair service request system shall be implemented to facilitate
appropriate action.
 The transport section shall give a turnover service receipt to the user to signify that
the repair has been successfully performed.
 The turnover receipt may be part of the vehicle service request form as a close-out
portion of the request.
3.6.3 Rental Vehicles

 Records of schedules where rental vehicles have been sent for preventive
maintenance shall be kept as proof of preventive maintenance
 The transport manager/supervisor shall be responsible for monitoring the
schedules of preventive maintenance requirements of the vehicle rental company.
3.6.4 Records, Forms and Checklists

The following documents shall be implemented for reference:
Initial inspection record; Daily Inspection Checklist; Monthly Inspection record;
Preventive Maintenance record; Repair and upgrade record; Vehicle & Mobile
Equipment users.
The user shall perform make a 360o check (quick vehicle round check-up) before any
vehicle is used.
The user shall immediate report any motor vehicle incident to the transport
manager/supervisor, who shall relay the information to the following:
 Government Relation Officer (for public motor vehicle incidents and traffic
violations needing GRO assistance)
 HSE Department
 Transportation & Equipment Rental Division
 Insurance Department
3.7 MECHANICAL SERVICE EQUIPMENT

The used of heavy duty trucks, mobile cranes, tractors, bulldozers, front-end loaders
and other motorized equipment in operations presents the possibility of accidents.
Workers near equipment can be struck, run over, and be killed, equipment sometimes
slips over embankments, injuring people. Even personnel who are involved in
servicing and maintaining equipment can find it hazardous.


Revision Date :
Many accidents even those that do not injure anyone, result in costly damage to
equipment loss of efficiency and production and high maintenance costs. In general,
prevention of accident to heavy equipment requires;
 Safety feature on equipment.
 Systematic maintenance and repair.
 Trained and licensed operators. All heavy Equipment Operator should possessed
valid SAG licenses and holders of CLIENT Test Certificates
 Trained repair personnel.
Many driving practices of these types of equipment are the same as those necessary
for the safe operation of highway vehicles. Off the road driving, however, involves
special hazards and requires safety measures.
The modern heavy duty vehicle or other off the road equipment is a carefully
engineered and expensive piece of equipment and warrants operation only by drivers
who are qualified physically, mentally and by training and experience. The supervisor
should monitor the operator in order to make sure that the he continues to operate in
the way in which he was instructed.
3.7.1 Operating Vehicles near Workers

Workers are exposed to the danger of being struck or run over by vehicles, particularly
around power shovels, concrete mixture, loaders and other equipment, in operations
sites, garages, shop and dumps.
The most dangerous movement is backing. The drivers should blow 3 blast of the
horn for a backup signal.
Where a number of employees are working, the driver should call upon another
employee to signal whether or not the path is clear before backing or making any
other movement. The person, giving the signal, should always take a position within
sight of the driver.
Serious accidents also occur during forward movements. The hazard to workers
increases with greater height and capacity of trucks. A driver often fails to see workers
crossing from the right, immediately ahead of the truck. Thus, drivers should blow two
blasts on the horn, before starting forward.
3.7.2 Dumping
Dump Trucks shall be equipped with back-up alarm system to warn all nearby
personnel of the backing movement of the truck.
Drivers should follow the instruction and signal given to him, especially in backing to
dump. Signal must be used at all times.
The persons responsible for dumping must know close to the edge a vehicle can
approach safely under various conditions. He should position himself on the driver's
side of the vehicle
 So that the signal can be easily seen


Revision Date :
 So the driver will have him in sight, and there will be less danger of his being run
over.
The driver should turn from his left when backing, so that he will have a maximum
view of the area into which the rear of the truck is moving. Also the signal man must
stay clear to avoid being struck by falling material.
To avoid hitting overhead lines or other low clearances, the dump box should be
lowered as soon as the load is dumped. Tipper bodies shall always be lowered after
use, if raised for maintenance, they shall be blocked.
3.7.3 Towing
Towing is a hazardous operation, especially when coupling or uncoupling the
equipment. Workers can be crushed, when a truck or other piece of equipment moves
unexpectedly, while they are between the two pieces of equipment. The following safe
practices are essential to prevent accident during the coupling or uncoupling of
motorized equipment.
 Towing operations, especially a heavy equipment or truck, Plant Operations
Department shall be notified.
 No one should go between the vehicles while either one is in motion.
 Vehicles must be secured against movements by having the brakes set, the wheel
blocked or both.
 Driver should not move his vehicles while someone is between it another vehicle,
or wall or anything else that is reasonably solid and immovable. In fact before
moving, the driver should receive an all clear signal.
 Tow bars are usually safer than towing ropes. If ropes are employed, they must be
in good condition and of sufficient size and length for the towing job.
 All equipment being towed should be secured by a safety chain or other equipment
means in addition to the tow bar.
 Equipment towed on trailers should be secured to the trailer.
3.7.4 Earth Moving Machines

Earth moving machines include graders, tractors, tractors-scrappers, bulldozers and
similar equipment. Hazards can be associated with the operation of this equipment,
not only because of their size and power but also because they are operated on
uneven unstable surfaces.
Many of the safety measure recommended for trucks also apply to other earth moving
equipment. Operators of such heavy equipment shall be CLIENT certified.
3.7.5 Personal Protective Equipment for Equipment Operators

All operators should wear eye protection, gloves, safety, hats and other personal
protective equipment as required by the conditions and for the particular job that is to
be done. Personal Protective Equipment should be kept as clean and dry as possible.


Revision Date :
ICOM operations management has the responsibility to provide appropriate and

approved PPE to all its personnel.
3.7.6 Machine Safety Equipment

All earth moving machines must be equipped with rollovers protective structures.
Screens or shield may also be needed to protect the operator from falling and flying
objects. All earth moving equipment with rollover protective structures should be
provided with a seat belt and the operators shall wear the seat belt.
Handholds and handrails properly oriented with the steps should be provided and
maintained. Handholds and handrails should be kept clean and dry to prevent
slipping.
Steps, ladders, and platforms should be kept free of grease, oil and mud.
All machines must be equipped with an audible alarm. An audible reverse alarm
device, that operates automatically when the machine is in reverse motion, is
recommended.
3.7.7 Basic Operating Rules

 Copies of the equipment manufacturer instruction manual should be kept with each
machine.
 The operators should walk around the machine before starting it. This is to make
sure that no other personnel are in the danger area around the equipment.
 Operators climbing on and off equipment should maintain three-point-contact with
the machine, i.e., two feet and one hand or two hand and one foot on the hand
holds, handrails and steps of the machine.
 Before starting operator should make certain that all operating controls are in the
neutral positions.
 When parking to leave a machine, even for a short time, operator should apply the
parking brake, lower the dozer blade or bucket and all other equipment to the
ground or to a secured position, place the shift lever in neutral with provided locks
engaged and shut down the engine. The electrical master disconnection switch
should be turned off.
 All machines should be left parked on level ground, where possible, in places
inaccessible to children and unauthorized persons.
 The operator should never leave his equipment on the inclined surface or on lease
material with the engine running - the vibration may put the equipment in motion.
 If possible, machines should not be driven or parked on public roads after dark. If
night work is necessary, the machine should be provided with adequate lights and
reflectors to illuminate the road and machines so other drives can see it.
 When equipment is in used on a section of road, ‘DANGER AHEAD’ sign should
be placed at sufficient distances at both ends of the operation to warn oncoming
traffic. Warning sign should be placed at least 1500 ft (450 m) from the starting
point of the operation or barricades.


Revision Date :
 Operators should not allow other personnel to ride on the equipment. No body
should be allowed to climb on to equipment in motion.
 Where earth moving equipment is stopping, turning, or backing at curves crests, of
hills and similar dangerous locations, flagman must be stationed. Such movements
generally require a clear view of approaching traffic for a distance of about 1000 ft.
for safety.
 Flagman must be used where operation are extensive or where the working area is
congested by other equipment, workers, building, excavation, and similar hazards.
 NOTE: At no time should a machine be left unattended with its engine running.
3.7.8 Special Operations

 When banks have slopes, operators should be alert for rocks, logs and trees.
 Tools such as buckets and blades should be kept close to the ground for balances
when the machine is travelling, especially on a slope.
 Operators should always keep the machines transmission in gear when travelling
to provide engine retarding and to maximize the operator’s ability to control the
machine.
 Use the brakes, not the lowered dozed blade, to stop a dozer travelling at any
significant speed down steep slopes to minimize the chance of losing control.
 Side hill travel should be avoided whenever possible. Travel up and down the
slope to avoid tipping over.
 If the side hill travel in absolutely necessary, the possibility of rolling over can be
reduced by securely attaching the machine (using a wire rope) to another
sufficiently large machine stationed at the tip of the hill and properly stabilized.
3.7.9 Power Shovels

The shovel operator has responsibility for his own safety and the safety of other
employees whose duties take them into the vicinity of the shovel.
 Where there is on-going shovel operation, No worker should enter a dangerous
location without first notifying the operator who, in turn, should not move the
equipment.
 Housekeeping on and around the shovel should be good.
 The operator should keep tools in a definite place and keep the cap floor free of
grease and oil.
 One should get on or off a shovel only after having notified the operator, who, in
turn, should swing the platform so that the hand hold can be grasped and the steps
or tread used.
 No one should get on or off while the operator is making a swing. No unauthorized
person should be permitted on the shovel.


Revision Date :
Refuelling should be done only with engine stopped. When cutting edge is to be
replaced, the scraper bowl or dozer blade should always be blocked up.
If an operator is assisting a repair worker and working behind the scraper with the
tailgate in the forward position, a block should be placed behind the tail gate so that it
cannot fall.
This precaution is necessary in case someone should release the power control unit
brake permitting the tailgate to come back.
3.7.10 Vehicles Dimensions and Weights (Saudi Standard Specification)
a.) Field and Scope of Work:

The standard specification relates to the maximum allowable limits of length, width,
height and overall and maximum weight on axle of buses, trucks, trailers and semi-
trailers used on public roads.
b.) Supplementary References: MQS 400/1984 “Vehicles: Conformity

Certificates”
c.) Definitions:
Trailer - A Vehicle designed in which the basic part does not depend on a tractor. The
semi-trailer with a small surface is considered a trailer (Figure No. 1)
Tractor - The front part of a truck (Equipped with a tow tray) which is designed to tow
semi-trailers and not designed to carry weights other than the semi-trailer’s (Figure
No. 2).
Semi-Trailer - A vehicle designed to couple with a tractor through a tow tray with a
part of its weight falling on the tractor (Figure 3).
Bus - A vehicle designed to carry individuals and their luggage with a capacity of
more than nine (9) seats including the driver’s (Figure No. 4)
Truck - A vehicle designed to transport goods or tow a trailer. (Figure No. 5)
Figure 1: Trailer Figure 2: Tractor

Figure 3: Semi-Trailer Figure 4: Bus


Revision Date :
Figure 5: Truck
Gross vehicle weight

The weight of the vehicle loaded with the maximum weight specified by the
manufacturer.
Maximum Axle Weight

The maximum weight specified by the manufacturer for each axle of the vehicle when
the tires are in contact with the road.
Overhang
The horizontal part of the vehicle (bus, truck, trailer, or semi-trailer) that extends
backwards beyond the last axle or forward before the front steerable axle.
Overall Height
The vertical distance between the surface of the road and the highest point of the
vehicle.
Overall Width
The horizontal distance on the longitudinal axle of the vehicle between the outer parts
on the sides.
Overall Length
The horizontal distance between the outer parts o the rear and front.
Radius


Revision Date :
Radius of the circle drawn with center of contact between the steerable tire and the
surface of the road when the vehicle or steering wheel is turned furthest to the right or
left.
The Axle Edge

The set of tires on each side of the axle that is carrying half the weight. The following
shall be observed:
Dimensions
The overall length shall not exceed 12.5 meters for a single truck or bus, 23 meters for
tractors and semi-trailers, and 20 meters for truck and trailers. The overall width of any
vehicle shall not exceed 4.5 meters in the following cases:
a. When there is no load;
b. When the ladder in ladder vehicle mounted towers of repairing overhead cables
are in the basic horizontal fixing position;
c. When side mirrors and antennas are removed.
Projection of any window, air vents that open outward or side mirrors shall not
exceed 300 mm from the farthest point on both sides of the vehicle.
For tractor of a width that is less than the width of the trailer, side mirror may project to
a distance that does not exceed 300 mm from the farthest point on each side of the
trailer.
Front and back overhung parts shall be allowed based on the vehicle design provided
that they do not affect its balance.
Gross Vehicle weight and Maximum weight on Axle:

The gross weight of a single truck, trailer truck or semi-trailer tractor or any allowable
attachment shall not exceed 45 tons.
The maximum weight shall not exceed 8 tons on a single steerable axle or single tire;
10 Tons on dual tires and 13 tons on a single non-steerable axle.
The maximum weight of any tandem axles shall not exceed the following:
Distance between Tandem Maximum allowable Weight on Tandem Axle
Axle (Meters) (tons)
From To less than
0.9 1 14.7
1 1.0 16.1
1.10 1.20 17.5
1.20 1.30 18.9
1.35 2.50 21
More than 2.50 Each axle is considered as a single axle


Revision Date :
The maximum Allowable weight for three tandem axle shall not exceed the following:
Distance between the first and Maximum Allowable weight on Three
Third Axle (Meters) Tandem Axle (Ton)
3 Meters or Less 26
More than 3 Meters 32
The maximum weight on any non-steerable part shall not exceed 6.5 tons.
A required vehicle with dimensions and/or weights exceeding the limits mentioned
herein shall require approval of the concerned transportation agencies before entering
the country and being permitted to operate on the roads.
Approval and Rejection Rules

Approval and rejection rules mentioned in the Saudi Standard Specification No.
400/1984 “Vehicles-Conformity Certificates” shall apply.
3.7.11 Mechanical Equipment Hazard Control & Pre-Operational Checklist
DESCRIPTION PRE-OPERATIONAL
S/N POTENTIAL HAZARD HAZARD CONTROL
OF EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
1. Valid Operators’ license 1. Serious and Fatal 1. Follow the operating
(SAG License & SA Injuries from vehicle limitation of the machine
Certificate) accidents 2. Consider proper rigging
2. Valid Crane Test 2. Contact with Structure practice.
Certificate or 3. Know the machine
3. Licensed Rigger & Overhead lines condition.
Appropriate according 3. Crane Tip Over 4. Close monitoring of the
to the lifting condition 4. Caught by rotating operation.
1. Mobile Crane
(i.e. Rigger III for lifting parts. 5. Use Proper Personal
more than 40 Tons) 5. Falling Load. Protective Equipment.
4. Lifting Plan (If Required) 6. Caught by rotating parts 6. Close Supervision &
5. Pre-operational
Monitoring.
inspection check-up
with checklist filled up. 7. Work Permit Requirement.
6. Personal Protective
Equipment.
1. Valid Operators’ license 1. Caught by rotating parts 1. Only Competent Persons is
(SAG License & SA of the equipment. allowed to operate
Operators Certificate) 2. Struck by the Moving 2. Follow the Safe Operation
2. Valid Operator Test equipment. Manual of the Machine
Certificate for the 3. Contact with other 3. Use Proper PPE
2. Skid Loader
specified equipment. structure 4. Utilize Spotter if work
3. Pre-Operational 4. Fall into the condition needs.
inspection check-up trench/excavation
with Checklist filled up 5. Burn Hazard.
4. Insure the equipment in 5. Always Consult to Mechanic

good mechanical or Technician when in doubt
condition check all of the machines operational
2. Skid Loader apparatus. performance.
5. Appropriate Personal 6. Work Permit Requirement.
Protective Equipment.


Revision Date :
1. Valid Operators’ license 1. Caught by rotating parts

(SAG License & SA of the equipment.
Operators Certificate for 2. Struck by the Moving
the type of equipment to equipment.
be used). 3. Contact with other 1. Only Competent Persons is
2. Valid Operator Test structure allowed to operate
Certificate for the 4. Fall into the 2. Follow the Safe Operation
specified equipment. trench/excavation Manual of the Machine
3. Pre-Operational 5. Burn Hazard. 3. Use Proper PPE
Mechanical inspection check-up for 4. Utilize Spotter if work
3.
Excavator all vital mechanical condition needs.
parts with Checklist 5. Always Consult to Mechanic
filled up or Technician when in doubt
4. Insure the equipment in of the machines operational
good mechanical performance.
condition check all
apparatus.
5. Appropriate Personal

Operators Certificate). 2. Struck by the Moving 1. Only Competent Persons is
2. Valid Operator Test equipment. allowed to operate
Certificate for the 3. Contact with other 2. Follow the Safe Operation
specified equipment. structure Manual of the Machine
3. Pre-Operational 4. Fall into the 3. Use Proper PPE
inspection check-up trench/excavation 4. Utilize Spotter if work
4. Wheel Loader
with Checklist filled up 5. Burn Hazard. condition needs.
4. Insure the equipment in 5. Always Consult to Mechanic
good mechanical or Technician when in doubt
condition check all of the machines operational
apparatus. performance.

Operators Certificate). 2. Struck by the Moving 1. Follow the Safe Operation
2. Valid Operator Test equipment. Manual of the Machine
Certificate for the 3. Contact with other 2. Barricade the Perimeter of
specified equipment. structure the Machine in operation
3. Pre-Operational 4. Fall into the 3. Use Proper PPE
Mechanical
5. inspection check-up trench/excavation 4. Post warning signs
Compressors
with Checklist filled up 5. Burn Hazard. 5. Always Consult to Mechanic
4. Insure the equipment in or Technician when in doubt
good mechanical of the machines operational
condition check all performance.
apparatus.


Revision Date :

(SAG License & SA of the equipment. 1. Only Competent Persons is
Operators Certificate). 2. Struck by the Moving allowed to operate
2. Valid Operator Test equipment. 2. Follow the Safe Operation
Certificate for the 3. Contact with other Manual of the Machine
specified equipment. structure 3. Always follow Traffic
3. Pre-Operational 4. Burn Hazard. regulations.
inspection check-up 5. Over Loading of 4. Always Consult to Mechanic
with Checklist filled up Vehicle
6. Trailer Trucks or Technician when in doubt
4. Insure the equipment in
good mechanical of the machines operational
condition check all performance.
apparatus. 5. Follow the allowable Speed
5. Appropriate Personal limit establish on site.
Protective Equipment. 6. Always fasten seatbelt when
6. Must have audible back in motion.
alarm.
1. Valid Operators’ license 1. Only Competent Persons is

(SAG License & SA allowed to operate
Operators Certificate). 2. Follow the Safe Operation
2. Valid Operator Test Manual of the Machine
Certificate for the 1. Caught by rotating parts 3. Use Proper PPE
specified equipment. of the equipment.
4. Utilize Spotter if work
3. Pre-Operational 2. Struck by the Moving
condition needs.
inspection check-up equipment.
5. Always Consult to Mechanic
7. Fork Lift with Checklist filled up 3. Contact with other
4. Insure the equipment in structure or Technician when in doubt
good mechanical 4. Fall of load of the machines operational
condition check all 5. Burn Hazard. performance.
apparatus. 6. Do not allow any passenger
5. Appropriate Personal on the equipment except the
Protective Equipment. operator.
6. Must have audible back
alarm
1. Only Competent Persons is
1. Valid Operators’ license allowed to operate
(SAG License & SA 1. Caught by rotating parts 2. Follow the Safe Operation
Operators Certificate). of the equipment.
Manual of the Machine
2. Pre-Operational 2. Struck by the Moving
3. Use Proper PPE
inspection check-up equipment.
4. Always Consult to
Light Utility with Checklist filled up 3. Contact with other
8. 3. Insure the equipment in structure Mechanic or Technician
Vehicle
good mechanical 4. Fall into the when in doubt of the
condition check all trench/excavation machines operational
apparatus. 5. Burn Hazard. performance.
4. Must have audible back 5. Always fasten seatbelts
alarm. when in motion.


Revision Date :
3.8 TRANSPORTATION & MATERIAL HANDLING
3.8.1 General
Transportation and material handling are always a regular part of industrial

operations. Movement of workforce, equipment and materials accompanies
hazards both identifiable and sometimes difficult to foresee.
It is therefore a major concern for SAYANA to implement an effective program to

safeguard all affected personnel, equipment and materials from all its
transportation and material handling activities.
ICOM’s Operations Manager has the authority and responsibility to implement the
Hazardous Material Handling Program. The project key personnel shall assist the
Operations Manager in implementation and surveillance checks of this program,
including ICOM’s Safety Officer.
Work Supervisors and Superintendents will actively provide proper instructions and
work supervision. Training, information and monitoring required in helping ensure
occupational health and hygienic practices by employees.
A Hazardous Management Officer may be designated from among the Safety
Officers to perform as officer in-charge of all affairs and activities relating to
Hazardous Material activity. Hazardous waste management may be handled by
the designated Environmental Coordinator.
The Hazardous Materials Coordinator shall closely work with the Project Safety
Manager and corresponding coordination with the Clients Environmental Health
Unit to conduct periodic inspection of field facilities, equipment and work areas to
detect and correct un healthful conditions and unhygienic acts.
The storage and movement of various materials shall be carefully organized and
arranged to make optimum use of the area, where efficient service can be
provided in the right place and time for the man on the job.
Selection of storage area with due consideration for drainage protection from rain
and sand storm, storage areas shall enable reversing and maneuvering of trucks
especially into or out of confined areas.
All the vehicles for the transportation of the hazardous materials and waste shall
be suitable and dedicated to the specific class of waste in order to avoid mixing of
different type and nature of chemical. In particular, the vehicles must guarantee
that no dispersion of product shall occur during the transport.
Vehicles carrying loads that are likely to blow-off from the containment
compartment shall have cover that is either integral part of the vehicle or a
separate cover of suitable material with fasteners to secure all sides of the cover.
This cover shall be in use while in transit.
All vehicles shall be provided with the fire prevention equipment (if needed) and
phone number to contact in the event of an emergency.


Revision Date :
3.8.2 Transportation and Driving

All drivers are expected to drive in accordance with the SAG traffic regulations.
Each person driving a motor vehicle shall possess and have a valid SAG driver’s
license. They shall be familiar and shall absolutely abide by the SAG traffic
regulations. It can be said that a person who does not follow simple traffic rules
cannot be expected to follow other rules as well.
Safe Vehicle Operation

To ensure that vehicle is safe to operate and the following items are satisfactorily
working.
 Steering system, parking brakes, tires seat belt, horns, tail-stop and flasher
lights. Rear view mirrors, wind shield wiper, and radiator level.
 Motor vehicle accidents shall be reported immediately to the safety officer and
police concerned. Passenger shall be carried only in the passenger
compartment seat belts worn while travelling to and from the job.
 Tire pressure shall be in conformity with the desired pressure as per tire quality
and brand.
Safe Driving
To help ensure road safety, here are some tips regarding SAFE DRIVING:
 Always follow Traffic Regulations. These regulations, like speed limits, signal
traffic lights at intersections, road traffic signs and others are set-up to help
maintain safe traffic flow.
 Always check your vehicle before using it. Check your tires, oil and water level,
lights, and emergency provisions (jack, wrench, spare tire, etc). Subject your
vehicle for regular preventive maintenance and check-up.
 Always prepare yourself for the drive because driving requires concentration.
Never drive under the influence any substance which may affect your senses,
or ability to react defensively or may cause you to sleep, such as alcohol,
drugs, or any medicine. Make sure your body is fully alert and awake and
mentally prepared to drive your vehicle. Make sure that you also know how to
fully operate your vehicle.
 Look ahead into the traffic. Looking ahead helps you see possible hazards and
dangers, like a big hole in the road, a crossing person, a car backing out, etc.
This will enable you to slow down or stop to avoid an accident.
 Always watch out for Pedestrians and bicycle riders. Although they are
expected to cross only at crossing zones and bicycle lanes, they should always
be given priority because people’s lives can never be compared to vehicles.
 Always fasten and use seat belts. As proven by studies, most people who
survive serious car accidents had their seatbelts fastened. Place your children
in child seats and if possible seat them at the back side passenger seat.


Revision Date :
 Ignoring a red light is always dangerous. Some drivers have the habit of driving
through an intersection even though the signal light indicates red, often
because there seems to be no vehicle on the perpendicular lanes against him.
 Do not assume that although there appears to be no traffic on the other roads,
it is already safe to cross an intersection.
 A driver should not assume that no vehicles will pass the intersection, most
especially during your red light signal, and even during your green light signal.
 Intersections are especially high risk spots because traffic comes from different
directions together. The most common cause of traffic accidents at
intersections is ignoring traffic signals.
 Allow ambulances, fire trucks and emergency vehicles to pass through. These
vehicles should be given priority on road because of the nature of their
purpose.
 The correct response to an ambulance, fire truck or any emergency vehicle is
to slow down and move your vehicle safely to the right side of the road and
allow these emergency vehicles to pass before resuming your original cruising
speed.
 Drivers who are at the height of emotions are common road hazards. Being
angry, excited or even being in a hurry can affect the driver's concentration on
road because these are things which give failure or takes of his mind in
observing good traffic behavior.
 A defensive driver should make decisions that can help him stay safe and avoid
accidents. A yellow light should always be seen as a high caution signal where
a driver should interpret the yellow traffic light as "I need to slow down to stop."
 There are three main components of Road Safety:
o Safe Driving Behavior
o Traffic Order and organization
o Road Traffic Predictability
Without these things, the road would be impossible to drive on... So do your part
and obey traffic rules and regulations.
 Lastly, a driver should be patient, courteous, and skilful all at the same time. A
person in good nature is similar to a safe person.
Control of Authorized Drivers and Passengers
Only authorized Drivers shall be allowed to drive specific vehicles. His competency
and government certification shall be monitored by the ‘Transport in-charge’. The
driver shall only allow passengers who are either company personnel, have
authorization from operations management or related to the vehicle’s travel
itinerary.
3.8.3 Material Handling


Revision Date :
Handling of materials accounts for 20 - 25 % of all occupational injuries. These

injuries occur in every part of an operation, not just the stockroom or warehouse.
Material Handling injuries include strains, sprains, fractures & contusions and
others. These are primarily caused by unsafe practices - improper lifting, carrying
too heavy load, incorrect gripping, failing to observe proper foot or hand clearance,
& failing to use or wear proper equipment &/or personal protective equipment &
clothing.
Before Manual material handling is performed, the following concerns have been
considered:
 Can the job be engineered to eliminate or reduce manual handling?
 Can the material be conveyed or moved mechanically?
 In what ways do the materials being handled (such as chemicals, dusts, rough
& sharp objects) cause injury?
 Can employees be given handling aids, such as properly sized boxes,
adequate trucks, or hooks that will make their job safer?
 Would protective clothing, or other personal equipment, help prevent injuries?
 Would training & more effective management help reduce injuries?
Responsibility
The material man shall be responsible for planning unloading, storage and
distribution of all materials. Once the materials have been delivered to the end-
user, the end-user shall be responsible for safely handling the materials.
It is recognized that many areas of operations work cannot employ mechanized
assistance for material handling in view of its impracticality. Such guidelines can
be referred to the JSA for Material Handling.
 Grabbing timber, racks or pallets shall be used to ensure that all materials are
stored off the ground.
 Protection shall be provided for materials such as cement, insulation and other
bulk materials as this should be damaged by moisture.
 In construction, material handling is most critical during transfer of construction
related items from one position to another, i.e., withdrawal from warehouse,
retrieving from stack pile or cabinet, transferring from the store to project site,
etc. Material handling task may look simple, but injuries are most possible for a
number of reasons:
o The materials have sharp or pointed edges.
o The materials are loose or not properly packaged, or
o The packaging is too heavy or too bulky to be lifted by one person.
o The materials may need some extra precautions (PPEs) like toxic
chemicals, highly flammable or explosive materials, etc.


Revision Date :
 Take note that common injuries resulting from improper material handling goes
from cuts, bruises, lump, back injury, and many more depending on the
situation.
 Here are some tips on proper material handling.
o Follow correct lifting technique for manual lifting.
o Never let workers overexert themselves when lifting. If the load is thought to
be more than one person can handle, assign another person or more to the
job!
o Lift gradually, w/o jerking, to minimize the effects of acceleration.
o Keep the load close to the body so as not to strain your back.
o Lift w/o twisting the body.
o Follow the six-step lifting procedure:
1. Keep feet parted - one alongside, one behind the object
2. Keep back straight, nearly vertical
3. Tuck your chin in
4. Grip the object w/ the whole hand
5. Tuck elbows & arms in
6. Keep body weight directly over feet
o It has been recommended that manual (by arm) lifting should stay within
25kg per person (hence, a 50kg item should be lifted by at least two
people).
o Use mechanical lifters as much as possible. Jack pallets, hoists, cranes,
forklifts and others are designed for this purpose.
o Ensure material packaging is not loose and without sharp or pointed edges.
o Manual material handling in relation to transportation or relocation of
operations materials and equipment shall be taken in to consideration,
including the correct and applicable use of four significant points in proper
lifting which are:
o Good Grip, get a firm grip on the object
o Back kept straight (does not carry burden of lifting)
o Feet apart the width of the hips
o Arms – kept close as possible to the body
o Inspect materials for slivers, jagged edges, burrs, rough or slippery surfaces
o Keep fingers away from pinch points, especially when putting materials
down
o When handling lumber, pipe or other long objects, keep hands away from
the ends to prevent them from being pinched


Revision Date :
o Wipe off greasy, wet, slippery, or dirty objects before trying to handle them
o Keep hands free of oil & grease
o Completely empty the container before discarding
o Use only as much as you need
o Order or withdraw from the warehouse only as much as you need
o Keep track of the amount and type of waste that you generate
o Practice good housekeeping. (Prevent spills)
o Prepare for the possibility of spills
o Clearly mark containers with the words “HAZARDOUS WASTE”
o Store waste in compatible containers that are in good condition
o Keep containers closed except when you fill or empty them
o Do not mix hazardous and non-hazardous waste together
o Keep different types of hazardous waste separate
3.8.4 Handling of Gas Cylinders

In simple terms, a gas is any substance that boils at atmospheric pressure and
ambient temperature. Based on physical state, gases can be classified in to
three groups.
1. Liquefied gases, Ex: Chlorine, anhydrous ammonia
2. Non- liquefied gases, Ex: Oxygen, Nitrogen
3. Dissolved gases. Ex: acetylene
If flammable gases like LPG, acetylene etc., leaked out: it will spread to the
surrounding area and gets ignited if any source of ignition is available. The fire
will then flashes back to the origin of leak and continue to burn as long as the
leak exists. Such a situation can lead to a major fire or explosion of gas
cylinders. Gases like acetylene may decompose if subjected to sufficient heat,
as a result of which highly inflammable Hydrogen gas will be released.
Flammable gases can cause asphyxiation also as it replaces oxygen from the
atmosphere. Toxic gases like chlorine, if leaked out, can lead to internal injury
to personnel or death depending on the quantity of gas released. In addition to
toxicity, some of the gases may have properties like flammability,
corrosiveness, asphyxiating, oxidizing, etc., in which case the leak may result in
to multiple effects.
In most industrial areas, gas cylinders are used as part of some important
activity. If these gas cylinders are not handled safely, accidents can occur and
the consequences of such accidents can be severe.
Explosions of gas cylinders generally lead to property damage thru fire and
explosion impact. Such industrial accidents can be devastating and at worse


Revision Date :
may even force a company to shut down. Hence, enforcing safety precautions
and proper handling are very essential in preventing these accidents.
Simple safety precautions in handling of cylinders can minimize accidents
involving gas cylinders. The following points can serve as useful tips for
reducing accidents involving handling of cylinders.
 Do not roll or drop cylinders. Secure cylinders during movement.
 LPG, acetylene cylinders should be kept in upright position.
 Protect cylinders from sun and rain.
 Keep valve caps/guards on unused cylinders.
 Valve or relief device repairs to be done only by qualified people.
 Regularly check cylinder valves for leaks.
 Use pressure reducing devices when drawing gas from cylinders.
 Leak arresting devices should be readily available to contain leaks of
cylinders for flammable/toxic gas.
 Use appropriate devices for lifting cylinders.
 Cylinders with damaged valves should be returned to the supplier.
 Use gas only from a cylinder provided with clear identification.
3.8.5 Handling Hazardous Materials and Chemicals

The following points can serve as useful tips for reducing accidents involving
handling of chemicals and hazardous materials.
Hazardous materials shall include, among others, materials that are corrosive,
toxic, severe pollutants, and readily flammable upon exposure to normal
surroundings.
 Chemical pollutants such as chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides;
polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) which are used in a variety of industrial
processes and in the manufacture of many kinds of materials; other metals as
mercury, lead, cadmium, arsenic and beryllium, shall be stored properly as per
requirement of the Client.
 Handling of radioactive sources (if applicable) will be done with extreme care.
At the end of the construction activities all the radioactive sources will be
removed. JSA may be developed for radioactive handling prior to work
execution with reference to project ‘Look-Ahead’ schedule.
 Disposal of PCBs shall be strictly done in accordance to procedures and
guidelines for Handling Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) as advised by the
Client.
 Asbestos materials or any materials that may have contained asbestos shall be
disposed-off in accordance to Client Asbestos Regulation


Revision Date :
 All these materials shall be duly collected in dedicated containers and disposed
off at officially approved dumping areas.
 All operations connected with changing/ refuelling of oil, fuel and chemical/
solvents/ additives shall be done inside areas whose surface is prepared to
avoid dispersion and allow the cleaning of eventual spills.
 Hazardous materials load shall be isolated as much as possible or shall not be
combined with load materials which may react violently with the substances.
 Handling of hazardous materials shall only be done under approved working
conditions using approved safety equipment and safety gears.
 Storage of hazardous materials shall be in isolated areas and kept clear of
combustion sources within at least 50feet. Provisions shall be made to control
and contain possible spillage and contamination.
There are chemicals in existence and hundreds of new ones supplies every year.
Flammable fluids are those fluids that can produce a flammable in air at ambient
temperature or having a flash point of 35 degree or lower. Almost all of them are
useful for a purpose, however, all of them can be harmful to man when dealing
with potentially hazardous chemical, precaution should be taken to ensure that the
employee do not swallow it or inhale it with the air they breath or allow it remains in
contact with the skin.
When the chemical is no longer needed, a safe means of disposal must be
provided. Flammable gases in cylinders shall be segregated from other materials
preferable in an open, well-ventilated area. Oxidizing gases should be stored
separately. The hazardous nature of a materials is related to the manner is which it
is transported, stored, or used, the materials with which it may come in contact,
and how it is disposed.
Handling & Storage of Flammable Liquids

 All Handling and storage of Hazardous chemicals shall include the provision of
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) of all the exact types of chemicals that are
being handled. These MSDS shall be available on site and display where the
chemicals and handled and stored, copies likewise distributed to the project
first aid room, storage centre / warehouse, HSE office and the resident first
aider.
 All flammable fluids must be kept in securely capped can or steel drum on
which the container clearly marked.
 Gasoline, acetone, spirit and other volatile; liquids with low flash point should
be kept in robust metal lockers in well ventilated and non-combustible huts or in
the open and storage must be securely locked and fenced.
 In handling flammable liquids, the following precaution shall be observed.
Transportation of Flammable Liquids

 Transportation of flammable liquids must always be in closed containers.


Revision Date :
 Transfer operation should be carried out with funnels and there should be no
naked flame with in 6 meters or 20 feet of the operation.
Ventilation during use of petroleum products

Gasoline and diesel equipment should only be used in well ventilated areas.
Exhaust pipe should be kept away from combustible materials. Engines must be
stopped before refilling takes place.
3.8.6 Training for Handling Hazardous Material

Training should be provided first to Personnel who are to be involved in dealing with
hazardous chemicals. Such training will cover the following:
1. Work Areas where chemical hazards are present
2. The method and observation to be used to detect the presence and release of
hazardous chemicals in their work areas.
3. The physical & health hazards of chemicals of work areas and its harmful effects.
4. First Aid Treatment for personnel exposed to hazardous chemicals.
5. The measures which the employees can be taken to protect themselves, which
include :
o Work Practice Procedure
o Personal Protective Equipment
o Awareness in identifying the potential hazards of chemicals thru the MSDS
o Hazardous chemical shall bear the “HAZARDOUS” marking on the label or
container.
o All persons concerned shall be made aware of the identification health hazards
codes.
o Liquid that evaporated quickly shall be properly handled.
o Each worker has to be informed of the harmful effects of hazardous chemicals
to health properly.
o Personal cleanliness is important and this concept shall be advised to all
workers within the chemical hazardous areas.
Training guidelines
 All employees shall be trained not to handle chemicals and materials which
they do not have authorization nor sufficient training in handling specific
chemicals and materials.
 All employees shall be instructed, during tool box meetings, to avoid mixing of
the various types of chemicals which are not within their work procedure.


Revision Date :
 Handlers shall be informed of the individual MSDS instructions of each type of

chemical they are handling.
 Handlers will be informed of the applicable health rules and regulations
inherent to the chemicals and materials they are handling.
 Handlers shall be trained to perform their duties and work in a manner which
will not endanger their selves and to be alert to unhealthy conditions.
 Drivers shall be instructed on how to store the waste on the vehicles, on the
risks connected with the hazardous waste, on what to do in case of emergency.
3.9 ABRASIVE BLASTING, PAINTING & COATING
3.9.1 General
Abrasive blasting is a recognize method of cleaning equipment and material. The
used of abrasive blasting vary from heavy industrial cleaning of iron and steel
casting, pipes and similar materials to the application of decorative finishes on
various materials. Proper safety procedure must be followed during abrasive
blasting operation.
The abrasive blasting operator shall wear an air supplied hood approved for
abrasive blasting. Dust filter respirator shall not be used in-lieu-of the air supplied
hood. Personnel loading or unloading shipments of abrasives, tender of abrasive
blasting operations, maintenance personnel, clean-up crew or helpers shall use
approved dust- filter respirator when within range of rebound abrasive airborne
contaminant. The type of dust-filter respirator shall correspond to the specific air
borne hazard.
Dust-filter respirator shall not be used by helpers and blasting operation attendants
for continuous protection where silica sand is used as blasting abrasive or where
toxic materials such as lead, cadmium, manganese, and chromium are blasted.
Some of these toxic materials are components of paint and other surface coatings.
Self-contained or air supplied breathing apparatus shall be used. Respiratory inlet
covering (face pieces, helmets or hoods) and breathing tubes should be washed
and disinfected after each day or use. While not in use, the individual respirator
should be stored in separate plastic bags.
In addition to the usual hazard associated with operations activities, workers
engaged in surface preparation and paint application can be exposed to the
danger of fire, explosion, chemical burns, toxic fumes, dust and insufficient air.
ICOM shall subject its painters, grit and sand blasters to medical pulmonary test
conducted every two years and in accordance with Safety Requirements for
Abrasive Blast Cleaning, prior to performance of their duties.
The following guidelines are given:
 Since the abrasive blasting operator cannot see or hear people approach him,
no one must be allowed within the range of the abrasive jet while it is operating.
 Workers tending the abrasive blasting operation MUST NOT leave the
equipment unattended.


Revision Date :
 The abrasive blasting nozzle must have a dead-man control that will shut off
the blow if the nozzle is dropped.
 The nozzle and the coupling must be fitted to the hose so that the fitting will not
be weakened by the abrasive flow. Fitting must be positive to prevent
unplanned disengagement. Clamps must be used to secure hoses to fittings
 Sand or dust shall not be allowed to accumulate and shall be cleaned up
regularly.
 The blast nozzle shall be bonded and earthen to prevent the build-up of static
charges.
 ¼ chain or whip arrestor must be secure to prevent whiplash
3.9.2 General Safety Precautions

 All spray finishing shall be conducted in spray booth or spray rooms.
 Spray booth shall be substantially constructed of steel, securely and rigidly
supported, or of concrete or masonry, except that aluminium or other
substantial non-combustible material may be used for intermittent or low
volume spraying.
 Spray booth shall be designed to sweep air current towards the exhaust outlet.
 There shall be no open flame or operation of spark - producing equipment
neither in any spraying areas nor within 20 ft. thereof, unless separated by a
partition.
 Electrical wiring and equipment not subjected to deposits of combustible
residues but located in a spraying area shall be of an explosion proof type.
 Electrical wiring motors and other equipment outside of but within 20 feet of any
spraying area, and not separated there from by partition, shall not produce
sparks under normal operating condition.
 All spraying areas shall be provided with mechanical ventilation adequate to
remove flammable vapours, mist, or powders to a safe location and to confine
and control combustible residues so that life is not endangered.
 Electric motors driving exhaust fans shall not be placed inside flammable
materials spray booth of ducts. Belts or pulleys within the booth or ducts. Belts
or pulleys within the booth or duct shall be thoroughly enclosed.
 The quality of flammable or combustible liquid kept in the vicinity of spraying
operation shall be the minimum required for operation and should ordinarily not
exceed a supply for one day or one shift.
 A bonding that bonds nozzle, hose, blasting equipment and the material being
cleaned shall provide and this bonding system shall be grounded to prevent a
build-up of statistic charges. Ground continuity tests shall be conducted
periodically to ensure proper grounding.


Revision Date :
 Conspicuous “NO SMOKING” signs shall be posted at all flammable materials

spraying and storage rooms.
Paint Preparation and Equipment Cleaning

Paint should be mixed either outside or in an adequate ventilated area. Adequate
washing facilities should be readily available so that paint and solvents splashed
on the body or in the eyes can immediately remove. Electrically driven power mixer
shall be grounded.
Hazards from Paint Application

Spray painting result in local high solvent vapor concentrations, giving rise to
serious fire and explosion hazards. Spray painting must never be done either on or
near surface hotter than the summer ambient temperature or near flames.
Adequate ventilation must be maintained in confined areas.
Airless spray gun operates at very high pressure in the range of 2000 to 2500 psi.
They are extremely hazardous, the aright which is strong enough to easily slice
through a man, is invisible. Operators and adjacent workmen must be thoroughly
aware of its potential destructive power. When the gun is not use, the safety catch
must be put on so that trigger cannot be pulled accidentally.
Inspection
The user shall inspect the respirator immediately prior to each use to ensure that it
is in proper working condition. After cleaning and sanitizing, each respirator shall
be inspected to determine if it is in proper working condition, if it needs
replacement of parts on repairs, or if it should be discarded.
Testing
Periodic carbon monoxide (CO) testing to ensure it meets the CGA Grade ‘D’,
breathing air tested to meet requirements.
Coatings
The nature of the coating of the surface to be blasted must be known in order to
make proper evaluation of the potential hazard. Coating containing toxic metal will
add to the potential seriousness of the dust exposure. Examples of coatings are
anti-fouling paints containing mercury, lead paints on structural steel, and cadmium
plating. Plating resin coating can be decomposed during blast cleaning operations.
3.9.3 PPE for Abrasive Blasting, Painting & Coating

The use of appropriate protective gear will prevent most health problem associated
with use of solvents. The PPE to be worn by Painter and Abrasive Blast Cleaners
can be referred from Section 2.2 of this manual.
 The abrasive blasting operator must wear a heavy canvas or leather apron,
safety boots, good quality heavy canvas or leather gloves, coverall to protect


Revision Date :
parts of the body not covered by the hood from the rebound abrasives or an
unintentional blast from the abrasive jet.
 Workers tending the abrasive blasting operation or working within the range of
rebound abrasive or dust must filter respirators, eye protection, safety gloves,
and safety shoes.
 Hearing protection must we worn by operator and attendant.
 Workers who handle abrasive materials manually must wear approved dust
filter respirator.
 Coverall goggles must be worn for abrasive dust that may affect the eyes.
3.9.4 Breathing Air Supply

Breathing air supply shall be tested and classified
The following guidelines are also given:
 The air for abrasive blasting respirator shall be free of harmful quantities of dust
mist or noxious gases.
 The air from the regular compressed air line may be used for the respirator if
1. A trap and carbon filter are installed to remove oil, water, scale, and odor,
2. A pressure removing diaphragm or valve installed to reduce the pressure
down to requirements of the particular type of respirator and
3. An automatic control is provided to shut down the compressor in case of
overheating.
 The air intake of the blower or compressor must be located so that it is not
taken in exhaust gases from its own engine, or harmful gases or dust from any
other source.
 If there is potential for carbon monoxide to exist in the air stream, a suitable gas
absorbent filter and warning alarm shall be installed within the air line.
 If an oil lubricated compressor is used, there must be an oil filter with
replaceable filter cartridge in the breathing air supply line to remove oil mist.
 Air supplied to respiratory equipment must be free from contaminants.
 Respire able air shall be controlled to the following conditions at all times:
1. Oxygen, not less than 19-23% vol.
2. Carbon monoxide, not more than 10 parts per million (ppm)
3. Carbon dioxide, not more than 0.10% vol.
4. Oil mist, not more than 5 mg/m3 @ NTP
5. Water vapour, not more than 0.76 mg/l
6. Particulates, none


Revision Date :
The above standards are based on compressed Air Gas Association Grade “D”
breathing Air
3.9.5 Work Location for Abrasive Blasting
 Work area shall be roped off or barricaded and “NO ENTRY”-ABRASIVE

BLASTING IN PROGRESS” warning sign shall be displayed on all approaches
to worksite.
 Eye protection and hearing protection warning shall be posted.
 Work area shall be located downwind away from people and facilities to
prevent exposure to rebound abrasive and hazardous dust concentrate.
 Enclosed work areas such as inside vessels, building excavation and other
shall be properly ventilated.
3.9.6 Fire and Explosion Hazards from Solvents
Flammable Materials
A fire and explosion hazard always exists when using solvent, especially in
confined areas. Adequate ventilation must be supplied. In paint system, it is
normally the solvent vapour that is flammable and generally the other components
are less dangerous and non-explosive. Solvents are usually petroleum based
hence the high flammability nature.
Fire hazard is usually associated with acrylic paints with petroleum thinners, not so
much with latex paints as they often use water as solvents. Smoking or the use of
open flame should not be permitted in the paint storage areas, paint mixing and
spraying areas.
All electrical lighting and equipment shall be explosion proof. Solvent and paint
shall not be applied to surfaces warmer then summer ambient temperature.
Paints and solvent used in project operation shall carefully consider the flash point
and the ambient temperature prevailing in the work area or locality, acknowledging
that danger is everywhere flammable liquids and solvents are in use.
Flammable Limits
Flammable limits shall be properly considered during painting and coating operations. The
lower and upper flammable limits define the range of vapor / air concentrations that are
potentially explosive.
The lower flammable limits is typically on the order of 1 % to 2 % by volume - a

level readily obtained in the area near opened solvent container and near the
nozzle to a spray painting gun in operation.
3.9.7 Ventilation


Revision Date :
Ventilation is necessary because nearly all solvent vapours are heavier than air.
Therefore, they tend to settle to the lower level of confined or isolated areas, the
following guidelines should be considered:
 Forced ventilation should be used, especially is small enclosure and always
during spray painting. Ventilation requirement are proportionately greater for
vessels smaller than 56,000 cu. ft. capacity than for larger vessels.
 Mechanical or forced ventilation is needed during all spray painting operations
with the following conditions:
o Whenever opened solvent containers are located in enclosed areas
o In small enclosures during hand painting or solvent wiping
o Whenever solvent vapors are irritating to eyes, skin, lungs etc.
It should operate during paint application and continue until the coating is dry to
the touch.
 The fresh air inlet should bear the top of the confined space. The discharge
opening should be located near the bottom and positioned to eliminate dead
space.
 Supplementary fans may be needed to ensure good air circulation with no dead
air pockets in the vessel.
 All work men should wear chemical cartridge respirator if outdoor or airline
hoods if inside a vessel.
 The working area shall be kept clean and safe. Used abrasive shall be
removed without delay.
 The abrasive shall not damage any adjacent items or equipment when
performing blast cleaning.
 Flammable coating materials shall be mixed under sufficient fresh air circulation
blast cleaning only.
 Explosion proof agitator shall be used for mixing of flammable coating
materials.
 Warning sign shall be provided for all areas where flammable coating materials
will be stored, mixed or applied. The sign shall define that areas as hazardous
zone and shall prohibit smoking, open fire and welding.
 Explosion proof, electrically powered equipment shall be used when using
flammable coating materials (especially in confined areas).
 In closed areas (e.g. inside of tanks, etc.) sufficient ventilation shall be
provided.
 The installation of the ventilation unit shall prevent unventilated corner. Special
precaution shall be taken for all vapours heavier than air.


Revision Date :
 The air circulation shall be so designed that the solvent vapour content will be
at least 20% below the explosion limit. The contents of solvent vapour shall not
exceed 25% of the air volume.
 The ventilation unit shall be designed and installed in such a manner that
condensation on the treated surface is prevented.
3.9.8 Health Hazards
Toxicity
Most of the solvent contained in paints or used for cleaning are toxic in varying
degrees. The MSDS shall be referred to before any use in order to properly
safeguard any personnel from inherent toxicity.
The danger can arise from inhalation, ingestion or skin absorption; hence safety
precautions given by the MSDS or the solvent’s manufacturer shall be strictly
followed when using solvent. The working area shall be protected by warning sign.
Examples of acceptable solvents are aliphatic or aromatic solvent such as mineral
spirits and naphtha, enamel thinner, toluene, xylem, turpentine, and methyl is
obtusely ketone.
Examples of extremely toxic solvent are benzene, methyl, cellosolve, and all
chlorinated solvent such as carbon tetrachloride.
Permissible solvent for wiping include mineral spirit, standard solvent, petroleum
naphtha, turpentine, and toluene. Benzene, gasoline, carbon tetrachloride and
chlorinated hydrocarbon are dangerous and must not be used.
Skin Irritation
 The vapours from many solvents can cause mild to quite severe allergic skin
irritations. The alkaline catalysts used in many epoxy paint can cause severe
chemical burns if not washed off immediately with water.
 Strong degreasing solvent such as ketoses and aromatic hydrocarbons remove
natural skin oils and promote skin cracking.
 Adequate and readily available washing facilities should be provided on site so
that workmen do not have to use thinners and cleaners for washing up.
3.10 WORK INSIDE LIVE PLANTS AND NEAR HAZARDOUS FACILITIES

When operations work is performed within Live Plants, authorization shall be obtain
from the Plant Operation Supervisor and a Work Permit shall be secured.
All work to be done inside plant areas and near hazardous facilities shall take all
necessary precautions detailed in the Work Permit, Operations shall fully consider
plant regulations and all applicable Operation Instruction Manuals.
3.10.1 Emergency Procedures

To aid in ensuring safety at Client Plants and its controlled locations, ICOM shall
develop emergency procedures that are in line with established procedures of


Revision Date :
particular area locations that clearly outline the action to all people to take while
working at these locations. The emergency reporting procedures provided CLIENT’s
Safety Management System form’s checklist shall be ready reference source of
information for employees to use for injury treatment, and the forms necessary to file
Injury and Accident Reporting and Investigation Reports.
3.10.2 Fire Protection

To further ensure safety during operations activities at Client Plants and near live
facilities, ICOM shall enforce policies that outline the fire prevention requirements of
all people that work at these locations at any given time.
Work site safety audits shall be jointly and routinely performed to help ensure safety
and aid in evaluating on their work performance. Contractor worker shall be oriented
and promote with all these prevention requirements.
3.10.3 Safe Work Procedures and Policies

Above the policies of these plants, refineries, etc, shall include safe work practices
that should be followed by employees when they are working on substation, live lines,
process equipment, and all other facilities throughout these locations.
Appropriate and approved personal protective equipment (PPE) shall be issued to all
employees to likewise help ensure safety. Routinely, the HSE department together
with CLIENT Safety Advisor shall conduct inspections to ensure that standards of
safety are being maintained.
Paul Hauling & Erection

During pole hauling operations, all loads shall be secured to prevent displacement and
a red flag shall be displayed at the trailing end of the longest pole. Precaution shall be
exercised to prevent blocking of road ways or endangering other traffic. When hauling
poles during the hours of darkness, illuminated warning devices shall be attached to
the trailing end of the longest pole.
Storage
 No materials or equipment shall be stored under energized bus, energized lines, or
near energized equipment, if it is practical to store them elsewhere.
 When materials or equipment are stored under energized lines or near energized
equipment, applicable clearances shall be maintained and extra-ordinary caution
shall be exercised when moving materials near such energized equipment.
 Where hazard to employee exist, tag lines or other suitable devices shall be used
to control loads being handled by hoisting equipment.
Framing
During framing operations, employee shall not work under a pole or a structure
suspended by a crane, A frame, or similar equipment unless the pole or structure is
adequately supported.


Revision Date :
Attaching the load

Bare wire communication conductors on power or structures shall be treated as
energized lines unless protected by insulating materials. The hoist rope shall not be
wrapped around the load. These shall not apply to electric operations crews when
setting or removing poles:
a) Grounding for protection of employee
b) Communication for Protection of Employee.
c) Communication Conductors.
Ground Lead
A ground lead to be attached to either a tower ground or driven ground shall be
capable of conducting the anticipated fault current and shall have a minimum
conductance of No.2 AWG copper.
Overhead Lines
 Prior to climbing poles, ladders, scaffold, or other elevated structures, an
inspection shall be make to determine that the structures are capable of sustaining
the additional or balanced stress to which they will be subjected.
 Where poles or structures may be unsafe for climbing, they shall not be climbed
until made safe by guying, bracing or other adequate means.
 Before installing or removing wire or cable, strains to which poles and structures
will be subjected shall be considered and necessary action taken to prevent failure
of supporting structures.
 When setting, moving, or removing poles using cranes, debris, gin poles, A-frame,
or other mechanized equipment near energized lines or equipment, precaution
shall be taken to avoid contact with energized lines or equipment, except in bare-
hand-live line work, or where barriers or protective devices are used.
 Unless using suitable protective equipment for the voltage involved, employees
standing on the ground shall avoid contacting equipment or machinery working
adjacent to energized equipment.
 Lifting equipment shall be bonded to an effective ground or it shall be considered
energized and barricaded when utilized near energized equipment or lines.
 Pole holes shall not be left unattended or unguarded in areas where employees
are currently working.
 Taglines shall be of a nonconductive type when used near energized lines.
Metal Tower Operations

When working in unstable materials the excavation for pad or pile-type footings in
excess of 1.52 meters (5 ft.) deep shall be either slope to the angle of repose as
required or shored if entry is required. Ladders shall be provided for access to pad or
pile-type footing excavations in excess of 1.2 meters (4 feet).


Revision Date :
When working in unstable materials provision shall be made for cleaning out auger-
type footing without requiring any employee to enter the footing unless shoring is used
to protect employee. A designated employee shall be used in directing mobile
equipment adjacent to footing excavations. No one shall be permitted to remain in the
footing while equipment is being spotted for placement.
Location of Mobile Equipment

Where necessary to assure the stability of mobile equipment the location of use for
such equipment shall be graded and levelled. Tower assembly shall be carried out
with a minimum exposure of employee to falling objects when working at two or more
levels on a tower. Guy lines shall be used as necessary to maintain section or parts of
sections in position and to reduce the possibility of tipping. Members and sections
being assemble shall be adequately supported.
Clearance of personnel
No one shall be permitted under a tower which is in the process of erection or

assembly, except as may be required to guide and source the section being set. Lines
shall be de-energized when erecting towers using hoisting equipment adjacent to
energized transmission lines.
If the lines are not de-energized, extraordinary caution shall be exercised to maintain
the minimum clearance distances required. Erection cranes shall be set on firm level
foundations and when the cranes are so equipped outrigger shall be used.
Tag lines shall be utilized to maintain control of tower section being raised and
positioned, except where the use of such line would create a greater hazard. The
loading shall not be detached from a tower section until the section is adequately
secured.
Work Stoppage
Except during emergency restoration procedures, erection shall be discontinued in the

event of high wind or other adverse weather conditions which would make the work
hazardous.
Before the employee contacts the energized part to be worked on, the conductive
bucket lines shall be bonded to the energized conductor by means of a positive
connection which shall remain attached to the energized conductor until the work on
the energized circuit is completed.
Minimum Clearance from Electrical lines

The minimum clearance distance shall be maintained from all grounded objects and
from lines and equipment at a different potential than that to which the insulated aerial
device is bonded unless such grounded objects or other lines and equipment are
covered by insulated guards. These distances shall be maintained when approaching,
leaving and when bonded to the energized circuit. An employee shall be utilized as
‘Watchman’ to monitor that required clearances are maintained in moving equipment


Revision Date :
under or near energized lines. Stringing / Removing De-energized conductors, the

provisions or this paragraph shall be compiled with.
The minimum clearance distances for line-line bare hand work shall be as specified
below:
Voltage range Distance Inches for
maximum
(phase to phase kV) (feet)
voltage
2.1-15 2’0” 24”
15.1-35 2’4” 30”
35.1-46 2’6” 32”
46.1-72.5 3’0” 36”
72.6-121 3’4” 54”
138-145 3’6” 60”
161-169 3’8” 66”
230-242 5’0” 100”
345-362 *7’0” *13’4”
500-552 *11’0” *20’0”
700-765 *3’0” *3’0”
*Note: for 345-362 kV and 700-765 kV., the minimum clearance distance may be
reduced provided the distance are not made loss than the shortest distance between
the energized part and a grounded surface.
3.10.4 Work near Live and Hazardous Facilities

 When approaching, leaving, or bonding to an energized circuit the required
minimum distances shall be maintained between all parts of the insulated boom
assembly and any grounded part (including the lower arm or portion of the truck).
 When positioning the bucket alongside an energized bushing or insulator string,
the minimum line to ground clearance must be maintained between all parts of the
bucket and the grounded end of the bushing or insulator string.
 Equipment and rigging shall be regularly inspected and maintained in safe
operating condition. Adequate traffic control shall be maintained when crossing
highways and railways with equipment.
 Prior to stringing operation a briefing shall be held setting forth the plan of
operation and specifying the type of equipment to be used, grounding devices and
procedures to be followed, crossover method to be employed, and the clearance
authorization required.
 Where there is possibility of the conductor accidentally contacting an energized
circuit or receiving a dangerous induced voltage build-up, to further protection of


Revision Date :
the employee from the hazard of the conductor, the conductor being installed or
removed shall be grounded or provision made to insulate or isolate the employee.
 If the existing line is de-energized, proper clearance authorization shall be secured
and the line grounded on both sides of the crossover or, the line being strung or
removed shall be considered and worked as energized.
 When crossing over energized conductors in excess of 600 volts, rope nets or
guard structures shall be installed unless provisions is made to isolate or insulate
the workman or the energized conductor.
 Where practical the automatic re-closing feature of the circuit interrupting device
shall be make in-operative.
 In addition, the line being strung shall be grounded on either side of the crossover
or considered and worked as energized.
 Conductors being strung in or removed shall be kept under positive control by the
used of adequate tension reels, guard structures, tie lines, or other means to
prevent accidental contact with energized circuits.
 Guard structure members shall be sound and of adequate dimension and strength,
and adequately supported.
 Catch-off anchor, rigging, and hoist shall be of ample capacity to prevent loss of
the lines.
 The manufacturer’s load rating shall not be exceeded for stringing lines, pulling
lines, sock connections, and all, load bearing hardware and accessories.
 Pulling lines and accessories shall be inspected regularly and replaced or repaired
when damaged or when dependability is doubtful.
 Conductor grips shall not be used on wire rope unless designed for this
application. While the conductor or pulling line is being pulled (in motion) employee
shall not be permitted directly under overhead operations nor shall any employee
be permitted on the cross arm.
 A transmission clipping crew shall have a minimum of two structured clipped in
between the crew and the conductor being sagged.
 When working on the bare conductors, clipping and tying crews shall work
between grounds at all times.
 The grounds shall remain in tack until the conductors are clipped, except on dead
structures. Except during emergency restoration procedures, work from structures
shall be discontinued when adverse weather (such as high wind) makes the work
hazardous.
 Stringing and clipping operations shall be discontinued during the progress of an
electrical storm in the immediate vicinity.
 Reel handling equipment, including pulling and braking machines shall have ample
capacity, operate smoothly, and be levelled and aligned in accordance with the
manufacturer’s operating instructions.


Revision Date :
 Reliable communications between the reel tender and pulling rig operator shall be
provided. Each pulled shall be snubbed or dead ended at both end before
subsequent pulls.
3.10.5 Stringing Adjacent to Energized Lines

Prior to stringing parallel to an existing energized transmission line, a competent
determination shall be made to ascertain whether dangerous induced voltage build-up
will occur, particularly during switching and ground fault condition.
The following guidelines are adopted:
 The use of taglines between buckets, booms and the ground is prohibited.
 No conductive materials over 1.8 meters (3 feet) long shall be placed in the bucket,
except for appropriate length jumpers, armors rod, and tools.
 Nonconductive type taglines may be used form line to ground when not supported
from the bucket
 The bucket and upper insulated boom shall not be over stressed by attempting to
lift or support weights in excess of the manufacturer’s rating.
 A minimum clearance table shall be printed on a plate of durable nonconductive
materials and mounted in the buckets or its vicinity so as to be visible to the
operator of the boom.
 It is recommended that insulated measuring sticks be used to verify clearance
distances.
3.11 SAFETY AND HEALTH PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATIONS ACTIVITIES AT

NIGHT
3.11.1 Permit to Work

All work at night should be conducted only after a documented approval has been
obtained from the CLIENT’s Work Permit Issuer stating the requirements and
restrictions for night work.
All provisions of the Work Permit System must be satisfied before the commencement
of the actual work.
3.11.2 Visibility of the Work Area
Lighting or illumination is one of the most important factors in night time operations
work. A well illuminated work area will complement the requirement for visibility of
workers and also the visibility of work vehicles.
Safety in the work area, quality of work and morale of workers are all directly affected
by work area illumination.
Poorly illuminated work area will not only reduce the motivation of workers but also
increase the risk of unwanted incident/ accident. The requirements for illumination will
be determined in Lighting & Illumination Requirements.


Revision Date :
3.11.3 Visibility of Workers

High visibility apparel and temporary illumination are essential to ensure that workers
are visible to all drivers including work vehicle and equipment operators. High visibility
apparel should make the worker recognizable over the entire range of body motions.
The following are good practices for visibility of workers:
 Wear high visibility apparel.
 Wear light colour clothing underneath the high visibility apparel to enhance
visibility.
 Use colours such as yellow-green for worker apparel to help to differentiate the
worker from the orange colour work vehicles, signs, drums, etc.
 Use fluorescent colours to improve visibility during dawn or dusk situations.
 Provide temporary illumination at all work locations to make workers visible.
 Develop an operational plan for night work to address risks associated with worker
exposure to traffic, work vehicles and equipment.
 Train workers about safety procedures to minimize hazards associated with
reduced visibility
3.11.4 Personal Protective Equipment

Workers shall be provided with sufficient and adequate PPE when working at night.
Because of the inherent hazard that present in the operations site during night time,
special or extra precautions should be emphasized to all workers.
Tripping hazard, risk of falling from height, drowsiness and poor visibility are among
the inherent hazards associated with night time. The following PPE are the minimum
recommendations an employer may provide to their workers:
 High Visibility Apparel (Clear Vest) - The purpose of using high visibility apparel
is to reduce the risk of the personnel from being struck by vehicles (in road
operations work for example) and making them more visible in the operations site
during night time works.
 Safety Helmet - Safety helmet should be worn by all employees at all times when
performing work activities and to provide reflector stick or self-adhesive reflective
sticker onto the safety helmets to indicate the presence of person at the work area.
 Flashlight - Worker should be provided with a portable flash light to help them in
executing their task. Flash light could become handy in an emergency and often
used as an indicator of presence in a dark or poorly illuminated work area.
 Blow Whistle - Whistle can be used as a communication method such as
alarming other worker of machinery or equipment movements and is very handy in
case of an emergency. But worker should be well trained to not misuse the blow
whistle as it may confuse other workers in a real emergency.
 Safety Glass (Clear Type) – Plant Operations is prone to Eye injuries that may
cause permanent loss of eyesight, hence eye protection is a vital PPE. Use the
clear type Safety Glass to maximize the visual output in night works.


Revision Date :
3.11.5 Visibility of Vehicles

Collisions involving vehicles and equipment may increase at night because of reduced
visibility. It is important for the vehicle operator to use warning lights and equally
important as well for other workers to understand the meaning of the warning lights.
New vehicles are usually readily equipped with rotating or flashing amber beacons
and emergency flashers and employer should install them at older vehicles.
The following procedures may reduce the risk of crashes at night:
 Two rotating or flashing amber beacons visible from 300 meters should be
displayed on all trucks and equipment used at night in work areas.
 Vehicles operated by inspectors and supervisory staff within the work area should
use at least one rotating beacon.
 In addition to rotating or flashing beacons, vehicles should display 4-way
emergency flashers when stopped or moving slowly in or adjacent to a work zone.
3.11.6 Emergency Response Plan

ICOM shall consider establishing apart from the existing emergency procedures which
are normally designed for daylight work, a custom emergency response plan for night
time work.
Every operations site which carries out operations work at night should be aware of
the special conditions that night time operations work have. The placement of fire
extinguisher for an example, if not well informed to the worker and not properly signed
and illuminated at night won’t serve its purpose.
All emergency exit routes should be properly lighted and be free from any obstruction.
Assembly points should be kept well lighted at all times during night time operations
work.
Every employer and worker should be well trained and informed of the emergency
procedure at night. The employer may want to consider an emergency drill at night so
that the worker will response in a desirable manner in case of an emergency occurs.
Emergency contact numbers and the nearest Fire station should be place in
prominent places and the name of responsible persons to be notified should be in
place as well.
3.12 LOCK OUT AND TAG SYSTEM
3.12.1 Hold Tags and Multiple Lockouts

Guidelines for the use of Hold Tags and Multiple Lockouts shall be coordinated with
the Client. The purpose for the Lockout System is to render controllers inoperative,
i.e., circuit breakers, disconnect switches, valves, etc. on any systems (electrical,
steam, hydrocarbon, water, acid, etc.), where the operation of the control device could
be hazardous to personnel working on the system.


Revision Date :
Receivers in coordination of Issuers & work supervisors shall ensure that hold tags
and lock outs are strictly enforced and so noted on the work permit. ICOM shall
establish a lockout and hold tag system compatible with existing Client systems and
specific area/Worksite Facilities.
3.12.2 Responsibilities
Supervisors
 Identify machinery and equipment that requires lockout/tagout before servicing.
 Develop machine specific procedures for each type of machine or equipment.
 Approve lockout devices to be used for each type of equipment that may need to
be serviced.
 Provide individual tags and key locks to each employee who will need to de-
energize equipment.
 Coordinate with outside contractors when servicing of equipment is done by them,

or will affect them.
Authorized Employees (Personnel authorized to use Hold tag and Lockouts)
 Understand the intended use of each type of lockout/tagout hardware.
 Understand specific procedures for machinery, equipment and processes,

including:
 The hazards involved with working on electrical circuit and/or machinery or

equipment.
 Use the proper procedure for locking/tagging out an electrical source or piece of
equipment.
 Ensure the devices are kept in such a manner as to prevent use by other
employees.
 Notify any affected employees prior to the application of lockout/tagout devices

and after they are removed
Affected Employee
An employee whose job requires him/her to work in an area in which such servicing or
maintenance is being performed.
 Comply with restrictions and limitation imposed upon them during lockout/tagout of
equipment or machinery.


Revision Date :
 Do not attempt to move lockout/tagout devices or start, energize or use equipment

that have been locked or tagged out
3.12.3 General procedures
Electrical Procedures
– Shut off power on machine and disconnect.
– Lockout/tagout on disconnect sources.
– Press start button to ensure that energy source has been locked.
– Remember the keys points:
• If a machine or piece of equipment contains capacitors, they must be
drained of stored energy.
• Possible disconnecting sources include the power cord, power panels
• Look for primary & secondary voltage breakers, the operator’s station,
motor circuit, relays, limit switches, electrical interlocks.
Hydraulic/Pneumatic Procedures
– Shut off all energy sources (pumps & compressors).
– Lockout/tagout the valve on the pumps and compressors that supply energy to
more than one piece of equipment.
– Drain or bleed stored pressure from hydraulic/pneumatic lines during
lockout/tagout procedures.
– Make sure controls are returned to their safest position (off, stop, neutral, etc.).
Fluids and Gases

– Identify the type of fluid or gas properly.
– Close valves to prevent flow during lockout/tagout.
– Determine the isolating device, close and lockout/tagout.
– Drain and bleed lines to zero energy state.
– Check for zero energy state on the equipment.
Mechanical Energy Procedures

– Block out or use die ram safety chain.
– Lockout or tagout safety device.
– Shut off, lockout or tagout electrical system.
– Check for zero energy state on equipment.
– Return controls to safest position.


Revision Date :
Extra precaution
– Know equipment and systems
• Understand equipment hazards
• Isolation points
• Procedures for lockout
Locks/tags must clearly identify the employees who applied them.
3.13 WORK INTERFACE & COORDINATION

ICOM has outlined a minimum requirement in the work interface inside the Client
Facilities.
 In such case that ICOM will be performing work connected to, adjacent to, at an
operating Client facility, under these conditions, precautions will be necessary to
ensure that no damage occurs to this existing facility, including but not limited to
piping, utilities, roads, and structures that are to remain in operation and including
those to be modified or replaced.
 The Client Plant Facilities must be kept in continuous operation throughout the
operations period. No interruption will be permitted which adversely affects the
service provided.
 ICOM shall provide temporary facilities and make temporary modifications as
necessary to keep the existing facilities in continuous operation during the
operations period. Any temporary facilities, materials, equipment and labor
required to achieve this objective is subject for review on the Contract Scope of
Work for the Project. At the completion of work, all such temporary facilities,
materials, and equipment remaining shall be removed from the site.
 As approved by the Client’s Plant Operations, all or portions of the existing facility
may be taken out of service for short periods of time corresponding with expected
instances of minimu impact. ICOM shall notify the Client’s Plant Operations on
forms provided via predated arrangement to determine the feasibility of taking a
utility/operation out of service.
 If the Plant Operations determines that the utility/operation can be taken out of
service, ICOM shall then request the shutdown on standard forms provided by the
Client. Such requests shall be submitted to the Client before the requested date of
the shutdown as per advice by the Client and shall include: dates, times, locations,
procedures, and drawings showing materials and procedures proposed to be used.
 ICOM shall not park any vehicles, including concrete, hauling and delivery trucks,
in any street at any time unless approved by the Client’s Plant Operations. Access
must be maintained at all times for emergencies, sampling, equipment operations,
maintenance, and like items.


Revision Date :
 Before altering any vehicular or pedestrian access, ICOM shall notify the Client
prior to work execution on forms provided & approved by the Client. ICOM shall
then request the alteration on forms provided Client.
 Requests shall include reasons for the alteration, times, boundary limits, special
safety measures, proposed traffic rerouting widths of such route, and a map
detailing the above.
 At no time shall security of the site be compromised. If for any reason ICOM finds it
necessary to breach any existing perimeter fences or walls, permission of the
Client’s Plant Operations shall first be obtained.
 ICOM shall then request the alteration on forms provided by the Client. Requests
shall include:
o Reasons for the alteration

o Times, boundary limits
o Special Safety measures
o Proposed traffic rerouting with widths of such route
o Map/Plan detailing the above
The request shall also set forth details of repair of the wall or fences and shall
establish a timetable for completion of the repairs. The repaired wall or fence shall
be the same height as, and of comparable quality and appearance to the
previously existing operations.
3.13.1 Proposed Schedule of Operations Operation
The following shall be taken into consideration in preparing the proposed schedule of
operations operation if necessary to the working condition:
a. Identify Times when power outage may occur and number of hours in a single
period that the power may be off.
b. Identify if Standby Generator will be required during a period of Power outage.
c. Identify if the process flow may be reduced or stopped and the time and maximum
number hours this can occur.
d. Identify if temporary access or pedestrian is required
e. Identify if utilities to be relocated must remain in operation.
f. Identify if a time span is required between power or flow shutdown to allow system
recovery.
g. Identify if the Hydraulic capacity of the system must be maintained.
h. Identify if access to a specific structure or system that could become blocked
during operations activities must be maintained during the operations activities.


Revision Date :
Photography
During work interface, it shall be deemed prohibited to conduct picture taking within
Client premises, unless otherwise given specific permission on a particular location.
Possession and use of cameras in restricted industrial areas of the Client without
proper written authority shall not be allowed by ICOM project operations.
3.14 HYDRO-JETTING ACTIVITIES

High pressure water cleaning is highly hazardous and a complex operation. It should
only be used when other less hazardous methods have been considered and ruled
out as ineffective or inefficient.
Hydro Jetting (a.k.a Hydro Scrubbing) is a process in which your sewer pipes are
scoured, by streams of high-pressure water shooting out of a hose. High pressure
water are sometimes produced as high as 36,000 psi. These high-pressure streams
are strong enough to cut through and clear out any debris in your sewer lines. They
can also inflict severe injury. Cleaning should then only proceed when it has been
reviewed that hydro-jetting activity can be done with all hazards managed and at
minimal risks.
Hydro Jetting is typically done through an opening called a cleanout, which is an
accessible opening present in every plumbing system, and designed to allow
plumbers to easily "clean out" debris and other clogs.
A Hydro Jet system consists of a large tank of water, a special high-pressure hose, a
special high-strength nozzle, and a machine which pressurizes the water in the hose
so that it can spray out of the nozzle at a pressurized rate of up to 3,500 psi and a flow
rate of 18 gpm.
Every plumbing system is designed to carry waste water "downstream" using
gravity. The Hydro Jetting nozzle is placed at the "downstream" end of the plumbing
system and it works its way "upstream" against gravity. That way, any debris that is
cleared out by the Hydro Jet will harmlessly flow downstream where the drainage path
is already clear. The Hydro Jet systems used by Angel Plumbers are capable of
clearing out sewer lines over a length of several hundred feet.
Hydro Jetting is an appropriate solution when clogs cannot be removed through
traditional snaking, such as in the presence of stubborn roots that have found their
way into your sewer lines. Hydro Jetting is also required before Pipe Lining because
any debris present in the existing pipe may cause the epoxy lining resin to be
malformed and / or prevent it from bonding correctly to the existing pipe.
Hydro Jetting can easily cut through the most stubborn roots and debris and remove
built-up mineral deposits and other obstructions clogging the inside of your drainage
line. Although Hydro Jetting is strong enough to clear out roots from your sewer lines,
any amount of root penetration is cause for serious concern. Root penetration
pervasive enough to cause repeated backups indicates that the roots have gotten
thick enough over time to damage the pipe and its protective waterproof inner
coating. In those instances, Angel Plumbers recommends getting a Camera


Revision Date :
Inspection to determine the seriousness of the condition, because sewer line

replacement via Pipe Bursting may be required.
3.14.1 Responsibilities
Process Engineer – receiving the request must question the method and where
possible raise with the issuer the possibility of other less hazardous methods.
Permit receiver – must review the job safety analysis and discount alternatives. The
permit requester must ensure that special procedures relevant to the job and relevant
material safety data sheets are provided to the cleaning/painting contractor.
Permit issuer – be satisfied that the JSA the layout sketch and the checklist are
adequate. They must instigate a safe work review if there is any deviation from any
specifications contained in this manual including deviation from the Australian
standards.
Work supervisor – receiving the permit must be satisfied that all hazards have been
identified and risks minimized and that the operators are qualified and able to carry
out the work.
Operators – carrying out the work must be satisfied that all hazards have been
identified and minimized. They must also be satisfied that the training they have
received is adequate for them to start the job. They are responsible for compliance
with their own company’s written procedures contained in this manual.
Everyone involved – must be prepared to stop the work if they become aware of any
change to the agreed procedure or change in circumstances. They must also cease
the work immediately a malfunction occurs or immediately an unauthorised or
adequately protected person enters the barricaded area.
3.14.2 Equipment and Area Protection

All hydro blasting will comply with standards AS/NZS 4233.2:1999 ‘High Pressure
Water (Hydro) Jetting systems - Part 1: Guidelines for operation and Maintenance
especially section 2 to 5, and Part 2: Construction and Performance especially section
3 to 6. In addition to meeting the standards, requirements specific to ICOM sites are to
be specified by the Client.
Note: It is expected that, prior to coming on site, the contractor will select appropriate
equipment for the job and will perform equipment integrity checking. Documentation
from such checks should be filed for auditing purposes.
Equipment
1. The hydro blasting equipment area must be barricaded using barricade tape
barricade tape should extend out 10 metres in all directions from blasting
equipment where possible. Hoses extending from equipment to blasting area
should be surrounded by barricade tape and signs.
2. In the event it is not possible to isolate the prescribed area sturdy barriers/panels
must be placed/erected to shield operations.
3. Where hoses cross a roadway that cannot be closed to traffic the hoses must be
protected from vehicular damage by a covering ramp.


Revision Date :
4. The pumping unit should be located to minimize the length of hoses required.
Considerations should be given to the distance from operating equipment. Select a
location that does not require running hoses through an active access way or work
area. Care must be taken to protect hoses from damage by vehicular traffic hot
lines/equipment or external abrasion.
5. The pumping unit must be equipped with a safety valve and/or rupture disc
capable of rapidly relieving the full capacity of the pump.
6. The operating pressure of the high pressure hose and fittings must comply with
AS/NZS 4233.1. Hoses should be inspected before each job and tested according
the requirements of that standard. Hoses must be tagged with the latest test date
and test pressure.
7. Quick connect/disconnect fittings are not permissible for use for hydro blasting
hose connections must have a secondary joining mechanism otherwise called a
hose restrainer to prevent whipping if the connection is broken.
8. Blasting equipment must be grounded to minimise static electric build-up.
Equipment being blasted must also be grounded.
9. Minimum length of the shotgun barrel is 1.2m. If this is not practical a safe work
review will be required (comprising appropriate personnel) before allowing use of
a shorter barrel.
10. Shotguns shall be equipped with a single hand trigger switch as a minimum and
double triggers as required. The double-action switches should be positioned so
that both the operators hand are required to initiate high pressure water flow and
hence water pressure will drop off cease if either switch is released.
Note: A pressure regulator or dump valve that will immediately dump all the water
pressure when the control is released is the only approved fail safe control.
11. Whenever there is ANY likelihood of the cleaning device exiting the equipment
being cleaned than a mechanical anti-withdrawal device MUST be used. These
are described in section 9. Only anti-withdrawal devices approved by qenos may
be used.
12. It is permissible to use rigid lances where the operator is in control of the foot pedal
or r\safety trigger.
13. When lancing a foot or hand operated fail safe control with guard must be
manipulated by the lance operator. In some operations such as lancing exchanger
tubes or line moleing, another person may be used to assist with the lance or
hose. Only the lance operator (person nearest the working end of the lance)
should operate the fail safe device.
14. All equipment being cleaned must be unable to move and secured if necessary.
In particular, where a trestle is used for supporting a heat exchanger, ensure that
there is no possibility of the exchanger rolling off.
15. When cleaning exchanger tubes or small bore or fixed tube or piping, it is
permissible to use starter bars. The minimum length of starter bars required is 300
mm. In this case, an anti-withdrawal device is not required.


Revision Date :
16. At no time should the fail-safe control be tied down or locked into position. Injury
could result if the fail-safe is bypassed or locked.
17. Starter bar rods, longer in length than the diameter of the pipe, will be used when
using a tube nozzle (line moling) to cleaning large bore piping. A starter bar rod is
a rigid piece of pipe affixed to a line mole (tube nozzle) to prevent reversing of the
mole in the line
3.14.3 Personal Protective Equipment

The blast operator and those within the blasting area are required to wear the
following protective equipment when blasting:
 Hard hat
 Face shield
 Hearing protection
 Heavy duty rain suit or hydro blasting suit
 Rubber gloves, except during flex-lancing where operator safety is
compromised by handling difficulties caused by the gloves.
 Rubber boots with steel caps
 Other equipment, as required if a hazardous chemical is involved
The operator must wear a face mask when cleaning heat exchangers that have
been in cooling water service. This is to protect from the possibility of legionella
infection.
3.14.4 Housekeeping
During cleaning operations, accumulations of materials may form at the pipe/tube
openings. Work should be stopped and the materials removed when a safe work
position or working surface cannot be maintained.
This is particularly important where the work area is confined, confined working on
platforms and scaffolds and where material debris may accumulate from the
cleaning process.
3.14.5 Working Surfaces

Blast equipment must be operated from safe work surfaces as detailed in AS/NZS
4233.1:1999. Due to excessive back thrust exerted on the operator the use of
ladders and ‘A-frames’ are not acceptable as work platforms
3.14.6 Training & Certification

The cleaning/painting company shall ensure that all its operators are adequately
trained and certificated to carry out the work.
The cleaning/painting company must be able to produce and maintain a record of
all such training and refresher training


Revision Date :
When and where it is possible all high pressure cleaning operators will have
completed the training recommended by the Client.
3.15 DESERT DRIVING

All personnel who shall be driving in the desert shall undergo appropriate orientation
and briefing on ‘Desert Driving’. Client guide on safe driving tips and desert travel shall
be included in this briefing.
It is recommended that the driver have a copy of desert driving guidelines with him in
the vehicle. Personnel may coordinate with the contractor safety officer who may
avail of copies of desert driving guidelines from the Client Safety Adviser.
In particular, any person who drives in the desert shall ensure that:
 His immediate supervisor knows his destination and route
 His vehicle is in good condition with adequate fuel, oil and water
 His vehicle has tools, equipment and spares for emergency use.
 He has sufficient food and drinking water to sustain him until rescue, should be
stranded.
 He is familiar with survival and rescue techniques and procedures.
 Driver shall pass the off-the-road vehicle test conducted by the Client Driver’s
Training Unit before being permitted the use of 4 wheel drive vehicles.
3.15.1 Staying with Vehicle when stranded

A person lost or stranded in the desert must stay with the vehicle as it provides shelter
and to make it easier for searchers to locate him. When rescuers search for stranded
personnel
3.15.2 Sand Tires

Sand tires are hazardous to use when they are not properly inflated, when they are
driven at high speeds or when the roads are wet. It is the driver’s responsibility to
ensure the following requirements are met for sand tires:
Vehicle Type Tire Size Recommended Tire Pressure

Min. Max
.
Carryall, 4 x 4 9.00 x 16 15 35
Pickup. 4 x 4, ½ 9.00 x 15 15 35 Transport Section shall monitor
Ton compliance as indicated on tire
itself.
Pickup, 4 x 4, ¾ 9.00 x 16 15 35
Ton
Pickup, Crewcab, 11.00 x 16 15 35
4x4, 1 Ton


Revision Date :
Utility, 4x4 ¾ Ton 9.00 x 16 15 35

Utility, 4x4, 1 Ton 11.00 x 16 15 35
Stake Truck, 4x4, 11.00 x 16 15 35
1 Ton
Welder’s Truck, 11.00 x 16 15 35
4x4, 1 Ton
Maximum speed for sand tires (on hard dry road):

 70 KPH at maximum sand tire pressure
 20 KPH at minimum sand tire pressure
Since sand tires have a larger diameter than standard tires, speedometer readings will
not be accurate.
Unless the vehicle speedometer has been corrected to account for the oversize tires,
the driver should remember that he is travelling approximately 10-15% faster than the
speedometer reading.
3.15.3 Vehicle Inspection checklist:

1. The vehicle number, company name, current inspection stickers and license plate
(front and back) must be in place
2. Seat belts are mandatory for all vehicle occupants.
3. Two reflective warning triangles should be in each vehicle.
4. Windows and windshield must be clean and free of cracks or damage. The glass
must be in good condition. The windows must open and close properly.
5. All light (high and low beam headlights, tail lights, dash lights, stop lights, turn
signal lights and the rear license plate light) must be in working order. When fog
lights (front & rear) and clearance lights have been provided they must be also be
in good working order.
6. All brakes (foot and hand brakes) must be in good working order. Check the foot
and hand brake mechanism for correct operation.
7. The automatic transmission must be in good condition and should shift into the
parking position correctly.
8. Springs and shock absorbers must be in good condition with no alignment or
control problems.
9. There should be no exercise movement of the steering wheel and no signs of
damage. Steering knobs and loose coverings are prohibited.
10. Tires should have no breaks in the tire casing or exposed fabric and must be
inflated to correct air pressure as specified by the transportation department. (If the
treads show any signs of wear like bare patches, this could indicate defective
steering, springs and/or shock absorbers.)


Revision Date :
11. Check the wheels for rim damage. Make sure the wheels are not buckled or out of
alignment and wheel lug nuts are in place and secure on the rim.
12. If the vehicle is fitted with a trailer, the coupling must be intact and working
correctly. The trailer should have safety coupling chains, rear brake lights, turn
signals, tail lights and rear license plate lights.
13. Make sure that the inside and outside rear view mirrors are clean, adjusted,
secured and undamaged.
14. Check that the windshield wiper blades are in good condition, and operate
properly. Inspect the rear window wiper, if fitted.
15. The windshield washer should work properly and there should be water in the
washer container.
16. The speedometer should be in good working order.
17. Check the following fluids for leaks and proper levels, especially in hot weather.
 Radiator coolant
 Oil
 Brake fluid
 Transmission oil (checked with engine running)
 Distilled water for the battery
18. The vehicle’s horn must be operational.
19. The list of equipment carry out during the off road and desert driving are as follow
 First aid kit / Medicine
 Fire Extinguisher
 Road flare/Reflective triangle
 Jumper cables
 Tow strap
 Water Jag w/ Water
 Folding shovel
 Life Hammer
 Portable Air Compressor
 Hydraulic Jack
3.16 Cartridge Operated Tools

All operators of Cartridge Operated Tools shall be trained and certified as per
guidelines given by this SAFETY MANUAL. The list of all certified operators and their
certificates shall be kept by the Project Manager and copy furnished to the Client.


Revision Date :
No person may operate, clean, maintain, or repair any cartridge tool without
possessing a certificate of competency, issued by an accredited tool vendor or
manufacturer's representative, which identifies the particular model that the person is
qualified to handle.
There are two main types of cartridge tools:
1. Where the explosion from the cartridge fires the device down the barrel and into
the work. This type produces a muzzle velocity similar to a small calibre fire arm
and should be handled with the same respect as a gun. Injury can cause 1500 ft.
away from the tools.
2. Where the explosion from the cartridge sets on a piston which in turn impels the
fixing device in to the work. This type is only 25 % as powerful as the above but
serious injury can still be caused by mishandling this type of tool.
3.16.1 Maintenance and Storage of Cartridge Tools

All cartridge tools should be stored in a clean dry room and a register shall be
maintained. The tools shall be thoroughly cleaned and lubricated after each period of
usage. A complete overhaul should take place every year. A record of such
maintenance shall be kept by the store keeper.
3.16.2 Major Hazards associated with Cartridge Operated Tools

Using a cartridge operated tools in soft materials can cause the fixing device to
penetrate the materials and emerge from the other side like a bullet. Here are
operational guidelines of Cartridge Operated Tools:
 Careful inspection of all materials should be made before deciding on the use of a
cartridge too.
 Cartridge tools should not be used on concrete less than three times the fastener
shank penetration, or into every hard or brittle materials including, but not limited to
cast iron, glazed tile hardened steel, glass block, natural rock hollow tile, or smooth
brick.
 Ricochet can occur when operator tries to fire a fixing device into a hole already in
the material. The device can be deflected towards the operator.
 Care should be taken to ensure the new fixing is located at least 2” from a
previously made hole.
 Recoil from firing can throw the operator off balance and care should be taken to
ensure that the operator is aware of the force of recoil. This is particularly true
when working from ladders and scaffolding.
 If a misfire occurs, the tool should be retriggered without moving the equipment
from the work face. If the shot again fails, then a period of 30 seconds should be
allowed before removing the tools from the work face.
 The misfire cartridge should then be carefully removed from the tool according to
the manufacturers’ instruction.


Revision Date :
 Whenever cartridge tools are being used, the area around the operation should be
cleared of other personnel.
 If possible screen should be erected as a precaution against splintering.
 Cartridge tools shall not be used where there is a risk of fire or explosion.
 Cartridge tools operator should wear face and ear protection.
3.16.3 Power Actuated Tools

This tool operates like a loaded gun and should be treated with the same respect and
precautions. In fact, they are so dangerous that they must be operated only by
specially trained employees. Here are operational guidelines:
 These tools should not be used in an explosive or flammable atmosphere.
 Before using the tool, the worker should inspect it to determine that it is clean, that
all moving parts operate freely, and that the barrel is free from obstructions.
 The tool should never be pointed at anybody.
 The tool should not be loaded unless it is to be used immediately. A loaded tool
should not be left unattended, especially where it would be available to
unauthorized persons.
 Hands should be kept clear of the barrel end.
 To prevent the tool from firing accidentally, two separate motions are required for
firing: one to bring the tool into position, and another to pull the trigger.
 The tools must not be able to operate until they are pressed against the work
surface with a force of at least 5 pounds greater than the total weight of the tool.
 If a powder-actuated tool misfires, the employee should wait at least 30 seconds,
and then try firing it again.
 If it still will not fire, the user should wait another 30 seconds so that the faulty
cartridge is less likely to explode, than carefully remove the load. The bad cartridge
should be put in water.
 Suitable eye and face protection are essential when using a powder-actuated tool.
 The muzzle end of the tool must have a protective shield or guard centered
perpendicularly on the barrel, to confine any flying fragments, or particles that
might otherwise create a hazard when the tool is fired.
 The tool must be designed so that it will not fire unless it has this kind of safety
device.
 All powder-actuated tools must be designed for varying powder charges, so that
the user can select a powder level, necessary to do the work without excessive
force.


Revision Date :
 If the tool develops a defect during use it should be tagged. and taken out of
service immediately until it is properly repaired.
3.16.4 Fasteners
When using powder-actuated tools to apply fasteners, there are some precautions to
consider. Fasteners must not be fired into material that would let them pass through
to the other side. The fastener must not be driven into materials like brick or concrete
any closer than 3 inches to an edge or corner. In steel, the fastener must not come
any closer than one-half inch from a corner or edge. Fasteners must not be driven
into very hard or brittle materials which might chip or splatter, or make the fastener
ricochet. An alignment guide must be used when shooting a fastener into an existing
hole. A fastener must not be driven into a spelled area caused by an unsatisfactory
fastening.
3.17 EXCAVATION & TRENCHING

The primary hazard associated with excavation and trenching activities is cave-in. A
cave-in may result in entrapment and eventual suffocation or workers in an
unprotected excavation. Associated hazards include falls, falling loads, mobile
equipment, water accumulation, hazardous atmospheres, and access and egress
obstructions.
This procedure has been developed to assist compliance with the safety standards
adopted by ICOM for its contract project as maybe applicable. This procedure shall
serve only as a minimum for all site excavation and trenching activities performed by
ICOM engaged in such activities, and therefore, does not prohibit additional levels of
protection deemed necessary by a particular activity
3.17.1 Definitions
Excavation- Any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in earth's surface

formed by earth removal.
Trench - A narrow excavation made below the surface of the ground in which the
depth is greater than the width and the width does not exceed 15 feet.
NOTE: For the purposes of this policy and OSHA requirements, the same
requirements apply to all excavations, including trenches.
Competent Person - One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable

hazards in the surroundings, or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous,
or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective
measures to eliminate them.
The competent person must have had specific training in, and be knowledgeable of
the applicable standards. ICOM shall ensure that the competent person has
appropriate training has full knowledge and capable of identifying existing and
predictable hazards in excavation work or take prompt corrective measures.


Revision Date :
Angle Of Repose - The greatest angle above the horizontal plane at which a material
lie without sliding.
Benching System - A method of protecting employees from cave-in by excavating

the sides of an excavation to form one or a series of horizontal steps with near-vertical
surfaces between the levels.
Shoring System - A Mechanical or timber structure designed to prevent cave-in of an

excavation.
Sloping System - A Method of preventing cave-in by forming sides inclined at an

angle away from the excavation. The angle of incline varies with soil type.
Shield System - A structure (permanent or portable) designed to withstand a cave-in.

These structures can be pre-manufactured or job-built in accordance with
29CFRI926.652(c) (3) or (c) (4). These systems are often referred to as "trench
boxes" or "trench shields".
3.17.2 Summary of Soil Types and the Maximum Allowable Slopes

 Stable Rock End – Natural Mineral
matter that can be excavated
with vertical sides, such as
sand stone.
 Type A Soil – Previously

undisturbed cohesive or
cemented soil, such as clay or
marl.


Revision Date :
 Type B Soil – Less cohesive soil,

such as mix of sand, rocks
and clay.
d
d
 Type C Soil – Least cohesive soil, example are gravel, sand, muddy
freely seeping soils, submerged rock that is not stable, or layered.
disturbed system. Previously disturbed soil is Type C soil.
d
1
1.5
1.5 d
3.17.3 Excavation Pocket Card
EXCAVATION SAFETY POCKET CARD

Use this safety inspection pocket card when planning, constructing, entering, and/or
restoring excavations where buried utilities, pipelines, or cables maybe present.
PLANNING
Has a pre-Excavation Checklist been completed and on site?
Are utilities, cables, and pipelines located and marked?
Was an excavation plan (calculation & Drawings) prepared by a Civil Engineer if
Excavation > 6m (20 ft) deep?
Has the soil type (see back been determined by a soil analysis or by a competent
person?


Revision Date :
Is a Confined Space Entry Permit required on site?

OPERATIONS
Is only excavating/backfilling equipment allowed within 2 m (6.5 ft) of the excavation
and are following clearances maintained (unless properly designed shoring is used):
 Vehicles/cranes/heavy equipment more than the depth of excavation away
from excavation (2 m [6.5 ft] minimum),
 Scaffold post > 1.5 times the depth of the excavation away?
Has one or more of the following:
 Has a pre-Excavation Checklist been completed and on site?
 Are utilities, cables, and pipelines located and marked?
 Was an excavation plan (calculation & Drawings) prepared by a Civil Engineer
if Excavation > 6m (20 ft) deep?
 Has the soil type (see back been determined by a soil analysis or by a
competent person?
 Is a Confined Space Entry Permit required on site?
Methods of protection against sidewall cave-in been used and has it been per the
excavation drawing?
 Benching
 Sloping (See Back)
 Shoring (including trench shield, etc.)
 Are spoil piles placed > .6 m (2 ft) from the excavation?
 Are pedestrian barricades erected > 1m (3 ft) away?
 Is a documented inspection performed daily by a ”Competent Person”
PERSONNEL ENTRY
Do only authorized personnel enter the excavation?
Is any water in the excavation controlled by pumping?
Are gas test conducted (e.g., low oxygen, toxic gas)?
Is a ladder or other access available within 7.5 m (25 ft) travel distance (e.g., ladder
spaced < 15 m [50 ft] apart)?
Is emergency rescue equipment available?
RESTORATION
Has the work area been restored?
Are the working surfaces level?
SUMMARY OF SOIL TYPES AND MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SLOPES


Revision Date :
A “Competent Person” is a person properly trained to identify existing and potential

hazards, soil conditions, and proper design (e,i., benching, shoring & sloping)
For Sloping when excavation depth < 6 m (20 ft), use the following maximum
allowable sidewall slopes for the type of , where “d” is the depth of the excavation.
3.17.4 Excavation Procedure
Prior to beginning any trenching operation, all surrounding hazards must be

evaluated, including the location of trees, large rocks, buildings, and sidewalks. These
items should either be removed or made safe.
1. Prior to digging, the location of underground utilities including telephone, electrical,
sewer, water, tanks, etc, must be estimated and identified.
2. The appropriate utility companies must be identified prior to digging.
3. The "Competent Person" shall ensure that appropriate measures are taken to
protect the underground installations, and safeguard employees from potential
hazards associated with the installation.
4. Any excavation greater than four (4) feet in depth must comply with Confined
Space Entry procedure.
5. Excavations less than (5) feet that have been determined by the "competent
person" to be safe from cave-in, are not required to be shored.
6. All walls and faces of excavations to which employees are exposed, must be
guarded by a shoring system, sloping of the ground, or other equivalent means.
7. All excavations must have adequate means of egress, including steps or ladders,
and must be provided within 25 feet travel distance.
8. All slopes shall be excavated to the angle of repose.
9. All excavations shall be sloped at an angle not steeper from the horizontal as
defined in the SAFETY MANUAL. Steeper slopes may be used if options 2, 3, and
4 are utilized, following references as maybe provided by the SAFETY MANUAL.
10. An authorized & competent engineer may design excavations different from those
noted in item 8 above if appropriate documentation is provided and maintained.
11. Manufacturer designed support systems may be used if that use is in accordance
with the manufacturer's tabulated data. Any uses deviating from that tabulated
data must be in writing from the manufacturer and be present on the jobsite.
12. Water Accumulation - Employees may not work in an excavation in which water
has accumulated unless control devices are activated and employees are
equipped with harnesses and lifelines.
13. The "Competent Person" must inspect the job site prior to beginning the
excavation and prior to actual work within the excavation. Additionally, daily
inspections must be conducted on all safety and support systems and more
frequent inspections after rainfall and other unusual circumstances that may pose
additional hazards for the employees.


Revision Date :
The removal of support systems at the end of an excavation project shall be

performed in a manner that will not jeopardize the safety of the workers. The removal
of supports shall begin at the bottom of the excavation and progress upward
simultaneously with backfilling operations.
3.17.5 Safety Considerations

Prior to beginning, complete the Excavation and Trenching Checklist and Permit
Form. This form contains information that should be considered prior to working in an
excavation and provides documentation of the project. The form should be signed by
the Competent Person. All involved personnel must be briefed on the directions and
precautions associated with the trenching operation.
 Employees shall not be allowed to work on sloped or benched areas of
excavations above other employees unless those employees at the lower level are
adequately protected.
 Structural ramps and runways associated with the excavation project shall be
designed by a person qualified in structural design and constructed as to design.
 Structures to be used for employee access only may be designed and constructed
by a "Competent Person".
 If excavation work is within 25 feet of a roadway, employees must be protected by
reflective vests in addition to roadway barricades.
 All excavation sites must be adequately barricaded, using at a minimum, fencing
and flashing barricades on all sides in which work is not in progress.
 Public thoroughfares (sidewalks, common paths, etc.) shall be barricaded a
minimum of ten (10) feet from the excavation work site.
 Any excavation greater than four (4) feet deep which is to be left unattended for
greater than 24 hours, or is subject to water retention, must be fenced to a height
of at least four feet using appropriate fencing materials.
 Personnel shall not be allowed to go under loads being handled by lifting or
excavation equipment. Employees must stand away from any vehicle being loaded
or unloaded.
 All materials and equipment must be kept at least two (2) feet from the edge of the
excavation.
 All persons working within the excavation must wear a harness with a life line
attached.
3.17.6 Hazardous Atmospheres

Employees working in excavations which have, or have the potential of having
hazardous (i.e. oxygen deficiency, toxic or flammable gases) shall be entered under
procedures outlined in the "Permit Required" Confined Space Entry Policy. These
procedures shall include atmospheric testing, mechanical ventilation, lifelines,
respirators, and emergency rescue preparation.
Welding operations have the potential of creating a hazardous atmosphere in an
excavation. The competent person shall ensure that additional safety factors are


Revision Date :
incorporated into any welding operation by completing a "HOT WORK PERMIT" and
checklist. This form shall be signed by the workers and the "Competent Person"
and/or supervisor, and attached to the excavation permit form. One copy shall be
retained by the "Competent Person" and one copy shall be forwarded to the Client’s
Safety Office.
3.17.7 Training Requirements

Competent Person - For the purposes of this policy, the "competent person" must
have a minimum of eight (8) hours (formal) initial training in the hazards of excavation
and trenching operations and two (2) hours of annual refresher training thereafter.
Workers - All workers involved with excavation and trenching operations must have a
minimum of eight (8) hours annual training in excavation and trenching safety, either
formal, video tape, or combination.


Revision Date :
4.0 HSE FORMS

4.1 Incident Reports
4.1.1 Emergency Incident Report
INSTRUCTIONS: Submit this report to the Emergency Response Manager, copy furnished to CLIENT Project Representative
and Safety Adviser. For critical and serious emergencies, the following information should be faxed or phoned immediately to the
mentioned CLIENT officials and the concerned facility operations owner.
General Information
Location of Emergency: Date of Report:

Emergency Contact Person: Emergency Contact Number:
Description of Emergency (use attachments if necessary)
Date & Time of Emergency:
Areas/locations affected:
Description and Nature of Damages:
Emergency Response:
Available Yes ___ No ___ , if yes, which ERT
___________________________________________
Injuries Yes __ No ___
If yes, how many _____, details of injured personnel:
Name Position/ ID # Injury Action Taken
1.
2.
3.
Other Facilities Contacted for assistance:


Revision Date :
4.1.2 First Information Accident Report

Detailed Report Required Within 3 Days Control No_________________
Accident Location: Date Of Accident: Time Of Accident:
Company: Personnel Injured: Badge Number:
Type Of Injuries: Property Damage And Estimated Cost Damage:
Description Of Accident:
Witness Statement(s)
What Caused The Accident:
What Corrective Action Has Been Taken
Signed:______________________________________________________________Badge No:________________________
Date Of Report:________________________________________________
Name (Printed):_____________________________________________________________________
Company:___________________________________________________ Job Title:_________________________________


Revision Date :
4.2 Project Emergency Contact List

Project Emergency Contact List (posted at all offices and bulletin boards)
Name Company/Dept Designation/Position Contact #/s E-mail
1
2
3
4
5
Emergency Contact Card (given to all project personnel)
Position Contact Number
ICOM Project Main Line / Operator
ICOM Project Manager (ERM)
ICOM Safety Manager (ERC)
ICOM Safety Supt (asst ERC)
ICOM Main First aid room Nurse (ERT-Med)
ICOM Const’n Manager (ERT-Elect/Mech/Civ)
ICOM Roving ERT Patrol
ICOM Security Supt/Supv
ICOM Work In-charge (SEIL-per area)
CLIENT Project Representative
CLIENT Safety Adviser
Emergency Hotline
Police
Fire Dept
Civil Defense
(Back side of the Emergency Contact Card)
How to Communicate an emergency:
(1) Call the Emergency Number for the type of your emergency (ex: 999 if for Police assistance)
(2) Give your name, contact number, company and badge number
(3) Give your exact location, type of emergency and any other critical information, ex: injuries, explosion, equipment
failure, etc.
(4) Ask the receiver of the call to repeat your information
(5) Stay on line for inquiries of the receiver or wait for any further instructions


Revision Date :
4.3 Evacuated Personnel Attendance Survey

Evacuated Personnel Attendance Survey:
Dept/Section/Area Total # of Total # of Balance Remarks
Personnel at site Personnel
evacuated
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
4.4 List of Equipment and Supply

Equipment SPECIFICATIONS
1.0 Emergency Rescue Vehicles

a. 4x4 SUV (Pathfinder)-
b. 4x4 Pick-up (Nissan Mazda
c. H-1 Hyundai Ambulance
d. Hi ace Van Ambulance
e. Etc.
2.0 Emergency Hauling and Desert Rescue Equipment SPECIFICATIONS
a. Crane
b. Loader
c. Bull dozer
d. Back Hoe
e. Etc.


Revision Date :
4.5 Contractor’s Monthly Safety Report


Revision Date :
4.6 Monthly Injury Summary Report


Revision Date :
4.7 Weekly Inspection Checklist
Doc. No.: ICOM-HSE-00

Rev. : 00
HSE ASSESSMENT REPORT Date :
INSTRUCTIONS:
1 Rate each category line item from 3 HIGH to 1 LOW. Subtract 1 point for each deficiency/violation. Zero (0) points for Lacking or N/A Not Applicable.
2 List your scoring observations on Form No.
PROJECT NAME : PROJECT NO: AREA NAME:
SR. POINTS
WORK PRACTICES SCORE % CONDUCTED BY DATE / TIME REMARKS
NO. AWARDED
1 HOUSE KEEPING
Work areas clean & organized. Area free of protruding nails, walkways unobstructed, trash
a
bins available & maintained, dust control, oil containment in place. 3 0
Material storage areas organized, safe access provided with physical barriades, entry/exit
b
identified, faded warning tape replaced. 3 0
Area free of tripping hazards, cords, hoses routed away from walkways or elevated 2m &
c
flagged for visibility. 3 0
d Rebar ends protected with caps 3 0
e Adequate number of toilets available and maintained in a clean and sanitary condition
including paper towel 3 0
f Safety signage posted in appropriate locations & containers labeled 3 0
g Water fascility on site. 3 0
POSSIBLE POINTS AWARDED 21 0
2 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
a Approved hard hats, safety glasses, hearing protection, face shields, safety foot wear. All
maintained and worn properly. 3 0
b Clear safety glasses worn inside buildings and poorly illuminated work area 3 0
Face shield worn during welding, burning, grinding, chipping, chemical handling drilling,
c
concrete pouring. 3 0
d Proper foot protection worn for job performed (steel toed rubber boots for concrete) 3 0
e Other; respirators, gloves, chemical resistant garments. 3 0
3 HOISTING AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT

Chainfalls, come alongs, synthetic chokers & wire rope slings in good condition with current
a
inspection. All hooks equipped with a functional safety latch. 3 0
b Crane bears third party inspection sticker, using outriggger mats and softeners used as
required. 3 0
c
Certified riggers equipped with an Orange Hi-visibility vest and using whistle when required. 3 0
d Approved lift plan developed and available, and proper rigging techniques used. 3 0 NO HEAVY LIFTING AT SITE


Revision Date :
4 VEHICLES AND MOBILE EQUIPMENT

a Lights, brakes, horns, back-up alarms working properly. 3 0
b Seat belts provided and used 3 0
c Weekly equipment inspection checklist completed by Operator. 3 0
d Equipment used properly and as per the purpose it was designed. 3 0
e Licenses or certifications as required. 3 0
f Other - flagman/equipment spotter available and searing GREEN Hi-visibility vest 3 0
5 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Electrical cords in good condition (no taped splices) & color coded, Elevated 2m high, flagged
a
for visibility, routed away from walkways & water. 3 0
b Tools are maintained in a safe condition, inspected and color coded for the month 3 0
Power hand tools equipped with a DEAD MAN switch. Electrical power tools are double
c
insulated, connected to a GFCI or grounded. 3 0
d All protective safety guards and torque handles secured and used. Tools properly carried,
stored and maintained. The right tool is being used and used correctly for the task. 3 0
Couplings of pneumatic or hydraulic hose connections properly secured. Pneumatic hoses
e
fitted with whipcheck arrestors or secured with a safety wire. 3 0
Stationary fuel driven equipment (Generators and Compressor etc.) bears the Third party
f Inspection Sticker. Hearing protection safety signs posted near high intensity noise
generating equipment. 3 0
g When required all material is secured and work benches utilized. 3 0
h
Proper adjustment on work rest and wheels properly dressed on bench grinders. 3 0
6 FIRE PROTECTION & COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDERS

a Flammables & combustible materials stacked & stored properly 3 0
b Fire extinguishers inspected and located 15 meters from source. 3 0
c Safely can fuel containers are equipped with self closing lids and clearly labeled 3 0
Transferring flammable liquids between containers or refueling done with electrical bond
d
apparatus 3 0
All storage drums maintained with lids closed, equipped with proper content/hazard lables and
e
grounded. 3 0
Minimum 5m distance separating Oxygen and Fuel Gasses. All cyl's upright, with caps on &
f
secured. 3 0
Flash Back Arrestors instaled at the Regulator (gauge) and check valves at the torch for
g
cutting torches. 3 0
h Proper use of fire blankets, spark containment & welding screens where required. 3 0
i Regulator gauges properly attached and maintained. 3 0


Revision Date :
7 PLANNING FOR SAFETY & SAFE WORK PERMITS

a weekly equipment inspection checklist completed by Operator. 3 0
b Pre-talk-safety reviews (Toolbox Talks) available for review. 3 0
c
Evidence of safety plan being followed e.g., tie off, barricading, shoring/sloping, signage etc. 3 0
8 SAFETY RECOGNITION & AWARENESS PROMOTION

a
Contractor supervisor of the month signboard posted in contractors area(s). 3 0
b
Safety educational posters, employee slogans and suggestions posted. 3 0
c
Contractor JSA of the month winners posted on contractors main signboard. 3 0
POINT SCORED 135 0.0 0
DEMERIT SCORING
1 Nearmiss 1 0 1
2 Reportable Incident (fire, property damage, process upset etc.) 0 0 0
3 Recordable Incident (dedical aid or restricted work case) 0 0 0
4 Lost Time Accident 0 0 0
GRAND TOTAL 1 0 1
AREA ENGINEER / SUPERVISOR INCHARGE SITE HSE


Revision Date :
4.8 Weekly Safety Toolbox Meeting


Revision Date :
4.9 Monthly Jobsite Fire Protection Inspection

NAME OF CONTRACTOR: INSPECTION DATE: Total number of employees on site:
CONTRACTOR SAFETY REP.: CONTRACTOR’S CLIENT J.O. JOB TITLE Number:

PHONE NUMBER:
CLIENT SITE: PHONE NUMBER: CLIENT SITE:
Okay =  , x = Needs Improvement (requires Comments), N/A = Not Applicable)
 Site and Yard Fire Plan approved by Loss Prevention _____________________________

 Inspection and Fire Protection Equipment Recorded ___________________________
 Adequate Fire Extinguishers, Water Barrels, Hoses ___________________________
 Emergency Reporting Procedures Posted ___________________________________
 Telephone Availability ___________________________________________________
 Fire Training Program ___________________________________________________
 Fire Drills Conducted ___________________________________________________
 Site Access, Good Roads, Two Entrances __________________________________
 ‘No Smoking’ Signs Posted ______________________________________________
 Designated Smoking Signs Posted ________________________________________
 25’ Clearance Around Fire Hydrants _______________________________________
 Storage Yard Fenced With 2 – 15‘ Gates ___________________________________
 15’ Driveways in All Parts of Store Yard for Fire Trucks ________________________
 Aisle Ways between Materials & Boundary Fence 10’ min. ______________________
 All flammable Liquid Storage, Isolated & Downwind ___________________________
 50’ Clearance from Buildings of Stored Materials _____________________________

 No Motor Vehicles Repaired, Stored Inside Materials Yard ______________________
 No Smoking and/ or Open Flames Inside Materials Yard _______________________
 Stacked Materials arranged with Combustibles/ Non-Combustible alternating _______
 Daily Removal of Trash from Site _________________________________________
 25’ Clearance of Trash from Buildings, Materials, Equipment, Etc. ________________
 Site/ Yard Fire Inspection Recorded ________________________________________
 Trained Fire Watchman Non-Work Hours. __________________________
Signed: _________________________ Date: ______________________
A Copy of this report is to be turned in to CLIENT at the Contractors Last Weekly Progress Meeting of the Month.


Revision Date :
4.10 Fire Extinguisher Inspection Log

A Copy of this report is to be turned in to SEC at the Contractors Last Weekly Progress Meeting of the Month.
Types: DCP; CO2; H2O


Revision Date :
4.11 First Aid Supply Inventory

At Work Site, An employer who employs less than fifty
workmen shall provide at the work site a first aid
cabinet containing bandages, medicines, and
disinfectants as follows:
1. A sufficient number of not less than 12 sterile,
small-size finger dressings.
2. A sufficient number of not less than 6 sterile
medium-size hand dressings.
3. A sufficient number of not less than 6 sterile large-
size hand dressings.
4. A sufficient supply of absorbent cotton wool for
packing and firming up splints. Such supply shall not
be less than 200 grams of cotton wool in small 25-
gram packages and two 500-gram packages.
5. A sufficient number of not less than 12 gauze
bandages 7 cm. in width.
6. A sufficient number of not less than 12 gauze
bandages 11 cm. in width.
7. Not less than 4 yards of adhesive tape in rolls, 1 cm.
in width.
8. Not less than 100 grams of Mercurochrome in
aqueous solution.
9. Two 10-gram shakers of sulfa powder for
sterilization of wounds.
10. 100 grams of aromatic ammonia solution in a glass
bottle with glass stopper.
11. A medium-sized Thomas’ thigh splint, a wooden
posterior leg splint, a wooden elbow splint, a wooden
Carr splint for the forearm, a wooden palm splint,
and other types of ready-to-use splints.
12. Minimum of 6 triangle bandages.
13. Minimum of safety pins.
14. Ointment for burns containing a disinfectant and an
analgesic.
15. A minimum of ten 70 x 70 bandages for turns.
16. A pair of scissors with blunt ends.


Revision Date :
4.12 Vehicle Inspection Form


Revision Date :
4.13 Work Permit Audit


Revision Date :
4.14 Heavy Equipment Operator Certificate Record

CONTRACTOR CRANE AND HEAVY EQUIPMENT
SAUDI ARABIAN GOVERNMENT LICENSE AND CLIENT CERTIFICATION
COMPLETE INFORMATION BELOW AND SUBMIT WITH CLEAR CONTRACTOR:

COPIES OF:
1. ALL PAGES OF SAUDI ARABIAN GOVERNMENT LICENSE
2. BOTH SIDES OF CLIENT CERTIFICATION
CONTRACT NO. B.I. NO. J.O. NO. DATE
SUBMITTED
GREGORIAN HEGIRA
NAME CLIENT EXPIRY DATE SAG LIC EXP. CLIENT EQUIPMENT
ID NO. DATE CERT. NO. AUTHORIZE
MO DA YR MO DA YR D TO
OPERATE
SITE REPRESENTATIVE: PREPARED BY: DATE:

DIVISION SAFETY
4.15 First Aid Log

DATE TIME NAME BADGE # CRAFT DESCRIBE TREATMEN RETURNED DOCTORS LOST
NATURE OF T GIVEN TO WORK VISIT TIME
INJURY OR
ILLNESS
(BE SPECIFIC)


Revision Date :
4.16 Accident/Incident Report


Revision Date :
4.17 Near Miss Report Form

Incident Details
Date Time: Location/Plant/Equipment:
Dept: Org. Code Division/Unit:
Near Miss Description (Explain What Happened – Use Attachment if Needed)
ESTIMATE OF LOSS POTENTIAL (What injuries or losses might have occurred)

INJURIES
Property/Equipment Damage:
Environmental Damage:
Other:
ANALYSIS (Why did it happen [List unsafe act, unsafe conditions, wrong procedures/equipment or other factor
CORRECTIVE ACTION (What must be done to prevent recurrence – list recommendation)
REVIEWER INFORMATION
REVIEWED BY Supvr. or above (Name/Title/Badge Number) Date:
Distribution: Original – Department files 1 Copy – Facility Division Head 1 Copy – Area Loss Prevention Division (for
serious near miss only)
4.18 Designated Competent Person Acknowledgement Form

DEFINITION
A Competent person is a person who has the ability to recognize hazards and the authority to correct them.
RESPONSIBILITY
The designated competent person is responsible for recognizing and correcting safety hazards. This person has the authority to stop
work in the event of any safety concern on the jobsite. This representative will be the contact person for the contractor management on
safety related issues pertaining to his designated area of competency.
The contractor’s manager must complete this form and the contractor’s designated person(s). Where a contractor is responsible for
multiple crafts, it may be necessary to maintain additional designated competent persons and forms. This form must be updated any
time there is a change in the designated representative(s).
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
CONTRACTOR
I______________________________________, representing the _____(CONTRACTOR)______,

(The Contractor Project Manager)
have assigned ____(Employee’s Name)____ to be the competent person in the area of ___(Type of Work)____, and I acknowledge
that this individual has been thoroughly trained and is experienced in hazards recognition and has the authority to stop work and correct
hazards in the event of an imminent danger situation.
_______________________________ __________
The Contractor Project Manager Date


Revision Date :
EMPLOYEE
I acknowledge that I have been thoroughly trained to perform as a competent person in the area of ___(Type of Work)____, for
____(The Contractor)____ and I understand that I have the responsibility and authority to correct hazards and to stop work in the event
of an imminent danger situation.
________________________________ _________________________ _________

(Signature) Type or Print Name (Badge No.) Date
Competent Person Date Competent Person
4.19 Monthly Environmental Reporting

Waste Name Source Who/What Destination/Disposal Unit Qty. Comments
Collects location
Solid Waste
Used Oil
Domestic Waste (Plastic, Bottles, etc.)
Combustible Waste
Food Stuff
Scrap Metal
Expired Chemicals
Expired Medicines
Used Filter Metals
Cotton Rags
Glass
Rubber Scrap (e.g. tires)
Plastic Scrap


Revision Date :
Paints
Empty Batteries
Wastewater
Camp Wastewater
Process Wastewater
Other (Vehicle Service etc.)
Water Consumption
Water Used in camps
Water used in process
Other (Vehicle Service etc)
Oil Spills
Oil Spills
Energy/Fuel Consumption
Diesel Fuel Used-Power Generation
Diesel Fuel Used for Vehicle,

Computer, etc.
Petrol or any other Fuel usage


Revision Date :
4.20 Excavation, Trench, and Shoring Inspection Checklist


Revision Date :
4.21 Eexcavation checklist


Revision Date :
4.22 JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS (JSA) hazards Checklist

When performing JSA’s, the following checklist will be useful as a reminder; it is based on the principles of anticipate, analyze,
eliminate or control conditions.
# TYPE PRECAUTION REMINDER INITIAL
1 Prevent Is the equipment isolated? By blinds? By double block & bleed? Is the
Hydrocarbon hydrocarbon removed? Is the equipment purged? Is gas test
release acceptable?
2 Electric shock Is the equipment isolated? Is it tagged? Is it locked? Did you try to start
Precautions it? All electrical sources isolated? Capacitors? Batteries? Static
electricity? High-voltage sources?
3 Chemicals Chemicals are identified and data from CHB used?

Handling If no CHB, have you contacted the environmental engineer for his
advice? Chemical reactions neutralized?
4 Radiation Are the precautions for handling radiation source followed?

Barricades? Warning lights? Will any radioactive waste be generated?
5 Rotating Are the guards intact?

Equipment No leaks of water, steam, product?
6 Cranes Vehicles Is license of operator valid?

Is sticker for vehicle or crane valid?
Is hot work permit required?
Can hot work permit be issued safely?
Is vehicle safe to operate in the planned area?
Are sling inspection data valid?
Is critical lift plan required?
Is the rigger certified for the load to be lifted?
If chain block to be used, is it of the correct safe working load?
7 Confined Space Is the space safe for human entry?

Air breathable?
No hydrocarbons present?
Biological hazards removed?
Temperature not too hot?
Safe access and egress?
Knowledgeable standby man?
8 Heights Is the safety harness in good condition?
Does everyone working at height have a safety harness provided?
Is there a safe location to attach safety harness?
9 Vibration If vibration is to be expected, are all fittings tight and protected from
loosening?
10 Noise Will additional noise be generated?

Have you considered how to protect hearing of all involved including
contractors?
11 Moving Is the equipment safely attached to the plant grounding

Equipment System?
12 Human Factors Is the scaffolding inspected and tagged as safe?

Are all employees provided with PPE and using it?
Is enough light available?


Revision Date :
13 Weather Will the expected weather affect the safety of the job, i.e.:
Sandstorm, lightning, and rain.
14 Hot/Cold In cold areas of the plant, has provision been made to warm the
Objects equipment safe for human interface?
In hot areas of the plant, has provision been made to cool the
equipment safe for human interface?
Are sources protected from human contact?
Electrical? Steam? Flames? Solar? Cryogenic materials?
15 Tools & Equip. Is the tools and equipment safe to operate?

16 Prevent Can it be lifted mechanically?
Muscular Stress Can more than one person share the lift load?
Is safe lifting technique understood?
While lifting are hazards splash and pour hazards eliminated?
17 Mental Stress Are the persons performing the work free from outside stress?
18 Environmental Will the job release harmful elements to the environment (air, Soil, and
Concerns drains)?
Are precautions known to prevent release?
Is the approved disposal method available?
19 Fire Fighting Is it available?

Equipment Is it in working order?
20 Others Specify JSA Leader is trained in JSA process.

Applicable standards or codes are referenced where known.
Required permits and isolations listed.
Involve people performing the job.
JSA is filed appropriately, and entered into database.

Safety Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Safety Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Document Title : OPERATIONS SAFETY MANUAL

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 1 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

Health Safety and Environment Policy

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 2 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

1.2 HSE Management, Leadership and Accountability

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 3 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

1.4 DECLARATION OF ADHERENCE TO CLIENT SAFETY REGULATIONS SUBJECT

1.5 LOSS PREVENTION PROGRAM

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 4 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

MANUAL revisions, as part of document control, shall be provided to all concerned

1.6 SAFETY ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES

PROJECT HSE ORGANIZATION

ICOM PROJECT MANAGER

WORK PERMIT SITE NURSE SAFETY SUPERVISOR SECURITY SUPERVISOR

WORK PERMIT SAFETY OFFICER SECURITY STAFF

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 5 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

General Manager : - Overall Company representative

1.6.2 Site Management Responsibility

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 6 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

HSE Managers / Supervisors / Inspectors (Safety Officers)

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 7 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

 Coordinate and conduct safety training’s in accordance with the OPERATIONS

Superintendent/Supervisor/Foreman (Work Supervisors)

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 8 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

 Implement and observe the requirements of this SAFETY MANUAL.

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 9 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

All Project Personnel Responsibility

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 10 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

ICOM Time Allocation of HSE Activities

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 11 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

1.7 TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINITIONS

1.8 SAFETY ADMINISTRATION

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 12 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

 Safety is the responsibility of every employee

1.8.1 Elimination of Hazards

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 13 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

1.8.3 Injuries on Duty

1.8.4 Safety Equipment / Personal Protective Equipment

1.8.5 Tools and Appliances

1.8.6 Safe Road Route Passage

1.8.7 Equipment Check and Safety Task Instruction

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 14 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

d. A regular reminder to be given during these work procedure discussions is to

1.8.8 Disciplinary Actions

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 15 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

ICOM Operations Safety Manual Page 16 of 231

Document Code : ICOM / HSE / 2017

13.0 Disregard to follow Written warning Written warning Written warning